Contents

Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions PDF

1 of 160
1 of 160

Summary of Content for Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions PDF

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg 1 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and Troubleshooting

CONTENTS Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Basic Control Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Scroll Protection Module (SPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board . . . . . . . . 7 Fan Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Reverse Rotation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim . . . . . . 14 Local Equipment Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . 16 Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Dual Chiller Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 High-Efficiency Variable Condenser Fans (HEVCF)

(30RB080-390 with Greenspeed Intelligence) . . . . 26 Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Machine Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cooling Set Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Remote Alarm and Alert Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Broadcast Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Alarm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Actual Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Optional Heat Reclaim Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 RTPF (Round Tube Plate Fin) Condenser Coil

Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations 56 MCHX Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Condenser Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Refrigerant Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 60 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Thermistors (Tables 51-53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES. . . . . . . . . . 93 APPENDIX B CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 APPENDIX C CCN ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 APPENDIX D R-410A PRESSURE VS.

TEMPERATURE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 APPENDIX E MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND

LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RB LIQUID CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can perform basic maintenance functions of cleaning coils and filters and replacing filters. All other operations should be performed by trained service personnel. When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes, including ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Z223.1. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available for all brazing operations. It is important to recognize safety information. This is the safety- alert symbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and in

AquaSnap

30RB060-390 Air-Cooled Chillers and 30RB080-390 Air-Cooled Chillers with

Greenspeed Intelligence

2

instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE. These words are used with the safety- alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices, which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.

DANGER

DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System contains oil and refrigerant under pressure. To remove a component, wear protective gloves and goggles and proceed as follows: a. Shut off electrical power to unit. b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from system

using both high-pressure and low pressure ports. c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen and

the work area should be well ventilated. Refrigerant in contact with an open flame produces toxic gases.

d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter and remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to the system.

e. Carefully un-sweat remaining tubing stubs when neces- sary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.

Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal inju- ry or death.

WARNING

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accor- dance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, uncon- sciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition prod- ucts are hazardous.

WARNING

UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury, death and/or equipment damage. R-410A refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or components on R-410A refrigerant equipment.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor control system. Do not short or jumper between terminations on circuit boards or modules; control or board failure may result. Be aware of electrostatic discharge (static electricity) when handling or making contact with circuit boards or module con- nections. Always touch a chassis (grounded) part to dissipate body electrostatic charge before working inside control center. Use extreme care when handling tools near boards and when connecting or disconnecting terminal plugs. Circuit boards can easily be damaged. Always hold boards by the edges and avoid touching components and connections. This equipment uses, and can radiate, radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to International Standard in North America EN 61000-2/3 which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. Always store and transport replacement or defective boards in anti-static shipping bag.

CAUTION

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrig- erant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler fluid loop to prevent the freezing of heat exchanger, optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32F (0C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shut- down periods without taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may void warranty.

CAUTION

Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require specific rotation. Check reverse rotation board. If lower (red) LED is blinking, the phase sequence is incorrect. Swap any two incoming power leads to correct condenser fan rotation before starting any other motors. Operating the unit without verifying proper phasing could result in equipment damage.

CAUTION

Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.

3

GENERAL This publication contains Controls, Operation, Start-Up, Service and Troubleshooting information for the 30RB060-390 air-cooled liquid chillers with electronic controls. The 30RB chillers are equipped with ComfortLink controls and electronic expansion valves. NOTE: Unit sizes 315-390 are modular units that are shipped in separate sections as modules A or B as noted in position 8 of the unit model number. Installation directions specific to these units are noted in these instructions. For modules 315A, 315B, 330A, 330B, 345A, 345B, and 360B, follow all general instructions as noted for unit sizes 30RB160,170. For modules 360A, 390A, and 390B, follow instructions for 30RB190. See Table 1 for a listing of unit sizes and modular combinations. NOTE: The nameplate for modular units contains only the first two digits in the model number. For example, 315A and 315B nameplates read 31A and 31B.

Table 1 Modular Unit Combinations

Conventions Used in This Manual The following conventions for discussing configuration points for the local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator accessory) will be used in this manual. Point names will be written with the mode name first, then any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow sym- bol (. Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an ex- ample, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point, which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode, would be written as Con- figuration OPTNLLCS. This path name will show the user how to navigate through the lo- cal display to reach the desired configuration. The user would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing

to move into the next level of the menu structure. When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value rep- resents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in pa- renthesis after the value. As an example, Configuration OPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads). Pressing the and keys simultaneously will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or value across the display. The expanded description is shown in the local display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text. The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) point names are also refer- enced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit with

CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN tables are lo- cated in Appendix B of the manual.

Basic Control Usage SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY The scrolling marquee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink control system for 30RB units. The display has up and down arrow keys, an key, and an key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. Press the key until the highest operat- ing level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indi- cated by LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the left side of the dis- play. See Fig. 1. Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the and

keys simultaneously will put the scrolling marquee display into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed for the current selection. Press the and keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the pass- word will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. Press the

key to exit out of the expanded text mode.

Fig. 1 Scrolling Marquee Display

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display ex- pansions will immediately change to the new language. No pow- er-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages. When a specific item is located, the item name alternates with the value. Press the key at a changeable item and the value will be displayed. Press again and the value will begin to flash indicating that the value can be changed. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value, and confirm the value by pressing the key. Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state and press the key to accept it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of struc- ture. Repeat the process as required for other items. Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words PASS and WORD will alternate on the display when required. The default password is 0111. Press

and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the ar-

row keys to change the number and press to accept the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Ser- vice Tool. See Table 2 and Appendix A for further details.

CAUTION

DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been ex- posed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes and regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any longer than the actual time required to service the equipment. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be com- pleted. Failure to follow these procedures may result in dam- age to equipment.

UNIT SIZE MODULE A MODULE B 30RB315 30RB160 30RB160 30RB330 30RB170 30RB160 30RB345 30RB170 30RB170 30RB360 30RB190 30RB170 30RB390 30RB190 30RB190

ENTER

ESCAPE ENTER

ENTER ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER ESCAPE

ENTER ESCAPE

ESCAPE

Run Status

Service Test

Temperature

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

Alarm Status

ENTER

MODE

ESCAPE

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

4

ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR DISPLAY MODULE The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the ComfortLink control system, which is only available as a field-in- stalled accessory. The display has up and down arrow keys, an

key, and an key. These keys are used to nav- igate through the different levels of the display structure. Press the

key until Select a Menu Item is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 2. .

Fig. 2 Accessory Navigator Display Module

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a > indicates the currently se- lected item on the display screen. Pressing the and

keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Pressing the and keys when the display says Select Menu Item (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items in Run Sta- tusVIEW). In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. Press the key to exit out of the ex- panded text mode. NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display ex- pansions will immediately change to the new language. No pow- er-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages. When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display. Press the key at a changeable item and the value will be- gin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value, and confirm the value by pressing the key. Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state and press the key to accept it. Press the

key to return to the next higher level of structure. Re- peat the process as required for other items. Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed when re- quired, with 1111 also being displayed. The default password is 0111. Use the arrow keys to change the number and press

to enter the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS, Comfort- VIEW and Service Tool.

Adjusting the Contrast The display contrast can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of the Navigator module, press the

key until the display reads, Select a menu item. Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. Press

to obtain access to this mode. The display will read: > TEST OFF METR OFF LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the OFF to flash. Use the up or down arrow to change OFF to ON. Pressing will il- luminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Press- ing and simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screens contrast will change with the adjust- ment. Press to accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN (local equipment network) bus. Adjusting the Backlight Brightness The display backlight can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory default is set to the highest level. To adjust the Navi- gator module backlight, press the key until the display reads, Select a menu item. Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to this mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF METR OFF LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause OFF to flash. Use the up or down arrow keys to change OFF to ON. Pressing will il- luminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Press- ing up and down arrow keys simultaneously adjusts the display brightness. Use the up or down arrow keys to adjust screen bright- ness. Press to accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

CONTROLS

General The 30RB air-cooled liquid chillers contain the ComfortLink elec- tronic control system that controls and monitors all operations of the chiller. The control system is composed of several components as listed in the following sections. All machines have at the very least a main base board (MBB), scrolling marquee display, electric expansion valve board (EXV), fan board, one scroll protection module (SPM) per compressor, Emergency On/Off switch, an En- able-Off- Remote Contact switch and a reverse rotation board.

Main Base Board (MBB) The MBB is the heart of the ComfortLink control system, which contains the major portion of operating software and controls the operation of the machine. See Fig. 3. The MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information received from its in- puts and from all other modules. The MBB receives inputs from status and feedback switches, pressure transducers and thermis- tors. The MBB also controls several outputs. Some inputs and out- puts to control the machine are located on other boards, but are transmitted to or from the MBB via the internal communications bus. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN. The CCN bus is also supported. Con- nections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at TB3. For a complete description of main base board inputs and outputs and their channel identifications, see Table 3.

ENTER ESCAPE

ESCAPE

Run Status Service TestTemperaturesPressures

Setpoints Inputs

Outputs ConfigurationTime Clock

Operating ModesAlarms

ENTER

ESC

MODE Alarm Status

ComfortLink

ENTER ESCAPE

ENTER ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

5

Table 2 ComfortLink Display Menu Structure

Fig. 3 Main Base Board

MODE RUN

STATUS SERVICE

TEST TEMPERATURE PRESSURE SET POINTS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION TIME

CLOCK OPERATING

MODES ALARMS

Auto Display (VIEW)

Manual Test Mode

(TEST)

Unit Temperatures

(UNIT)

Circuit A Pressures (PRC.A)

Cooling Setpoints (COOL)

General Inputs

(GEN.I)

Circuit A Outputs (CIR.A)

Display Configuration

(DISP) Time of Day

(TIME)

Operating Control Type

(SLCT)

Reset Current Alarms

(R.ALM) Remote

User Interface (R.CCN)

Quick Test Mode

(QUIC)

Circuit A Temperatures

(CIR.A)

Circuit B Pressures (PRC.B)

Heating Setpoints (HEAT)

Circuit B Outputs (CIR.B)

Unit Configuration

(UNIT) Day, Date (DATE)

Operating Modes

(MODE)

Current Alarms (ALRM)

Machine Starts/ Hours (RUN)

Circuit B Temperatures

(CIR.B)

Circuit C Pressures (PRC.C)

Misc. Setpoints (MISC)

Circuit C Outputs (CIR.C)

Service Configurations

(SERV) Schedule 1

(SCH1) Alarm History

(H.ALM)

Compressor Run Hours

(HOUR)

Circuit C Temperatures

(CIR.C)

General Outputs (GEN.O)

Options Configuration

(OPTN) Schedule 2

(SCH2)

Compressor Starts

(STRT)

Reset, Demand Limit, Master/Slave

(RSET) Holidays (HOLI)

Fan Run Hours (FAN)

Service Maintenance Configuration

(MCFG) Compressor

Disable (CP.UN)

Predictive Maintenance

(MAIN) Software Versions (VERS)

221 221

221 221

195

195

195

195

195

195

195

C H

1 C

H 2

C H

3 C

H 4

CH11 CH12

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

CH13 CH14 CH 15A

J4 ANALOG INPUTSJ3

J2CJ2B J15

J1A

J9D

+ G

DISCRETE INPUTS

J5A

C 16A

CH 15B C

C CH16B

11 C16J2A

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5

CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26

J8

CH17 CH18

J5B J5C

T H

E R

M IS

TO R

S

P R

E S

S U

R E

S

C H

5 C

H 6

C H

7 C

H 8

C H

9

J7 A

J7 B

J7 C

J7 D

RELAY OUTPUTS

MOV1

C41 C42 C43

C32 C33 C34 C35

12/11 12/11

J10 19 J12

J13 + G -

STATUS

J9A

K1 K2 D15

J6

CCN

CH10

+ G SIO

(LEN)

J9C J9B

+ G

6

Table 3 Main Base Board Inputs and Outputs

* Controls discharge and liquid line isolation solenoids for 30RB120-190 brine units only.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) MBB-J1A, MBB-J1B 11 24 vac 12 Ground

Local Equipment Network

MBB-J9A, MBB-J9B, MBB-J9C, MBB-J9D + G -

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)

MBB-J12 + G -

External Chilled Water Pump Interlock PMPI Switch INPUTSGEN.ILOCK MBB-J4-CH15A

Chilled Water Flow Switch CWFS Switch INPUTSGEN.ILOCK MBB-J5A-CH15B

15B Demand Limit Switch #1 Demand Limit SW1 Switch INPUTSGEN.IDLS1 MBB-J4-CH13

Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer DPTA Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC) PRESSUREPRC.ADP.A

MBB-J7A-CH6 5V 5 vdc Ref. S Signal R Return

Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer DPTB Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC) PRESSUREPRC.BDP.B

MBB-J7C-CH8 5V 5 vdc Ref. S Signal R Return

Dual Chiller LWT Thermistor DUAL 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITCHWS MBB-J6-CH3

Dual Set Point Input Dual Set Point Switch INPUTSGEN.IDUAL MBB-J4-CH12 Entering Water Thermistor EWT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITEWT MBB-J6-CH2 Leaving Water Thermistor LWT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITLWT MBB-J6-CH1

Outdoor Air Thermistor OAT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITOAT MBB-J6-CH4

Pump #1 Interlock Pump #2 Interlock

PMP1 PMP2 Switch INPUTSGEN.IPUMP

MBB-J5C-CH18 18 C

Reverse Rotation Board Reverse Rotation Board Switch INPUTSGEN.IELEC MBB-J5A-CH16B

16B

Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer SPTA Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC) PRESSUREPRC.ASP.A

MBB-J7B-CH7 5V 5 vdc Ref. S Signal R Return

Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer SPTB Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC) PRESSUREPR.BSP.B

MBB-J7D-CH9 5V 5 vdc Ref. S Signal R Return

Unit Status Remote Contact-Off-Enable Switch INPUTSGEN.IONOF MBB-J4-CH11 Alarm Relay ALM R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OALRM MBB-J3-CH24 Alert Relay ALT R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OALRT MBB-J3-CH25

Cooler Heater CL-HT TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OCO.HT MBB-J2B-CH21 Circuit A Minimum

Load Control* MLV-A TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.AHGB.A MBB-J2C-CH22

Circuit B Minimum Load Control* MLV-B TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.BHGB.B MBB-J2C-CH23

Pump #1 Starter PMP1 TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OPMP.1 MBB-J2A-CH19 Pump #2 Starter PMP2 TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OPMP.2 MBB-J2A-CH20

Ready Relay RDY R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OREDY MBB-J3-CH26

7

Scroll Protection Module (SPM) There is one SPM per compressor and it is responsible for con- trolling that compressor. See Fig. 4. The device controls the com- pressor contactor and the compressor crankcase heater. The SPM module also monitors the compressor motor temperature, and cir- cuit high pressure switch. The SPM responds to commands from the MBB (main base board) and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN (Local Equipment Network). See below for SPM board address information. See Table 4 for SPM inputs and outputs.

Fig. 4 Scroll Protection Module

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board At least one EXV board is used in all machines. There is one EXV board for 2-circuit machines. Three-circuit machines have two EXV boards. See Fig. 5. The board is responsible for monitoring the return gas temperature thermistors. The board also signals the EXV motors to open or close. The electronic expansion valve board responds to commands from the MBB and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN (local equip- ment network). See below for DIP switch information for EXV1 and EXV2. See Tables 5-6 for EXV inputs and outputs.

SPM-A1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-B1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-B2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-B3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-B4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-C1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

SPM-C2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

SPM-C3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

SPM-C4 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address: OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF EXV1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4

Address: 65 OFF OFF OFF OFF

EXV2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 Address: 66 ON OFF OFF OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

103

103

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

QC1

QC2

JP 4

JP 1

JP 2

JP5

JP 6

D4

C19 D6 D5

Q4

D7

Q5 D9 U3

Q6 D8 Q3

SMD

JP 3

F1

C46 D13 D14

LED1 LED2

8

Table 4 Scroll Protection Module Inputs and Outputs*

* x denotes the circuit, A, B or C. n denotes the compressor number, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

Table 5 EXV1 Board Inputs and Outputs

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) SPM-xn-J1

QC1 24 vac QC2 Ground

Local Equipment Network

SPM-xn-JP1 1 + 2 G 3 -

SPM-xn-JP2 2 + 3 G 4 -

Circuit x High Pressure Switch HPS-x Switch Not available SPM-xn-JP3

1 2

Compressor xn Motor Temperature MTR-xn PTC Thermistor Not available SPM-xn-JP4

1 2

Compressor xn Contactor Cxn Relay OUTPUTSCIR.xCP.xn SPM-xn-JP5

1 2

Crankcase Heater CCH Relay OUTPUTSCIR.xHT.xn SPM-xn-JP6

1 2

Circuit x High Pressure Switch HPS-x Switch Not available SPM-xn-JP2

1

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) EXV1-J1

11 24 vac 12 Ground

Local Equipment Network

EXV1-J4 1 + 2 G 3

Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor SGTA 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.ASGT.A EXV1-J3

THA

Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor SGTB 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.BSGT.B EXV1-J3

THB

Circuit A EXV EXV-A Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.AEXV.A

EXV1-J2A 1 2 3 4

Circuit B EXV EXV-B Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.BEXV.B

EXV1-J2B 1 2 3 4

9

Table 6 EXV2 Inputs and Outputs

NOTE: EXV2 inputs and outputs are only used on 30RB210-300.

Fig. 5 EXV Board

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) EXV2-J1

11 24 vac 12 Ground

Local Equipment Network

EXV2-J4 1 + 2 G 3

Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor SGTC 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.CSGT.C EXV2J3

THA

Circuit C EXV EXV-C Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.CEXV.C

EXV2-J2A 1 2 3 4

NOTE: PIN1 OF EACH CONNECTOR MARKED WITH 1

ADDRESS DIP SWITCH

10

Fan Boards At least one fan board is installed in each unit (see Fig. 6 and 7), except for 30RB080-190 units with the high-efficiency variable condenser fan (HEVCF) option; fan boards are not used with this option on these units. There are two types of fan boards, with and without an analog output signal for the low ambient head pressure control fan speed controllers. If a unit does not have low ambient head pressure control installed, it will not have the analog connec- tion terminals. The fan board responds to commands from the MBB and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN. See below for fan board 1, 2 and 3 DIP switch ad- dresses. See Tables 7-9 for inputs and outputs.

Fig. 6 Fan Board (AUX 1) with Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

FAN BOARD 1 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FAN BOARD 2 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Address: ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FAN BOARD 3 DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

100K 100K

100K

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

STATUS SIO (LEN)

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

24 V A

C C

H 13

C H

14

J9

J1

CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

JP 2

C 61 CH13

D12 JP1

L3

L5

U 21

L2

D 6

D 5Q 5

Y 1

D 7

D 8

S 1

D 3

U 1

Q 1

U 5 U

6 U 7

U 8

U 9 Q 10

Q 11

U 10

J4

J3J2

U 4

U 2

Q 12

Q 60

3

2

1

G

+

3

2

1

G

+

DIP SWITCH

J5

J6

J7 J8

11

Table 7 Fan Board 1 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*

*Fan boards 1 and 2 will use the AUX1 board when the low ambient temperature head pressure control option is installed. Supplied on AUX1 board only.

NOTES: 1. Fan board 1 is used on 30RB060-390. 2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is de-

energized.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) FB1-J1

11 24 vac 12 Ground

Local Equipment Network

FB1-J9 + G - + G -

Circuit A Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure

Control Speed Signal MM-A 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.ASPD.A

FB1-CH9 + -

Circuit B Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control Speed Signal

(sizes 060-150, 210-250) MM-B 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.BSPD.B

FB1-CH10 + -

Outdoor Fan Motor 1 OFM1 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH1 (sizes 060-110)

FB1-J2-CH2 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH3 (sizes 160-190, 275, 300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 2 OFM2 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH2 (sizes 060-110)

FB1-J2-CH3 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH4 (sizes 160-190, 275, 300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 3 OFM3 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH3 (sizes 060,070,090-110)

FB1-J3-CH5 (size 080)

FB1-J2-CH1 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH2 (sizes 160-190, 275, 300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 4 OFM4 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH4 (sizes 060,070,130,

150,210-250) FB1-J3-CH6

(size 080) FB1-J3-CH7

(sizes 090-110) FB1-J3-CH5

(sizes 160-190, 275-300, Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 5 OFM5 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH5 (sizes 090-110)

FB1-J3-CH6 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH1 (sizes 160-190, 275-300, Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 6 OFM6 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH6 (sizes 090-110,

160-190, 275-300, Duplex sizes 315-390)

FB1-J3-CH7 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 7 OFM7 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH5 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 8 OFM8 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH8 (sizes 120-150, 210-250)

12

Fig. 7 Fan Board (AUX 2) without Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

Table 8 Fan Board 2 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*

*Fan boards 1 and 2 will use the AUX1 board when the low ambient temperature head pressure control option is installed. Output only on units with low ambient temperature head pressure con- trol installed (AUX1).

NOTES: 1. Fan board 2 used on 30RB160-190, 275-300, 315-390. 2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is de-

energized.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) FB2-J1

11 24 vac 12 Ground

Local Equipment Network

FB2-J9 + G - + G -

Circuit B Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

Speed Signal (sizes 160-190, 275-300, 315-400)

MM-B 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.BSPD.B FB2-CH9

+ -

Outdoor Fan Motor 7 OFM7 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH2 (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J2-CH3 (sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 8 OFM8 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH3 (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J2-CH4 (sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 9 OFM9 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH1 (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J2-CH2 (sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 10 OFM10 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH4 (sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J3-CH5 (sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 11 OFM11 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH1 (sizes 190, 275-300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 12 OFM12 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB2-J3-CH6 (sizes 190, 275-300, 360A, 390)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

100K 100K

100K

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

STATUS SIO (LEN)

24 V A

C

J1 J9

D 4

U 2

U 5

Q 2

Q 7

Q 3

U 8

U 9

Q 9

Q 10

Q 11

Q 12

Q 13

J4

J3 J2

S 1

D 7

Q 5

Y 1

D 5

D 6

L2

U 6

U 1

Q 1

D 3

C 3

3

2

1

G

+

3

2

1

G

+

DIP SWITCH

13

Table 9 Fan Board 3 (AUX1) Inputs and Outputs

*Controls discharge and liquid line isolation soleniods for 30RB210-300 brine units. Low ambient temperature head pressure control output is on AUX1 board only.

NOTES: 1. Fan board 3 used on 30RB210-300. 2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is de-

energized.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE SCROLLING MARQUEE POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT (Unit Size)

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) FB3-J1

11 24 vac 12 Ground

Local Equipment Network

FB3-J9 + G - + G -

Circuit C Discharge Pressure Transducer DPTC Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC) PRESSUREPRC.CDP.C FB3-J7-CH13

Circuit C Suction Pressure Transducer SPTC Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC) PRESSUREPRC.CSP.C FB3-J8-CH14

Minimum Load Value Circuit C MLV-C* TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.CHGB.C FB3-J3-CH7

(sizes 210-300) Circuit C Low Ambient

Temperature Head Pressure Control Speed Signal

(sizes 210-300) MM-C 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.CSPD.C

FB3-CH9 + -

Outdoor Fan Motor 9 OFM9 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH2 (sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH3 (size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 10 OFM10 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH3 (sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH4 (size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 11 OFM11 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1 (sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH2 (size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 12 OFM12 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH3 (sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH4 (size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 13 OFM13 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1 (size 250)

FB3-J2-CH2 (size 275)

FB3-J2-CH3 (size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 14 OFM14 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J3-CH6 (size 250)

FB3-J2-CH3 (size 275)

FB3-J2-CH4 (size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 15 OFM15 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1 (size 275)

FB3-J2-CH2 (size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 16 OFM16 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH4 (size 275)

FB3-J3-CH5 (size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 17 OFM17 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1 (size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 18 OFM18 TRIAC 24 VAC

FB3-J3-CH6 (size 300)

14

Reverse Rotation Board The reverse rotation board monitors the three-phase electrical sys- tem to provide phase reversal, phase loss and under-voltage pro- tection. See Fig. 8. The reverse rotation board has two LEDs (light-emitting diodes) and two adjustable dial settings. Under nor- mal conditions, the upper LED will light up green. The lower LED is red and will flash (phase reversal) or turn on solid (phase loss and under-voltage) according to the conditions sensed. DIAL SETTINGS The reverse rotation board has two dials. See Fig. 8. The upper dial should be set to match the incoming three-phase voltage to the chiller with no compressors running. This dial must be adjusted for 208/230-v chillers operating on 208-v power supply. The dial should be adjusted to 200-v minimum setting for this case. The lower dial is used for trip delay and should be set fully counter- clockwise to the minimum 0.1 second setting. PHASE REVERSAL PROTECTION The control monitors the three-phase power sequence supplied at terminals L1, L2, and L3. If the control senses an incorrect phase relationship, the relay contacts (11/14) on the board will open. The relay contacts will automatically reset when the correct phase se- quence is applied. PHASE LOSS AND UNDER-VOLTAGE PROTECTION If the reverse rotation board senses that any one of the three phase inputs has no AC voltage or that any one phase has dropped more than 20% below the voltage dial setting, the relay contacts (11/14) on the board will open. Contacts will reset automatically when all three phases are present, in the correct sequence and are within the limits of the voltage dial setting.

NOTE: Normal operation of the reverse rotation board (for exam- ple, no faults are detected) results in a closed contact being applied to the MBB (plug J5A, channel 16B) through the closed 11/14 re- lay contact.

Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch This switch is installed in all units and provides the owner and ser- vice person with a local means of enabling or disabling the ma- chine. It isa 3-position switch used to control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capa- ble of handling a 24-vac, 20-mA load. In the Enable and Remote Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN config- uration and set point control.

Emergency On/Off Switch This switch is installed in all units. The Emergency On/Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off im- mediately. Power to the MBB, energy management module, and scrolling marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off.

Fig. 8 Reverse Rotation Board (RRB)

Energy Management Module (EMM) The EMM is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-in- stalled accessory. The EMM receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the temperature reset, cooling set point reset and demand limit func- tions. The EMM also receives the switch inputs for the field-in- stalled second stage 2-step or 3-step demand limit, ice done, occu- pancy overrides, and remote lockout functions. The EMM com- municates the status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other functions ac- cording to the inputs received. The EMM generates a 0 to 10 vdc output that directly corresponds to the unit percent total capacity. Contacts indicating unit run status and shutdown status are provid- ed. See Table 10 and Fig. 9.

Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim The EMM HR is available as a factory-installed option. The EMM HR communicates the status of all of the inputs with the MBB. The MBB then determines the appropriate operating mode. Operating modes are: normal cooling, heat reclaim, and simulta- neous one circuit cooling/one circuit heat reclaim. See Table 11 and Fig. 9.

LED STATUS FUNCTION

Upper (green) LED on continuously Relay contacts closed (normal operation)

Lower (red) LED blinking Relay contacts open (phase reversal has occurred)

Lower (red) LED on continuously Relay contacts open (phase loss or under-voltage has occurred)

Upper (green) LED off Power not present at L1, L2, L3 (off)

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac- turers control systems due to possible power supply differ- ences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification, which could lead to equipment damage. The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink controls use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if incorporating a full wave bridge rectifier signal generating device is used.

15

Fig. 9 Energy Management Module and Energy Management Heat Reclaim Module

Table 10 Energy Management Module (EMM) Inputs and Outputs

* 250 ohm, 1/2 watt resistor required for 4-20 mA input.

INPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT 4-20 mA or 0-5 vdc Demand Limit 4-20 mA Demand Limit 0-5 vdc* INPUTSGEN.IDMND EMM-J7B-CH6

4-20 mA or 0-5 vdc Temperature Reset/Setpoint 4-20 mA Temperature Reset/ Set point 0-5 vdc* INPUTSGEN.IRSET EMM-J7A-CH5

Demand Limit SW2 Demand Limit Step 2 Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IDLS2 EMM-J4-CH9 Ice Done Ice Done Switch Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IICE.D EMM-J4-CH11A Occupancy Override Occupied Schedule Override Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IOCCS EMM-J4-CH8 Remote Lockout Switch Chiller Lockout Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IRLOC EMM-J4-CH10

SPT Space Temperature Thermistor 10k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITSPT EMM-J6-CH2

OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT % Total Capacity 0-10 vdc OUTPUTSGEN.OCATO EMM-J8-CH7 RUN R Run Relay Relay OUTPUTSGEN.ORUN EMM-J3-CH24 SHD R Shutdown Relay Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OSHUT EMM-J3-CH25

221221

221 221

100K

100K

100K

100K

100K

CH 17

CH 17

CH 16

CH CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 22

CH 21

CH 23

24 V A

C 12 11 C

H 11

b C

H 12

C H

13 C

H 14

C H

15 C

H 1 C

H 2 C

H 3 C

H 4 C

H 5

C H

6 C

H 7

SIO LEN

+ G -+ G -

SIO LEN

J8

J7B

J7A

J6

J5

J4J3J2BJ2AJ1

16

Table 11 Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim (EMM HR) Inputs and Outputs

Local Equipment Network Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire commu- nication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). External con- nection to the LEN bus is made at TB3.

Board Addresses All boards (except the main base board and the energy manage- ment module) have 8-position DIP switches. Addresses for all boards are listed with the input/output tables for each board.

Control Module Communication RED LED Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs (light-emitting diodes). When oper- ating correctly, the red status LEDs will blink in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that the MBB is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload software. If the problem still persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the board should be replaced. GREEN LED All boards have a green LEN (SIO) LED which should be blinking whenever power is on. If the LEDs are not blinking as described check LEN connections for potential communi- cation errors at the board connectors. See Table 3 for LEN connector designations. A 3-wire bus accomplishes commu- nication between modules. These 3 wires run in parallel from

module to module. The J9A connector on the MBB provides communication directly to the scrolling marquee display or the Navigator display module. YELLOW LED The MBB has one yellow LED. The Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication.

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface All 30RB units can be connected to the CCN, if desired. The com- munication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of each system element communication connec- tor must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on ei- ther side of it, that is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB3. Consult the CCN Contractors Manual for further information. See Fig. 10. NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conduc- tors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon1, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of 20C to 60C is re- quired. See Table 12 for recommended wire manufacturers and part numbers.

Fig. 10 ComfortLink CCN Communication Wiring

INPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT PD.B Circuit B Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer PRESSURECIR.BPD.B EMM-J8-CH6 PD.A Circuit A Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer PRESSURECIR.APD.A EMM-J8-CH5

HRS.B Circuit B Liquid Subcooling TEMPERATURECIR.BHRS.B HRS.A Circuit A Liquid Subcooling TEMPERATURECIR.AHRS.A HRT.B Circuit B Liquid Temperature Temperature TEMPERATURECIR.BHRT.B EMM-J5-CH4 HRT.A Circuit A Liquid Temperature Temperature TEMPERATURECIR.AHRT.A EMM-J5-CH3 HEWT Heat Reclaim Entering Fluid Temperature TEMPERATUREUNITHEWT EMM-J5-CH2 HLWT Heat Reclaim Leaving Fluid Temperature TEMPERATUREUNITHLWT EMM-J5-CH1 C.FLO Condenser Flow Switch Status Switch INPUTSGEN.IC.FLO EMM-J5-CH15

Power (24 vac supply) EMM-J1-CH11,12 Local Equipment Network EMM-J9

OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT Condenser 0-10 VDC Water Valve Output 0-10 VDC EMM-J8-CH7

CND.P Heat Reclaim Condenser Pump Status Contactor OUTPUTSGEN.OCND.P EMM-J2-CH16 CN.HT Heat Reclaim Condenser Heater Contactor OUTPUTSGEN.OCN.HT EMM-J2-CH17 HR2.A Circuit A, Leaving Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR2.A EMM-J2-CH18 HR2.B Circuit B, Leaving Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR2.B EMM-J2-CH19 HR3.A Circuit A, Entering Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR3.A EMM-J2-CH20 HR3.B Circuit B, Entering Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR3.B EMM-J2-CH21 HR4.A Circuit A, Leaving Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR4.A EMM-J2-CH22 HR4.B Circuit B, Leaving Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR4.B EMM-J2-CH23 HR1.A Circuit A, Entering Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR1.A EMM-J3-CH24 HR1.B Circuit B, Entering Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR1.B EMM-J3-CH25

1. Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont.

17

Table 12 CCN Communication Bus Wiring

When connecting to a CCN communication bus, use a color-cod- ing scheme for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires. At each system element, tie the shields of its communication bus cables together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connect- ed to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to the network: 1. Turn off power to the control box. 2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black () conductors. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables.)

3. Connect red wire to (+) terminal on TB3 of the plug, white wire to COM terminal, and black wire to the () terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on TB3 can also be used, but is only intended for temporary connection (for example, a lap- top computer running Service Tool).

Configuration Options The unit Remote-OFF-Enable switch must be in the OFF position while making changes. If the unit switch is not in the OFF position, REJECTED may be displayed on the scrolling marquee display. MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL (ConfigurationUNIT HGBP) reduces the capacity of the 30RB chiller below the low- est standard capacity step by use of hot gas bypass. This capacity step reduction provides more precise control of the leaving water temperature. The minimum load valve accessory cannot be used on units configured for brine as the cooler fluid type (Configuration SERV?FLUD). Refer to Brine Chiller Oper- ation for additional information. Minimum Load Control can be configured in three different ways. If Minimum Load Control is not used, HGBP must be set to 0. If HGBP is set to 1, the control will activate the minimum load control valve when the machine is started only. This will be the first step of capacity. If HGBP is set to 2, all stages of capacity can utilize the minimum load control valve. If HGBP is set to 3, the minimum load control valve will be used only when the circuit has a high pres- sure override active. This will reduce the capacity of the circuit. RAMP LOADING (ConfigurationOPTNRL.S) limits the rate of change of leaving fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cool- ing mode and configured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calculates a temperature difference between the control point and leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4F (2.2C) and the rate of change (F or C per minute) is

more than the configured Cool Ramp Loading (Setpoints COOLCRMP), the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of capacity. MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPTN DELY) is a time delay added to the start when the machine is commanded ON. This is a field configurable item from 1 to 15 minutes. The factory default is 1 minute. This feature is useful when multiple units are in- stalled. Staggering the start will reduce the inrush potential.

Dual Chiller Control The dual chiller routine is available for the control of two parallel units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This control is de- signed for a parallel fluid flow arrangement only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the other as the slave chiller. An additional leaving fluid temperature thermistor (dual chiller LWT) must be installed in the common chilled water piping as de- scribed in the Installation Instructions for both the master and slave chillers. See the Field Wiring section in the 30RB Installa- tion Instructions for dual chiller LWT sensor control wiring. A chilled water flow switch is factory-installed for each chiller. Parallel chiller control with dedicated pumps is recommended. Chiller must start and stop its own water pump located on its own piping. If pumps are not dedicated for each chiller, chiller isolation valves are required: each chiller must open and close its own isola- tion valve through the control (valve shall be connected to the pump outputs). Pump Control is enabled as described in the Cool- er Pump Control section on page 29. One additional parameter is set for the dual chiller control. Lag Unit Pump Select (Configura- tionRSET LAGP) allows the user to configure the control to energize the pump for the lag chiller once the unit enters an occu- pied time period or delay the control until the lag chiller is started. It is recommended that this parameter be set to 0, OFF IF UNIT STOPPED. The control of the slave chiller is directed through commands emitted by the master chiller. The slave chiller has no action in master/slave operations; it shall only verify that CCN communication with its master is present. See the Dual Chiller Se- quence of Operation section on page 44. Use dual chiller control to designate a lead chiller between the master and slave chiller. Configure the Lead/Lag Balance Select (ConfigurationRSETLLBL)to ENBL to base the selection on the Lead/Lag Balance Delta (Configuration RSET LLBD) between the master and slave run hours. If the run hour difference between the master and the slave remains less than LLBD, the chiller designated as the lead will remain the lead chiller. The Lead/Lag changeover between the master and the slave chiller due to hour balance will occur during chiller operat- ing odd days, such as day 1, day 3, and day 5 of the month, at 12:00 a.m. If a lead chiller is not designated, the master chiller will always be designated the lead chiller. The dual chiller control algorithm has the ability to delay the start of the lag chiller in two ways. The Lead Pulldown Time (Configu- rationRSETLPUL) provides a field configurable time delay of 0 to 60 minutes. This time delay gives the lead chiller a chance to remove the heat that the chilled water loop picked up while be- ing inactive during an unoccupied period. The Lead Pulldown Time parameter is a one-time delay initiated after starting the lead chiller, manually or by a schedule, before checking whether to start an additional chiller. This routine provides the lead chiller an opportunity to pull down the loop temperature before starting an- other chiller. The second time delay, Lead/Lag Delay (Configura- tion RSETLLDY) is a time delay imposed between the last stage of the lead chiller and the start of the lag chiller. This pre- vents enabling the lag chiller until the lead/lag delay timer has ex- pired. See Tables 13 and 14. The Lag Unit Pump Select configuration must be set consistently. If pump control is NOT being used, set ConfigurationRSET LAGP to 1. If pump control IS being used, set Configuration RSETLAGP to 0, which is the default value. This must be set in both the master and slave chillers, and it must be consistent in both.

MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring

Alpha 1895 American A21451 A48301 Belden 8205 884421 Columbia D6451 Manhattan M13402 M64430 Quabik 6130

Important: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some rou- tines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, disconnect the CCN bus. If condi- tions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus.

18

Table 13 Configuring the Master Chiller

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

CCNA CCN Address Confirm address of chiller. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses.

1 Factory default address is 1.

CCNA

CCNB CCN Bus Number Confirm the bus number of the chiller. The master and slave chiller must be on the same bus.

0 Factory default is 0.

CCNB

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

x 5 MSSL Master/Slave Select

0 Disable

0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password.

1 Master Use up arrows to change value to 1.

1 Accepts the change.

MSSL

SLVA Slave Address

1

1 Flashing to indicate Edit mode.

2 Use up arrows to change value to 2. This address must match the address of the slave chiller.

2 Accepts the change.

SLVA

LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select

ENBL Factory Default is ENBL

LLBL

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta

168 Factory Default is 168.

LLBD

LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay

10 Factory Default is 10.

LLDY

LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select

0 Off if U Stp Factory Default is 0, Off if unit is stopped. Master and slave chiller must be configured to the same value.

LAGP

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time

0 Factory Default is 0.

At mode level.

OPERATING MODES

SLCT

OPER Operating Control Type

0 Switch Control Master chiller should be configured for job requirements, Switch Control, Time Schedule, or CCN.

At mode level.

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

19

Table 14 Configuring the Slave Chiller

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

CCNA CCN Address Confirm address of chiller. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses.

1 Factory default address is 1. The slave chiller address must match what was programmed in the Master Chiller SLVA item.

1 Flashing to indicate Edit Mode.

2 This item must match Master Chiller SLVA item.

2 Accepts the change.

CCNA

CCNB CCN Bus Number Confirm the bus number of the chiller. The master and slave chiller must be on the same bus.

0 Factory default bus number is 0.

CCNB

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

x 5 MSSL Master/Slave Select

0 Disable

0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

2 Slave Use up arrows to change value to 2.

2 Accepts the change.

MSSL

SLVA Slave Address Not required.

LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select Not required.

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Not required.

LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay Not required.

LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select Must be configured to the same value as the master chiller.

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Not required.

At mode level

OPERATING MODES

SLCT

OPER Operating Control Type

0 Switch Control

0 Flashing to indicate Edit Mode.

2 CCN Control Use up arrows to change value to 2. NOTE: Slave chiller must be configured for CCN.

2 Accepts the value.

OPER

At mode level

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

20

Capacity Control The control system cycles compressors and minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. Entering fluid temperature is used by the main base board (MBB) to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity stages. Entering fluid temperature, space temperature (requires additional sensor), or outdoor-air tem- perature reset features can automatically reset the leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. It can also be reset from an external 4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module). The control has an automatic lead-lag feature built in for circuit and compressor starts. If enabled, the control will determine which circuit (ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0) and compressor to start to even the wear. The compressor wear factor (combination of starts and run hours) is used to determine which compressor starts. Compressor Wear Factor = (Compressor Starts) + 0.1 (Compres- sor Run Hours) In this case, the circuit with the lowest average compressor wear factor (the average of the wear factors of all available compressors in the circuit) is the circuit that starts first. The compressor within the circuit with the lowest wear factor is the first to start. If the au- tomatic lead-lag function for the circuit is not enabled [Configura- tionOPTNLLCS=1 (Circuit A leads), 2 (Circuit B leads), or 3 (Circuit C leads)], then the selected circuit will be the first to start. Again, the compressor with the lowest wear factor within the circuit will be the first to start. If Minimum Load Control is en- abled (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1), the valve will be op- erational only during the first stage of cooling. Once the lead compressor has been started, the lag compressors will be determined by the wear factor and loading sequence select- ed. If equal loading is selected, (ConfigurationOPTN LOAD=0), the circuit with the lowest average wear factor for the available compressors will start next, with the compressor with the lowest wear factor starting. The control will attempt to keep all circuits at approximately the same number of compressors ON. For this option to function properly, all circuits must have the same number of compressors available. If a circuit compressor is not available due to an alarm condition or demand limit, the ca- pacity staging will change to staged. If staged loading is selected, (ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1), the started circuit will con- tinue to turn on compressors according to the lowest wear factor until all are on, then start the next circuit with the lowest average wear factor. If Minimum Load Control is enabled for close control (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=2), the valve will be available at all stages for better temperature control. If Minimum Load Con- trol is enabled for high ambient control (Configuration UNITHGBP=3), the valve will be used only when a high pres- sure override is active for that circuit.

The electronic expansion valves provide a controlled start-up. During start-up, the low pressure logic in the lead circuit will be ignored for 5 minutes to allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional stages of compression are required, the pro- cessor control will add them. The following example is based on a 30RB225 machine, which has three 25-ton compressors in each circuit. See Table 15. Each example below has different configurations and is intended to illustrate the loading sequences possible for normal operation. In Example 1 (Table 16), assume the following configurations are in place: ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control in-

stalled and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=0 Equal Circuit Loading ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0 Automatic Circuit Select Since Circuit A has the lowest average wear factor, it will be the lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor A3 has the lowest wear factor and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will start another circuit because of the Equal Circuit Loading configu- ration. The next circuit with the lowest wear factor is Circuit B, and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is B2. The next stage will be a circuit C compressor. The process continues until all compressors are ON. See Table 16. In Example 2 (Table 17), assume the compressor starts and run hours are the same as in the previous example and the following configurations are in place: ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control in-

stalled and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1 Staged Circuit Loading ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0 Automatic Circuit Select Since Circuit A has the lowest average wear factor, it will be the lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor A3 has the lowest wear factor and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will start a compressor in the same circuit because of the Staged Cir- cuit Loading configuration. Compressor A2 has the next lowest wear factor and will be started next. Compressor A3 will be next to start. Since all compressors in Circuit A are ON, the next stage will start another circuit. Of the remaining circuits, Circuit B has the lowest wear factor, and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is B2. All of the Circuit B compressors will be started in the same manner as Circuit A. Once all Circuit B compressors are ON, then Circuit C will be started. The process continues until all compressors are ON. See Table 17.

Table 15 Compressor Starts and Run Hours

COMPRESSOR STARTS RUN HOURS WEAR FACTOR CIRCUIT AVERAGE WEAR FACTOR

A1 25 249 49.9 44.8A2 22 237 45.7

A3 26 128 38.8 B1 41 453 86.3

67.6B2 38 138 51.8 B3 35 297 64.7 C1 93 103 103.3

80.3C2 57 98 66.8 C3 61 99 70.9

21

Table 16 Compressor Stages and Circuit Cycling, Example 1

LEGEND NOTES: 1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity) are

approximate percentage values. 2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit load-

ing, and automatic circuit select.

Table 17 Compressor Stages and Circuit Cycling, Example 2

LEGEND NOTES: 1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity) are

approximate percentage values. 2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit load-

ing, and automatic circuit select.

In Example 3 (Table 18), assume the following configurations are in place: ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control

installed and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=0 Equal Circuit Loading ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=2 Circuit B Leads Since Circuit B has been selected, it will be the lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor B2 has the lowest wear factor and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will start another circuit because of the Equal Circuit Loading configuration. Comparing Circuit A and C, the circuit with the lowest average wear factor is Circuit A, and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is A3. The next stage will be a circuit C compressor. The process contin- ues until all compressors are ON. See Table 18. In Example 4 (Table 19), assume the compressor starts and run hours are the same as in the first example and the following con- figurations are in place: ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 Minimum Load Control

installed and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1 Staged Circuit Loading ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=3 Circuit C Leads

Since Circuit C has been selected, it will be the lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor C2 has the lowest wear factor and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will start a compressor in the same circuit because of the Staged Circuit Loading configura- tion. Compressor C3 has the next lowest wear factor and will be started next. Compressor C1 will be next to start. Since all com- pressors in Circuit C are ON, the next stage will start another cir- cuit. Of the remaining circuits, Circuit A has the lowest wear fac- tor, and the compressor with the lowest wear factor is A3. All of the Circuit A compressors will be started in the same manner as Circuit C. Once all Circuit A compressors are ON, then Circuit B will be started. The process continues until all compressors are ON. See Table 19. If the circuit capacity is to be reduced, the compressor with the highest wear factor will be shut off first (in most cases). With Equal Circuit Loading, stages will be removed from each circuit, following the same criteria used in the loading sequence, but in the opposite order. Shown in Table 19 based on the current wear fac- tor in the opposite to the loading sequence shown above, the com- pressor with the highest wear factor will be removed first. When Staged Circuit Loading is selected, the capacity from the last lag circuit will be removed first.

STAGE TOTAL CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir.

Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3

0 0 0 0 0 1 8 24 X X 0 0 2 11 33 X 0 0 3 22 33 X 33 X 0 4 33 33 X 33 X 33 X 5 44 66 X X 33 X 33 X 6 55 66 X X 66 X X 33 X 7 66 66 X X 66 X X 66 X X 8 77 100 X X X 66 X X 66 X X 9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC Minimum Load Control

STAGE TOTAL CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir.

Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3

0 0 0 0 0 1 8 24 X X 0 0 2 11 33 X 0 0 3 22 66 X X 0 0 4 33 100 X X X 0 0 5 44 100 X X X 33 X 0 6 55 100 X X X 66 X X 0 7 66 100 X X X 100 X X X 0 8 77 100 X X X 100 X X X 33 X 9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC Minimum Load Control

22

Table 18 Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 3

LEGEND NOTES: 1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity) are

approximate percentage values. 2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit loading,

and automatic circuit select.

Table 19 Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 4

LEGEND NOTES: 1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity) are

approximate percentage values. 2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit loading,

and automatic circuit select.

The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The al- gorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio (SM2) is calculated using the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value rang- es from 100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a com- pressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches +100% (100%). If the next stage of capacity is the Minimum Load Control, the control energizes (deenergizes) the Minimum Load Control when the ratio reaches +60% (60%). If installed, the minimum load valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity. The control will also use the minimum load valve solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last compressor. If the close control feature (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=2) is en- abled the control will use the minimum load valve solenoid when- ever possible to fine tune leaving fluid temperature control. A de- lay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity step change with Minimum Load Control. A delay of 3 minutes occurs after each compressor capacity step change. BRINE CHILLER OPERATION For chiller sizes 120 to 390 with the factory-installed brine option, discharge and liquid line solenoids are added to all circuits (Circuit

B only for size 120). The control system must be correctly config- ured for proper operation. The minimum load valve option must be enabled (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1) and the fluid type must be set to medium temperature brine (Configuration SERVFLUD=2). The Minimum Load Valve output is used to control the discharge and liquid line solenoid valves. As a re- sult, Minimum Load Control (Hot Gas Bypass) cannot be utilized on brine duty chillers. The discharge and liquid line solenoid valves are wired in parallel so they will both open and close at the same time. The main function of the solenoid valves is to isolate a portion of the condenser section when only a single compressor is running to allow for proper oil return to the compressors. A chart showing solenoid operation is shown below:

NOTE: Minimum load valve (HGBP) cannot be utilized if fluid type is set to medium temperature brine (Configuration SERVFLUD=2).

STAGE TOTAL CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir. Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3

0 0 0 0 0 1 8 0 X 24 X X 0 2 11 0 33 X 0 3 22 33 X 33 X 0 4 33 33 X 33 X 33 X 5 44 33 X 66 X X 33 X 6 55 66 X X 66 X X 33 X 7 66 66 X X 66 X X 66 X X 8 77 66 X X 100 X X X 66 X X 9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC Minimum Load Control

STAGE TOTAL CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir. Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3

0 0 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 24 X X 2 11 0 0 33 X 3 22 0 0 66 X X 4 33 0 0 100 X X X 5 44 33 X 0 100 X X X 6 55 66 X X 0 100 X X X 7 66 100 X X X 0 100 X X X 8 77 100 X X X 33 X 100 X X X 9 88 100 X X X 66 X X 100 X X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC Minimum Load Control

CIRCUIT CAPACITY DISCHARGE/LIQUID SOLENOID VALVE

OPERATION All compressors off Solenoids energized

One compressor starting Solenoids deenergized after 30-second delay

Two or more compressors running Solenoids energized Reduction from two to one compressor running

Solenoids deenergized with no delay

23

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES The following capacity control overrides (Run StatusVIEW CAP.S) will modify the normal operation routine. If any of the fol- lowing override conditions listed below is satisfied, it will deter- mine the capacity change instead of the normal control. Override #1: Cooler Freeze Protection This override attempts to avoid the freeze protection alarm. If the Leaving Water Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) + 2.0F (1.1C) then remove a stage of capacity. NOTE: The freeze set point is 34F (1.1C) for fresh water sys- tems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The freeze set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERV LOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2). Override #2: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling Override #3: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling Override #4: Circuit C Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling These overrides attempt to avoid the low suction temperature alarms. This override is active only when more than one compres- sor in a circuit is ON. If the Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) 18.0F (10C) for 90 seconds, or the Saturated Suction Tem- perature is less than 4F (20C), a compressor in the affected circuit will be turned off. Override #5: Low Temperature Cooling This override removes one stage of capacity when the difference between the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) and the Leaving Water Temperature (Run StatusVIEWLWT) reach- es a predetermined limit and the rate of change of the water is 0 or still decreasing. Override #6: Low Temperature Cooling This override removes two stages of capacity when the Entering Water Temperature (Run StatusVIEWEWT) is less than the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT.) Override #7: Ramp Loading If the unit is configured for ramp loading (Configura- tionOPTNRL.S=ENBL) and if the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature and the Control Point is greater than 4 F (2.2 C) and the rate of change of the leaving water is greater than Cool Ramp Loading Rate (SetpointsCOOLCRMP) then no capacity stage increase will be made. Operating mode 5 (MD05) will be in effect. Override #8: Service Manual Test Override The manual test consists in adding a stage of capacity every 30 seconds, until the control enables all of the requested compressors and Minimum Load Control selected in the ComfortLink display Service Test menu. All safeties and higher priority overrides are monitored and acted upon. Override # 9: Demand Limit This override mode is active when a command to limit the capaci- ty is received. If the current unit capacity is greater than the active capacity limit value, a stage is removed. If the current capacity is lower than the capacity limit value, the control will not add a stage that will result in the new capacity being greater then the capacity limit value. Operating mode 4 (MD04) will be in effect. Override #10: Cooler Interlock Override This override prohibits compressor operation until the Cooler In- terlock (InputsGEN.ILOCK) is closed. Override #11: High Temperature Cooling This override algorithm runs once when the unit is switched to ON. If the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature

(Run Status VIEWLWT) and the Control Point (Run Status VIEWCTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of change of the water temperature is greater than 0.1F/min, a stage will be added. Override #12: High Temperature Cooling This override runs only when Minimum Load Control is Enabled (ConfigurationUNITHGBP = 1, 2 or 3). This override will add a stage of capacity if the next stage is Minimum Load Control, when the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature (Run StatusVIEWLWT) and the Control Point (Run Sta- tusVIEWCTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of change of the water temperature is greater than a fixed value. Override #13: Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay Whenever a capacity step change has been made, either with Min- imum Load Control or a compressor, the control will remain at this capacity stage for the next 90 seconds. During this time, no capacity control algorithm calculations will be made. If the capac- ity step is a compressor, an additional 90-second delay is added to the previous hold time (see Override #22). This override allows the system to stabilize before another capacity stage is added or re- moved. If a condition of a higher priority override occurs, the higher priority override will take precedence. Override #14: Slow Change Override This override prevents compressor stage changes when the leav- ing temperature is close to the control point and slowly moving to- wards the control point. Override #15: System Manager Capacity Control If a Chillervisor module is controlling the unit and the Chillervisor module is controlling multiple chillers, the unit will add a stage to attempt to load to the demand limited value. Override #16: Circuit A High Pressure Override Override #17: Circuit B High Pressure Override Override #18: Circuit C High Pressure Override This override attempts to avoid a high pressure failure. The algo- rithm is run every 4 seconds. At least one compressor must be on in the circuit. If the Saturated Condensing Temperature for the cir- cuit is above the High Pressure Threshold (Configuration SERVHP.TH) then a compressor for that circuit will be re- moved. If Minimum Load Control was enabled for High Ambient (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=3), then the Minimum Control Valve will be energized. Override #19: Standby Mode This override algorithm will not allow a compressor to run if the unit is in Standby mode, (Run StatusVIEWHC.ST=2). Override #22: Minimum On Time Delay In addition to Override #13 Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay, for compressor capacity changes, an additional 90-second delay will be added to Override #13 delay. No compressor will be deenergized until 3 minutes have elapsed since the last compressor has been turned ON. When this override is active, the capacity control algorithm calculations will be performed, but no capacity reduction will be made until the timer has expired. A control with higher precedence will override the Minimum On Time Delay. Override #23: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling Override #24: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling Override #25: Circuit C Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling If the circuit is operating in an area close to the operational limit of the compressor, the circuit capacity will remain at the same point or unload to raise the saturated suction temperature. This algo- rithm will be active if at least one compressor in the circuit is on and one of the following conditions is true: 1. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze

(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) 6F (3.3C).

24

2. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) and the circuit approach (Leaving Water Temperature Saturated Suction Tempera- ture) is greater than 15F (8.3C) and the Circuit Superheat (Return Gas Temperature Saturated Suction Temperature) is greater than 15F (8.3C). NOTE: The freeze set point is 34F (1.1C) for fresh water systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The freeze set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Configura- tionSERVLOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2).

If any of these conditions are met, the appropriate operating mode, 21 (Circuit A), 22 (Circuit B) or 23 (Circuit C) will be in effect. Override #26: Circuit A Operation Outside Compressor Operating Envelope Override #27: Circuit B Operation Outside Compressor Operating Envelope Override #28: Circuit C Operation Outside Compressor Operating Envelope This override prevents compressor operation outside of its operat- ing envelope. 1. If the mean saturated discharge temperature (SDT) is greater

than 7F (3.9C) over the limit, the circuit is unloaded imme- diately.

2. If the mean SDT is over the limit (but not greater than 7F (3.9C) over the limit) for 90 seconds, then the circuit is unloaded.

3. If the mean SDT is more than the limit minus 2F (1.1C), the circuit is prevented from loading. This override shall remain active until the mean pressure goes below the limit minus 3F (1.7C).

Override #34: Circuit A Low Refrigerant Charge Override #35: Circuit B Low Refrigerant Charge Override #36: Circuit C Low Refrigerant Charge The capacity override attempts to protect the compressor from starting with no refrigerant in the circuit. This algorithm runs only when the circuit is not operational, (no compressors ON). There are several criteria that will enable this override: 1. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Discharge

Temperature is less than 13F (10.6C). 2. All of these conditions must be true:

a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- charge Temperature is less than Leaving Water Tem- perature by more than 5.4F (3.0C).

b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- charge Temperature is less than 41F (5C).

c. Outdoor Air Temperature is less than 32F (0C). d. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than the Outdoor Air Tem- perature by more than 5.4 F (3.0C).

3. All of these conditions must be true: a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than Leaving Water Tem- perature by more than 5.4F (3.0C).

b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- charge Temperature is less than 41F (5C).

c. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- charge Temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) by more than 6F (3.3C).

NOTE: The freeze set point is 34F (1.1C) for fresh water systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The freeze set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Configura- tionSERV LOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2).

4. All of these conditions must be true: a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than Leaving Water Tem- perature by more than 5.4F (3.0C).

b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- charge Temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

c. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis- charge Temperature is less than the Outdoor Air Tem- perature by more than 9F (5C).

If any of these conditions 1, 2, 3 or 4 are met, the appropriate oper- ating mode, 21 (Circuit A), 22 (Circuit B) or 23 (Circuit C) will be in effect. Override #37: Circuit A Low Superheat Override #38: Circuit B Low Superheat Override #39: Circuit C Low Superheat This override attempts to avoid liquid slugging for the running compressors. It also protects against operation with excessively high superheat. No capacity steps will be added to the affected cir- cuit until there is a superheat greater than 5F (2.8C) and less than 45F (25C). If the capacity of the machine must be increased, the control will look to another circuit for additional capacity.

Head Pressure Control STANDARD UNIT The main base board (MBB) controls the condenser fans to main- tain the lowest condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing temperature input from the discharge pressure transducer to con- trol the fans. Head pressure control is maintained through a calcu- lated set point which is automatically adjusted based on actual sat- urated condensing and saturated suction temperatures so that the compressor(s) is (are) always operating within the manufacturers specified envelope (see Fig. 11). Each time a fan is added the cal- culated head pressure set point will be raised 25F (13.9C) for 35 seconds to allow the system to stabilize. The control will automat- ically reduce the unit capacity as the saturated condensing tem- perature approaches an upper limit. See capacity overrides 16-18. The control will indicate through an operating mode that high am- bient unloading is in effect. If the saturated condensing tempera- ture in a circuit exceeds the calculated maximum, the circuit will be stopped. For these reasons, there are no head pressure control methods or set points to enter. The control will turn off a fan stage when the condensing temperature is below the minimum head pressure requirement for the compressor. Fan sequences are shown in Fig. 12.

Fig. 11 Compressor Operating Envelope

706050403020100-10-20-30 Evaporating Temperature (F)

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

C on

de ns

in g

Te m

pe ra

tu re

( F)

25

Fig. 12 Condenser Fan Staging (Standard Unit)

MODEL CIRCUIT FANS/ CKT LOCATION

FAN STAGE

1 2 3 4 5

30RB060,070,080

060,070

A 3 Fan Number FM1 FM2 FM3

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3

B 1 Fan Number FM4

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5

080

A 2 Fan Number FM1 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2

B 2 Fan Number FM3 FM4

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6

30RB090,100,110

090,100, 110

A 3 Fan Number FM1 FM2 FM3

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3

B 3 Fan Number FM5 FM6 FM4

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7

30RB120

120

A 3 Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3

B 4 Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8

30RB130,150

130,150

A 4 Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4

B 4 Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8

30RB160,170

160,170

A 6 Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

B 4 Fan Number FM9 FM7 FM10 FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4

30RB190,210,225

190

A 6 Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

B 6 Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7 FM10

FM12 FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5

210,225

A 4 Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4

B 4 Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8

C 4 Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM12 FM10

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4

30RB250

250

A 4 Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4

B 4 Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8

C 6 Fan Number FM13 FM11 FM9 FM12

FM14 FM10

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 FB3/CH5

30RB275

275

A 6 Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

B 6 Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7 FM10

FM12 FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5

C 4 Fan Number FM15 FM13 FM16 FM14

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4

30RB300

300

A 6 Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

B 6 Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7 FM10

FM12 FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5

C 6 Fan Number FM17 FM15 FM13 FM16

FM18 FM14

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 FB3/CH5

FM1

FM2

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM3

FM4

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3 FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM13

FM14

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM13

FM14

FM15

FM16

FM1

C O

N T

R O

L B

O X

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM13

FM14

FM15

FM16

FM17

FM18

26

LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION For low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be equipped with low ambient temperature head pressure control op- tion or accessory. The Danfoss VLT controller adjusts fan speed to maintain the calculated head pressure set point. Table 20 lists re- quired configurations for Danfoss VLT low ambient head pressure control option.

Table 20 Danfoss VLT Required Configurations, Low Ambient Head Pressure Control Option

*208/230 v units should be configured for 208 v.

High-Efficiency Variable Condenser Fans (HEVCF) (30RB080-390 with Greenspeed Intelligence) This option controls the speed of all fans for improvement in part load efficiency and sound levels. All fans on a circuit are con- trolled by a VFD and run at the same speed. FAN DRIVE OPERATION The HEVCF option uses Danfoss VLT 102 variable frequency drives. Drives are connected to the LEN communication bus. Fan speed is determined by the chiller controller and communicated to the drive. Table 21 lists required configurations for the Danfoss VLT HEVCF option.

Table 21 Danfoss VLT Required Configurations, HEVCF Option

*208/230 v units should be configured for 208 v.

Fan speed is controlled to maintain SCT set point. The set point is calculated from conditions and adjusted to the most efficient oper- ating point. Fixed set points are also used at low ambient and tran- sition conditions. If the unit is operated in Service Test mode, the SCT set point is fixed at 125F (51.7C) for adjusting charge. Drive parameters are set by the chiller control each time the unit power is cycled with the exception of the drive address. The drive address is set at the factory, but will have to be reset in case of drive replacement. Addresses for the drives are shown below:

The address is set using the display on the drive. See drive manual for detailed instructions. Once the address is set, the power is cy- cled to reset all other parameters in the drive. Other parameters are listed in Tables 22 and 23 for reference. Drive must be in Auto mode to operate. Push the Auto button at the bottom of the drive. The light above it will be on. The 208-230v units with 6 condenser fans per circuit require two drives to operate the fans. See Table 24. They are set up in a mas- ter/slave configuration. The master drive is connected to the LEN bus as described above. The slave drive is not connected to LEN. All parameters must be set manually if the drive is replaced as shown in Table 25. The slave drive does not have an address. Fan motor troubleshooting should be done at the drive. Disconnect power from unit. Remove the entire front cover. Remove smaller panel covering terminal block at lower right corner of drive. See Fig. 13. Each fan wire is connected to a separate terminal. Termi- nals are labeled and color coded to match the fan wires. All termi- nals are connected in parallel. All terminals of a certain color, or label, are the same point electrically. Disconnect each fan cable and check resistance of motor. An open or short reading between phases or a phase and ground could signify a failed fan motor. Ver- ify reading at motor before replacing. Reconnect wires using color coding. Replace terminal block cover, drive cover, and power unit to test fan operation. Drive alarms are shown on the chiller controls as: V0-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit A V1-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit B V2-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit C The characters xx correspond to a specific alarm. Common alarms are listed in Table 26 with possible causes. For a complete list of alarms and causes, see the drive manual supplied with the chiller. Drives and motors are protected by fuses for short circuit protec- tion. See the Service Test section for details. Fan motor overload protection is provided by an overload device internal to the motor. The motor overload responds to a combination of temperature and current. On overload condition, the device breaks all 3 phases to the motor. It will reset automatically once the motor temperature cools. NOTE: See Appendix G for Siemens and Schneider low ambient control information.

POINT NAME DESCRIPTION VALUE

VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A 1 VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B 1

VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C 0 (Unit sizes 060-190 and modular units 1 (Unit sizes 210-300 only)

VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 1 RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM 1140 FC Factory Country Code 1

VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Nameplate voltage (208,380,460,575)*

POINT NAME DESCRIPTION VALUE

VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A No. of fans in ckt VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B No. of fans in ckt

VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C 0 (Unit sizes 060-190 and modular units No. of fans in ckt (Unit sizes 210- 300 only)

VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 2 RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM 1140

FC Factory Country Code 1

VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Nameplate voltage (208,380,460,575)*

DRIVE ADDRESS Drive Parameter Ckt A Ckt B Ckt C

8-31 181 182 183

27

Table 22 HEVCF Parameters Reset at Chiller Power Cycle

Table 23 HEVCF Parameters Common to All Setups

Table 24 208-230 v Units with 6-Fan Circuits

Table 25 HEVCF Parameters for 208-230 v Units with 6 Fans per Circuit

*x = Circuit A, B, or C. See Drive Address table on page 26.

No. Fans Per Circuit

PARAMETER 1-20 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25

Motor Power (kW) Motor Volts Motor Frequency (Hz) Motor Amps (A) Motor Speed (RPM)

1 2.6

208

60

11.9

1140 380 6.5 460 5.4 575 4.3

2 5.2

208

60

23.8

1140 380 13.0 460 10.8 575 8.6

3 7.8

208

60

35.7

1140 380 19.5 460 16.2 575 12.9

4 10.4

208

60

47.6

1140 380 26.0 460 21.6 575 17.2

6 15.6

208

60

71.4

1140 380 39.0 460 32.4 575 25.8

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING 0-02 Motor Speed Unit 1 = Hz 1-03 Torque Characteristic 1 = Variable Torque 1-73 Flying Restart 1 = Yes 1-80 Function Stop 0 = Coast 1-90 Motor Temp Protection 0 = No 1-91 Motor External Fan 0 = No 1-93 Thermistor SRC 0 = No 3-03 Max Ref 60 3-15 SRC Ref #1 1 = AI #53 3-16 SRC Ref #2 0 = No 3-41 Ramp Up 5 = 5 Seconds 3-42 Ramp Down 5 = 5 Seconds 4-10 Motor Speed Direction 0 = Clockwise 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit 5 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit 61 4-16 Torque Limit Mode 225 4-18 Current Limit 110 4-19 Max Output Freq 61 5-12 DI #27 0 = No Operation 14-01 Switching Frequency 4 14-03 Overmodulation 1 = Yes 14-40 VT Level Zero Mag Level 66 14-60 Function at Overtemp 1 = Derate 8-04 Time-Out 2 = Stop

UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT 160-170 A

190 A, B, C 250 C 275 A, B 300 A, B, C

DRIVE PARAMETER FVDx-1* FVDx-2*

8-31 Address 3-02 0 = Min Ref. 3-03 60 = Max Ref. 3-15 1 = AI 53 3-41 5 = Ramp up 3-42 5 = Ramp Down 4-12 5 = Motor Min 4-14 61 = Motor Max 4-19 61 = Max Freq. 5-02 1 0 = Input 5-12 0 = No Oper. 5-31 5 6-12 4 = Low Current 6-13 20 = High Current 6-14 0 = Low Ref. 6-14 60 = High Ref. 6-50 131 = 4-20 6-51 0 = Min Scale 6-52 100 = Max Scale 8-30 20 0

28

Fig. 13 Fan Terminal Cover and Terminal Block

Table 26 HEVCF Common Alarms

*x = 0, 1, or 2.

ALARM* DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE, ACTION

Vx-04 Mains phase loss Phase is missing or imbalance is too high on supply side. Check incoming wiring, drive fuses, and incoming power to unit. This is also used for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter.

Vx-09 Inverter Overload Frequency converter has cut out due to excessive current and temperature over a certain time period. Check motors for locked rotor or shorts.

Vx-12 Torque Limit Motor torque limit has been exceeded. Check motor for locked rotor or fan restrictions. Vx-13 Over Current Inverter peak current limit is exceeded. Check motor for locked rotor or fan restrictions.

Vx-14 Earth (ground) Fault Current exists between output phases and ground. Check motors for short to ground. Check wiring connections at fan motor terminal block at drive.

Vx-16 Short Circuit There is a short circuit in the motor wiring. Find the short circuit and repair.

Vx-17 Control Word Timeout Drive is not communicating with chiller. Check LEN bus wiring connections. Assure address is set properly.

Vx-29 Heatsink Temp Heatsink has exceeded max temperature. Check drive fan operation and blockage of airflow to heatsink fins.

Vx-30 Motor Phase U Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase. Vx-31 Motor Phase V Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase. Vx-32 Motor Phase W Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase. Vx-34 Fieldbus Communication Fault Fieldbus on communication card in drive is not working.

29

Cooler Pump Control COOLER PUMP CONTROL (CONFIGURATIONOPTN PUMP) The 30RB units can be configured for cooler pump control. Cool- er Pumps Sequence is the variable that must be confirmed in the field. Proper configuration of the cooler pump control is required to provide reliable chiller operation. The factory default setting for Cooler Pumps Sequence is PUMP=0 (no pump output), for units without the factory-installed hydronic package. For units with the hydronic package, the factory default setting for Cooler Pumps Sequence is PUMP=1 (1 pump only) for single pump units, or PUMP=2 (2 pumps auto) for dual pump units. For dual pump hy- dronic option units, three control options exist. If the Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) is set to 2, the control will start the pumps and automatically alternate the operation of the pumps to even the wear of the pumps. If a flow failure is detected, the other pump will attempt to start. Two manual control options also exist. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is set to PUMP=3 Cooler Pump 1 will always operate. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is set to PUMP=4 Cooler Pump 2 will always operate. It is recommended for all chillers that the cooler pump control be utilized unless the chilled water pump runs continuously or the chilled water system contains a suitable concentration of anti- freeze solution. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is configured, the cooler pump output will be energized when the chiller enters an ON mode. The cooler pump output is also energized when certain alarms are generated. The cooler pump output should be used as an override to the external pump control if cooler pump control is not utilized. The cooler pump output is energized if a P.01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection alarm is generated, which provides additional freeze protection if the system is not protected with a suitable antifreeze solution. For all Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) settings (including 0), closure of both the chilled water flow switch (CWFS) and the chilled water pump interlock contact (connected across TB-5 ter- minals 1 and 2) are required. In addition, for Cooler Pumps Se- quence settings of PUMP = 1, 2, 3, 4, normally open auxiliary contacts for Pump 1 and Pump 2 (wired in parallel) must be con- nected to the violet and pink wires located in the harness from the MBB-J5C-CH18 connector. The wires in the harness are marked PMP1-13 and PMP1-14. See the field wiring diagram in the 30RB Installation Instructions. Regardless of the cooler pump control option selected, if the chilled water flow switch/interlock does not close within the MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPTNDELY) peri- od after the unit is enabled and in an ON mode, alarm P.14 will be generated. Other conditions which will trigger this alarm include: Cooler pump interlock is open for at least 30 seconds

during chiller operation. Lag chiller in Master/Slave Control pump interlock does

not close after 1 minute of the pump start command. Cooler pump control is enabled and the chilled water flow

switch/interlock is closed for more than 2 minutes follow- ing a command to shut down the pump.

The last alarm criterion can be disabled. If Flow Checked if Pmp Off (ConfigurationOPTNP.LOC) is set to NO, the control will ignore the pump interlock input if the cooler pump output is OFF. The ComfortLink controls have the ability to periodically start the pumps to maintain the bearing lubrication and seal integrity. If Pe- riodic Pump Start (ConfigurationOPTNPM.PS) is set to YES, and if the unit is off at 2:00 PM, a pump will be started once each day for 2 seconds. If the unit has 2 pumps, Pump 1 will be started on even days (such as day 2, 4, or 6 of the month); Pump 2

will be started on odd days. The default for this option is PM.PS=NO. The pump will continue to run for 60 seconds after an off com- mand is issued.

Machine Control Methods Three variables control how the machine operates. One vari- able controls the machine On-Off function. The second con- trols the set point operation. The third variable controls the Heat-Cool operation which is always set to cool. Table 27 illus- trates how the control method and cooling set point select vari- ables direct the operation of the chiller and the set point to which it controls. Table 27 also provides the On/Off state of the machine for the given combinations. Machine On/Off control is determined by the configuration of the Operating Type Control (Operating ModesSLCT OPER). Options to control the machine locally via a switch, on a local Time Schedule, or via a Carrier Comfort Network command are offered. SWITCH CONTROL In this Operating Type Control, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch controls the machine locally. All models are factory config- ured with OPER=0 (Switch Control). With the OPER set to 0, simply switching the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller in an occupied state. The unit Occupied Status (Run StatusVIEWOCC) will change from NO to YES. The Status Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWCTRL) will change from 0 (Local Off) when the switch is Off to 1 (Local On) when in the Enable position or Remote Contact position with external con- tacts closed. TIME SCHEDULE In this Operating Type Control, the machine operates under a local schedule programmed by the user as long as the Enable/Off/Re- mote Contact switch is in the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed). To operate under this Operating Type Control, Operating ModesSLCT must be set to OPER=1. Two Internal Time Schedules are available. Time Schedule 1 (Time ClockSCH1) is used for single set point On-Off control. Time Schedule 2(Time ClockSCH2) is used for dual set point On- Off and Occupied-Unoccupied set point control. The control will use the operating schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the scrolling marquee display. CCN Global Time Schedule A CCN Global Schedule can be utilized. The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99 for operation under a CCN global schedule. The 30RB chillers can be configured to follow a CCN Global Time Schedule broadcast by another system element. The ComfortVIEW Network Managers Configure and Modify commands or the Service Tools Modify/Names function must be used to change the number of the Occupancy Equipment Part Ta- ble Name (OCC1P01E) to the Global Schedule Number. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCC1P65E). The Occupancy Supervisory Part table name (OCC1P01S) num- ber must be changed to configure the unit to broadcast a Global Time Schedule. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCC1P65S). When OCC1PxxS is set to a value greater than 64, an occupancy flag is broadcast over the CCN every time it transi- tions from occupied to unoccupied or vice-versa. By configuring their appropriate Time Schedule decisions to the same number, other devices on the network can follow this same schedule. The Enable/Off/Remote Contact must be in the Enable position or Re- mote Contact position with the contacts closed for the unit to oper- ate. The Status Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) will be 0 (Local Off) when the switch is Off. The Status Unit Con- trol Type will be 2 (CCN) when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On.

30

Table 27 Control Methods and Cooling Set Points

= No Effect

CCN CONTROL An external CCN device such as Chillervisor controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device forces the variable CHIL_S_S between Start/Stop to control the chiller. The Status Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) will be 0 (Local Off) when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is Off. The Sta- tus Unit Control Type will be 2 (CCN) when the Enable/Off/Re- mote Contact switch is in the enable or remote contact position with external contacts closed and the CHIL_S_S variable is Stop or Start. UNIT RUN STATUS (RUN STATUSVIEWSTAT) As the unit transitions from off to on and back to off, the Unit Run Status will change based on the units operational status. The vari- ables are: 0 (Off), 1 (Running), 2 (Stopping), and 3 (Delay). 0 indicates the unit is Off due to the Enable/Off/Remote

Contact Switch, a time schedule or CCN command. 1 indicates the unit is operational. 2 indicates the unit is shutting down due to the command

to shut down from the Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, a time schedule or CCN command.

3 indicates the unit has received a command to start from Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, a time schedule or CCN command, and is waiting for the start-up timer (Con- figurationOPTNDELY) to expire.

Cooling Set Point Selection SET POINT SELECTION (OPERATING MODES SLCT SP.SE) Several options for controlling the Leaving Chilled Water Set Point are offered and are configured by the Cooling Set Point Se- lect variables. In addition to the Cooling Set Point Select, Ice Mode Enable (ConfigurationOPTNICE.M), and Heat Cool Select (Operating ModesSLCTHC.SE) variables also have a role in determining the set point of the machine. All units are shipped from the factory with the Heat Cool Select variable set to HC.SE=0 (Cooling). All set points are based on Leaving Water Control, (ConfigurationSERVEWTO=NO).

In all cases, there are limits on what values are allowed for each set point. These values depend on the Cooler Fluid Type (Config- urationSERVFLUD) and the Brine Freeze Set point (Con- figurationSERVLOSP). See Table 28.

Table 28 Configuration Set Point Limits

*The minimum set point for Medium Temperature Brine applications is related to the Brine Freeze Point. The set point is limited to be no less than the Brine Freeze Point +5F (2.8C).

SET POINT 1 (OPERATING MODESSLCTSP.SE=1) When Set Point Select is configured to 1, the units active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOLCSP.1). SET POINT 2 (OPERATING MODESSLCTSP.SE=2) When Set Point Select is configured to 2, the units active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointCOOLCSP.2). 4 TO 20 MA INPUT (OPERATING MODESSLCT SP.SE=3) When Set Point Select is configured to 3, the units active set point is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module (EMM). See Table 27 for Control Methods and Cooling Set Points. The following equation is used to control the set point. See Fig. 14.

Set Point = 10 + 70(mA 4)/16 (deg F) Set Point = 12.2 + 38.9(mA 4)/16 (deg C)

DUAL SWITCH (OPERATING MODESSLCTSP.SE=4) When Set Point Select is configured to 4, the units active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointCOOLCSP.2) when they are closed.

PARAMETER ACTIVE SET

POINT Control Method

(OPER) Heat Cool

Select (HC.SE)

Setpoint Select (SP.SE)

Ice Mode Enable (ICE.M)

Ice Done (ICE.D)

Dual Setpoint Switch (DUAL)

Setpoint Occupied (SP.OC)

0 (Switch Ctrl)

0 (Cool)

1 (Setpoint1)

CSP.1 Enable Open Closed CSP.3

2 (Setpoint2)

CSP.2 Enable Open Closed CSP.3

3 (4-20mA Setp) 4-20 mA

Enable Open

Open CSP.1 Closed CSP.3

Closed Closed CSP.2

4 (Dual Setp Sw)

Open CSP.1

Closed CSP.2

Enabled Open Closed CSP.3

Closed Closed CSP.2

1 (Time Sched)

0 (Cool)

0 (Setpoint Occ)

Occupied CSP.1

Unoccupied CSP.2

Enable Open

Unoccupied CSP.3

Closed CSP.2

2 (CCN)

0 (Cool)

Occupied CSP.1 Unoccupied CSP.2

Enable Open Unoccupied CSP.3

SET POINT LIMIT COOLER FLUID TYPE, FLUD 1 = Water 2 = Medium Brine

Minimum* 38F (3.3C) 14F (10.0C) Maximum 60F (15.5C)

31

Ice Mode Operation of the machine to make and store ice can be accom- plished many ways. The Energy Management Module and an Ice Done Switch are required for operation in the Ice Mode. In this configuration, the machine can operate with up to three cooling set points: Cooling Set Point 1 (Occupied)(Set PointCOOL CSP.1), Cooling Set Point 2 (Unoccupied)(Set PointCOOL CSP.2), and Ice Set Point (Set PointCOOLCSP.3). SET POINT OCCUPANCY (OPERATING MODESSLCT SP.SE=0) When Set point Select is configured to 0, the units active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOLCSP.1) during the occupied period while operating under Time Clock SCH1. If the Time Clock SCH2 is in use, the units active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOL CSP.1) during the occupied period and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set Point COOLCSP.2) during the unoccupied period.

Temperature Reset Temperature reset is a value added to the basic leaving fluid tem- perature set point. The sum of these values is the control point. When a non-zero temperature reset is applied, the chiller controls to the control point, not the set point. The control system is capa- ble of handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on cooler fluid temperature difference. Because the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the building load, the tempera- ture difference reset is in effect an average building load reset method. The control system is also capable of temperature reset based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. An ac- cessory sensor must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The energy management module (EMM) is required for temperature reset using space temperature or a 4 to 20 mA signal. Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant leav- ing fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the cooler fluid temperature dif- ference will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 15. Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the fluid tem- perature set point may be lower than required. If the leaving fluid temperature were allowed to increase at part load, the efficiency of the machine would increase. Temperature difference reset allows for the leaving temperature set point to be reset upward as a function of the fluid temperature difference or, in effect, the building load. To use Water Temperature Difference Reset, four variables must be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (Configura- tionRSETCRST), Delta T No Reset Temp (Set- pointsCOOLCRT1), Delta T Full Reset Temp (Setpoints COOLCRT2) and Degrees Cool Reset (SetpointsCOOL DGRC). In the following example using Water Temperature Dif- ference Reset, the chilled water temperature will be reset by

5.0F (2.8C) when the T is 2F (1.1C) and 0F (0C) reset when the T is 10F. The variable CRT1 should be set to the cooler temperature difference (T) where no chilled water tem- perature reset should occur. The variable CRT2 should be set to the cooler temperature difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset should occur. The variable DGRC should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run Sta- tusVIEW, and subtract the active set point (SETP) from the control point (CTPT) to determine the degrees reset. See Fig. 15 and Table 29. Other, indirect means of estimating building load and controlling temperatures reset are also available and are discussed below. See Fig. 16. To use Outdoor Air Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (Configuration RSETCRST), OAT No Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOL CRO1), OAT Full Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRO2) and Degrees Cool Reset (SetpointsCOOLDGRC). In the follow- ing example, the outdoor air temperature reset example provides 0F (0C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0F (29.4C) outdoor- air temperature and 10.0F (5.5C) reset at 55.0F (12.8C) out- door-air temperature. See Fig. 17 and Table 30. To use Space Temperature Reset in addition to the energy man- agement module, four variables must be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (ConfigurationRSETCRST), Space T No Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRS1), Space T Full Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRS2) and Degrees Cool Reset (Set- pointsCOOLDGRC). In the following space temperature re- set example, 0F (0C) chilled water set point reset at 72.0F (22.2C) space temperature and 6.0F (3.3C) reset at 68.0F (20.0C) space temperature. See Fig. 18 and Table 31. To use 4-20 mA Temperature Reset in addition to the energy man- agement module, four variables must be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (ConfigurationRSET CRST), Current No Reset Val (SetpointsCOOLCRV1), Current Full Reset Val (SetpointsCOOLCRV2) and Degrees Cool Reset (Set- pointsCOOLDGRC). In the following example, at 4 mA no reset takes place. At 20 mA, 5F (2.8C) chilled water set point re- set is required. See Fig. 19 and Table 32.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other control sys- tems due to possible power supply differences such as a full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connection of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

32

Fig. 14 4 to 20 mA Set Point Control

Fig. 15 Water Temperature Difference Reset

Maximum Temperature

0

0 (-12.2)1

0 (-6.7)2

0 (-1.1)3

0 (4.4)4

50 (10.0)

0 (15.6)6

0 (21.1)7

0 (26.7)8

0 (32.2)9

02510150

mA SIGNAL

S E

T P

O IN

T IN

D E

G F

( d

eg C

)

noitauqE

enirBeruatrepmeTmuideM

retaWhserF

MAXIMUM SET POINT

MINIMUM SET POINT (FLUD=1)

MINIMUM SET POINT (FLUD=2)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

0186420

COOLER FLUID TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (deg F)

D E

G R

E E

S R

E S

E T

( d

eg F

)

(EXAMPLE)

33

Fig. 16 Chilled Water Temperature Control

Fig. 17 Outdoor Air Temperature Reset

04

24

44

64

84

05

25

45

65

0010908070605040302010

LOADING (%)

F L

U ID

T E

M P

E R

A T

U R

E (

d eg

F )

DESIGN RISE (TYPICAL)

LWT

EWT

LEGEND EWT Entering Water Temperature LWT Leaving Water Temperature

0

2

4

6

8

01

21

41

61

021001080604020

OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (F)

R E

S E

T A

M O

U N

T (

d eg

F )

(EXAMPLE)

34

Table 29 Water Temperature Difference Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT CONFIGURATION DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 2 Delta T Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 2.

2 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS / Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 4 CRV.2

CRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp Cooler Temperature difference where no temperature reset is required.

0 Value of CRT1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

10.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 10 from the example.

10.0 Accepts the change.

CRT1

CRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp Cooler Temperature difference where full temperature reset, DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRT2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

2.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 2 from the example.

2.0 Accepts the change.

CRT2

x 4 CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

5.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 5 from the example.

5.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

35

Table 30 OAT Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT CONFIGURATION DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 1 Out Air Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 1.

1 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS / Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 6 CRT.2

CRO1 OAT No Reset Temp Outdoor Temperature where no temperature reset is required.

0 Value of CRO1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

85.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 85 from the example.

85.0 Accepts the change.

CRO1

CRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp Outdoor Temperature where full temperature reset, DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRO2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

55.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 55 from the example.

55.0 Accepts the change.

CRO2

CRS1

CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

10.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 10 from the example.

10.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

36

Fig. 18 Space Temperature Reset

Fig. 19 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset

SPACE TEMPERATURE (F)

D E

G R

E E

S R

E S

E T

( d

eg F

)

60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 (EXAMPLE)

mA SIGNAL

D E

G R

E E

S R

E S

E T

( d

eg F

)

20 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

37

Table 31 Space Temperature Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT CONFIGURATION DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 4 Space Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 4.

4 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS / Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 8 CRO2

CRS1 Space T No Reset Temp Space Temperature where no temperature reset is required.

0 Value of CRS1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

72.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 72 from the example.

72.0 Accepts the change.

CRS1

CRS2 Space T Full Reset Temp Space Temperature where full temperature reset, DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRS2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

68.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 68 from the example.

68.0 Accepts the change.

CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

6.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 6 from the example.

6.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

38

Table 32 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT CONFIGURATION DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 3 4-20 mA Input Use up or down arrows to change value to 3.

3 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS / Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 2 CSP.3 Cooling Setpoint 3

CRV1 Current No Reset Val Outdoor Temperature where no temperature reset is required.

0 Value of CRV1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

4.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 4 from the example.

4.0 Accepts the change.

CRV1

CRV2 Current Full Reset Val Current value where full temperature reset, DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRV2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

20.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 20 from the example.

20.0 Accepts the change.

CRV2

x 6 CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

5.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 5 from the example.

5.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

39

Demand Limit Demand limit is a feature that allows the unit capacity to be limit- ed during periods of peak energy usage. Once a Demand Limit command has been initiated, the unit capacity will be limited to the commanded value and will not exceed that value. Three types of demand limiting are available on the 30RB units. The first type is through switch control, which will reduce the maximum capacity by up to three user-configurable percentages. Single-Step Switch Control Demand Limit is standard on all 30RB units. To utilize Two and Three-Step Switch Control De- mand Limit, the Energy Management Module is required. The second type of demand limiting is by 4 to 20 mA signal input, which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly from 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. To utilize 4 to 20 mA Demand Lim- it, the Energy Management Module is required. The third type of demand limiting requires a programmable controller (Open or CCN) or UPC, and writes a demand limit directly to the control. Using the scrolling marquee, the Active Demand Limit Val (Run StatusVIEWLIM) will display the current demand limit value. A value of 100 will allow the machine to run fully loaded if required. Any value less than 200 will limit the capacity of the machine. To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the type selected.

SWITCH CONTROLLED Single-Step Switch Control Demand Limit is standard on all 30RB units. To utilize Two or Three-Step Switch Control Demand Limit, the Energy Management Module is required. The three steps are achieved through two sets of dry contacts. The contacts for Demand Limit Switch 1 must be connected to TB5-5, 14. The contacts for Demand Limit Switch 2 must be connected to TB6- 14,15. See Fig. 20. Several parameters must be configured for switch controlled de- mand limit: Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) Switch Limit Setpoint 1 (SetpointsMISCDLS1) Switch Limit Setpoint 2 (SetpointsMISCDLS2), if

Two-Step Switch Control is desired Switch Limit Setpoint 3 (SetpointsMISCDLS3), if

Three-Step Switch Control is desired The position of the Demand Limit Switch contacts shown in Fig. 20 will allow for up to three steps of demand limit according to Table 33. The actual positions of Demand Limit Switches 1 and 2 seen by the control can be viewed using the scrolling marquee or Naviga- tor display by accessing the items Inputs GEN.1DLS1 or InputsGEN.1DLS2. Follow the example in Table 34 to enable the function and config- ure the step demand limit for 80%, 60%, and 25% capacity limit based on the switch position described above.

Fig. 20 Switch Controlled Demand Limit Wiring

Table 33 Demand Limit Switch Status Response

Table 34 Switch Controlled Demand Limit (Scrolling Marquee and Navigator Display)

SWITCH STATUS DEMAND LIMIT VALUE SCROLLING MARQUEE/NAVIGATOR DISPLAY ITEMDemand Limit

Switch 1 Demand Limit

Switch 2 Open Open None

Closed Open SetpointsMISCDLS1 Open Closed SetpointsMISCDLS2

Closed Closed SetpointsMISCDLS3

ITEM EXPANSION PATH SCROLLING MARQUEE NAVIGATOR

DISPLAYValue Expansion DMDC Demand Limit Select ConfigurationRSET 1 Switch Switch DLS1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 SetpointsMISC 80 80 DLS2 Switch Limit Setpoint 2 SetpointsMISC 60 60 DLS3 Switch Limit Setpoint 3 SetpointsMISC 25 25

MAIN BASE

BOARD

J4

EMM BOARD

J4

a30-5710

40

In the example in Table 34, when Demand Limit Switch 1 is closed and Demand Limit Switch 2 is open, the maximum chiller capacity will be reduced to 80%. When Demand Limit Switch 1 is open and Demand Limit Switch 2 is closed, the maximum chiller capacity will be reduced to 60%. Similarly, when both Demand Limit Switches are closed, the maximum chiller capacity will be reduced to 25%. EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 TO 20 MA CONTROLLED) The Energy Management Module is required for 4 to 20 mA de- mand limit control. The 4 to 20 mA positive signal is connected to TB6-1 and the negative to TB6-2. Additionally, a field-supplied 250-ohm, 1/2-watt resistor must be installed across TB6-1 and TB6-2. See Fig. 21. The Energy Management Module accepts a 0 to 5 vdc input. The resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA signal to a 0 to 5 vdc input.

Fig. 21 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Wiring

The input signal seen by the control can be viewed using the scrolling marquee or Navigator display by accessing the item In- putsGEN.1DMND. To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control, three parame- ters must be configured: Demand Limit Select

(ConfigurationRSETDMDC) mA for 100% Demand Limit

(ConfigurationRSETDMMX) mA for 0% Demand Limit

(ConfigurationRSETDMZE).

In the following example, a 4 mA signal is Demand Limit 100% and a 20 mA Demand Limit signal is 0%. The demand limit is a linear interpolation between the two values entered. See Table 35 and Fig. 22. In Fig. 22, if the machine receives a 12 mA signal, the machine controls will limit the capacity to 50%.

Table 35 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit (Scrolling Marquee and Navigator Display)

Fig. 22 Demand Limit Response to mA Signal

EMM BOARD

J7B

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other control sys- tems due to possible power supply differences such as a full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connection of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

ITEM EXPANSION PATH SCROLLING MARQUEE NAVIGATOR DISPLAYValue Expansion

DMDC Demand Limit Switch ConfigurationRSET 2 4-20 mA Input 4-20 mA Input DMMX mA for 100% Demand Lim ConfigurationRSET 4 4 DMZE mA for 0% Demand Lim ConfigurationRSET 20 20

0

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

001

02816141210186420

DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL (mA)

D E

M A

N D

L IM

IT (

% )

22

41

CCN CONTROLLED To configure demand limit for CCN control, the unit Operating Type Control must be in CCN control (Operating Modes SLCTOPER=2), and must be controlled by a programmable controller (Open or CCN) or UPC. By writing to the CCN point DEM_LIM (Status Display Table GENUNIT), the unit capacity can be controlled.

Remote Alarm and Alert Relays The 30RB chiller can be equipped with a remote alert and remote alarm annunciator contacts. Both relays connected to these con- tacts must be rated for a maximum power draw of 10 va sealed, 25 va inrush at 24 volts. The alarm relay, indicating that the complete unit has been shut down, can be connected to TB5-12 and TB5- 13. For an alert relay, indicating that at least 1 circuit was off due to the alert, a field-supplied and installed relay must be connected between MBB-J3-CH25-3 and TB5-13.

Broadcast Configuration The 30RB chiller is capable of broadcasting time, date, and holi- day status to all elements in the CCN system. In the stand-alone mode, broadcast must be activated to utilize holiday schedules and adjust for daylight saving time. If the chiller is to be connected to a CCN system, determine which system element is to be the net- work broadcaster to all other system elements. Broadcast is acti- vated and deactivated in the BRODEFS Table. It is accessible through Network Service Tool. It is not accessible through the scrolling marquee display. Only one element should be configured as a broadcaster. If a broadcast is activated by a device that has been designated as a network broadcaster, then broadcast time, date, and holiday status will be updated over the CCN system. If broadcast is enabled, a broadcast acknowledger must also be enabled. The acknowledger cannot be the same machine as the broadcasting machine. ACTIVATE The Activate variable enables the broadcast function of the Com- fortLink controls. If this variable is set to 0, this function is not used and holiday schedules and daylight savings compensation are not possible. Setting this variable to 1 allows the machine to broadcast and receive broadcasts on the network. The following information is broadcast: the time with compensation for daylight savings, date, and holiday flag. Set this variable to 2 for stand-alone units that are not connected to a CCN. With this configuration, daylight saving time and holiday determination will be done without broadcasting through the bus. This variable can only be changed when using ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display. BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER This configuration defines if the chiller will be used to acknowl- edge broadcast messages on the CCN bus. One broadcast ac- knowledger is required per bus, including secondary buses created by the use of a bridge. This variable can only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display.

Alarm Control ALARM ROUTING CONTROL Alarms recorded on the chiller can be routed through the CCN. To configure this option, the ComfortLink control must be configured to determine which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input for the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory default is 00000000. See Fig. 23. The default setting is based on the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network. If the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW, Comfort- WORKS, TeLink, DataLINK, or BAClink module, enabling this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the CCN com- munication bus. This option can be modified with Network Service Tool. It cannot be modified with the scrolling marquee display. Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is 11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to ComfortVIEW software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK. ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY The ComfortVIEW software uses the equipment priority value when sorting alarms by level. The purpose of the equipment prior- ity value is to determine the order in which to sort alarms that have the same level. A priority of 0 is the highest and would appear first when sorted. A priority of 7 would appear last when sorted. For example, if two chillers send out identical alarms, the chiller with the higher priority would be listed first. The default is 4. This vari- able can only be changed when using ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display. COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is not acknowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which may be either a ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowl- edgment is not received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after the number of minutes specified in this decision. This variable can only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scroll- ing marquee display. RE-ALARM TIME This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A re-alarm occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm continue to persist for the number of minutes specified in this decision. Re-alarming will continue to occur at the specified interval until the condition causing the alarm is corrected. This variable can only be changed with Com- fortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display. ALARM SYSTEM NAME This variable specifies the system element name that will ap- pear in the alarms generated by the unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters in length. This variable can only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or Network Ser- vice Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display.

42

Fig. 23 Alarm Routing Control

PRE-START-UP

Do not attempt to start the chiller until the following checks have been completed.

System Check 1. Check auxiliary components, such as the chilled fluid circu-

lating pump, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid are operational. Consult manufacturers instructions. If the unit has field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired cor- rectly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.

2. Open compressor suction (if equipped) and discharge shutoff valves.

3. Open liquid line shutoff valves. 4. Fill the chiller fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-

mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to be cooled. Bleed all air out of high points of system. An air vent pipe plug is included with the cooler. If outdoor temperatures are expected to be below 32F (0C), sufficient inhibited pro- pylene glycol or other suitable corrosion inhibited antifreeze should be added to the chiller water circuit to prevent possible freeze-up. The chilled water loop must be cleaned before the unit is connected. Units supplied with the accessory hydronic package include a run in screen. If the run-in screen is left in the suction guide/strainer, it is recommended that the Service Maintenance be set to alert the operator within 24 hours of start-up to be sure that the run-in screen in the suction guide/strainer is removed. To set the time for the parameter, go to Time ClockMCFGW.FIL. Values for this item are counted as days. Refer to the hydronic pump package literature if unit is equipped with the optional hydronic pump package.

5. Check tightness of all electrical connections. 6. Oil should be visible in the compressor sight glass. An

acceptable oil level in the compressor is from 3/4 to 7/8 full sight glass. Adjust the oil level as required. No oil should be

removed unless the crankcase heater has been energized for at least 24 hours. See Oil Charge section for Carrier-approved oils.

7. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate. 8. Crankcase heaters must be firmly seated under compressor,

and must be energized for 24 hours prior to start-up. 9. Verify power supply phase sequence. Check reverse rotation

board. If lower (red) LED is blinking, the phase sequence is incorrect. Reverse two of the power wires at the main termi- nal block. Units with dual power point connection utilize two reverse rotation boards. Check both for proper phase sequence.

10. Check compressors and compressor mounting sled. Com- pressor shipping braces and shipping bolts must be removed.

START-UP

Actual Start-Up Actual start-up should be done only under supervision of a quali- fied refrigeration technician. 1. Be sure all shut off valves are open. Units are shipped from

factory with suction valves (if equipped) open. Discharge and liquid line shut off valves are closed.

2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set point (SetpointsCOOLCSP.1). No cooling range adjust- ment is necessary.

3. If optional control functions or accessories are being used, the unit must be properly configured. Refer to Configuration Options section for details.

4. Start chilled fluid pump, if unit is not configured for pump control, (ConfigurationOPTNPUMP= 0).

5. Complete the Start-Up Checklist to verify all components are operating properly.

6. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to ENABLE position.

7. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is function- ing properly. Check to see that leaving fluid temperature agrees with leaving set point Control Point (Run Status VIEWCTPT).

DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT

ComfortVIEW or ComfortWORKS

TeLink

Unused

BACLink or DataLINK

Unused

Important: Complete the Start-Up Checklist for 30RB Liq- uid Chillers at the end of this publication. The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record of unit condition, application requirements, system information, and operation at initial start-up.

CAUTION

Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the machine may result.

43

Operating Limitations TEMPERATURES Unit operating temperature limits are listed in Table 36.

Table 36 Temperature Limits for Standard Units

LEGEND

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85F (29.4C). Unit requires brine modification for operation below this temperature.

Low Ambient Operation If unit operating temperatures below 32F (0C) are expected, re- fer to separate unit installation instructions for low ambient tem- perature operation using accessory low ambient temperature head pressure control, if not equipped. Contact a Carrier representative for details. NOTE: Wind baffles and brackets must be field-fabricated and in- stalled for all units using accessory low ambient head pressure control to ensure proper cooling cycle operation at low-ambient temperatures. See the 30RB Installation Instructions or the low ambient temperature head pressure control accessory installation instructions for more information.

VOLTAGE Main Power Supply Minimum and maximum acceptable supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage Never operate a motor where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%. The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3 legs. Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

Example: Supply voltage is 230-3-60

Determine maximum deviation from average voltage. (AB) 243 239 = 4 v (BC) 239 236 = 3 v (AC) 239 238 = 1 v Maximum deviation is 4 v. Determine percent of voltage imbalance.

This amount of phase imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maxi- mum allowable 2%.

MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME To obtain proper temperature control, loop fluid volume must be at least 3 gallons per ton (3.25 L per kW) of chiller nominal capac- ity for air conditioning and at least 6 gallons per ton (6.5 L per kW) for process applications or systems that must operate at low ambient temperatures (below 32F [0C]). Refer to application in- formation in Product Data literature for details. FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS Standard chillers should be applied with nominal flow rates within those listed in the Minimum and Maximum Cooler Flow Rates ta- ble. Higher or lower flow rates are permissible to obtain lower or higher temperature rises. Minimum flow rates must be exceeded to assure turbulent flow and proper heat transfer in the cooler. See Table 37.

Consult application data section in the Product Data literature and job design requirements to determine flow rate requirements for a particular installation.

TEMPERATURE F C Maximum Ambient Temperature 125 52 Minimum Ambient Temperature 32 0 Maximum Cooler EWT* 95 35 Maximum Cooler LWT 60 15 Minimum Cooler LWT 40 4.4

EWT Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature LWT Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

CAUTION

Brine duty application (below 40F [4.4C] leaving chilled water temperature) for chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact your Carrier representative for details regarding specific applications. Operation below 40F (4.4C) leaving chilled water temperature without modification can result in compressor failure.

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

max voltage deviation from average voltage average voltage

AB = 243 v BC = 236 v AC = 238 v

Average Voltage = (243 + 236 + 238)

= 717

= 239 3 3

% Voltage Imbalance = 100x 4

= 1.7% 239

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company immediately. Do not operate until imbalance condition is corrected.

CAUTION Operation below minimum flow rate could subject tubes to frost pinching in the tube sheet, resulting in failure of the cooler.

A B C

MOTOR

44

Table 37 Minimum and Maximum Cooler Flow Rates SIZES 060-300

SIZES 315-390

OPERATION

Sequence of Operation With a command to start the chiller, the cooler pump will start. Af- ter verifying water flow, the control will monitor the entering and leaving water temperature. At any time that a compressor is not operating, its crankcase heater is active. If the need for mechanical cooling is determined, the control decides which circuit and com- pressor to start. The compressor will deenergize the crankcase heater as it starts. Compressors will be staged with minimum load control (if equipped and configured) to maintain LWT set point. Shutdown of each circuit under normal conditions occurs in incre- ments, starting with the minimum load control (if equipped) and finishing with the last running compressor. Once minimum load control is disabled, one compressor is shut down. Eight seconds later the next compressor will shut down. The process will contin- ue until all of the compressors are shut down. The EXV will close completely, 1 minute after the last compressor has shut down. There are several abnormal conditions that, if detected, will shut down the circuit immediately. In this case, minimum load control and all compressors are turned off without an 8-second interval be- tween them. The cooler pump will remain ON for 20 seconds after the last compressor has been turned OFF.

Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation With a command to start the chiller, the master chiller deter- mines which chiller will become the lead chiller based on Con- figurationRSETLLBL and ConfigurationRSET LLBD. The lead chiller is always started first and the lag chiller is held at zero percent capacity by the master chiller forcing the lag demand limit value to 0%. The lead chillers water pump will be started. The lag chillers water pump shall

be maintained off if ConfigurationRSETLAGP=0. The internal algorithm of lead chiller will control capacity of the lead chiller. If Lead Pulldown Time (ConfigurationRSETLPUL) has been configured, the lead chiller will continue to operate alone for that specified time. After the Lead Pulldown Time timer has elapsed, if the lead chiller is fully loaded and either all available compression is on or at the master demand limit val- ue, then the lag start timer (ConfigurationRSETLLDY) is initiated. When the pulldown timer and lag start timer have elapsed and the Combined Leaving Chilled Water Temperature is more than 3F (1.7C) above the set point, then the lag chiller is started. If the lag chillers water pump was not started when the ma- chines went into occupied mode, then the lag chiller water pump will be started. The lag chiller will start when the master chiller forcing the lag chiller demand limit value (LAG_LIM) to the masters demand limit value. If lead/lag capacity balance is se- lected, once the lag chiller has started, the master chiller will try to keep the difference in capacity between lead and lag to less than 20%. The master chiller will then be responsible for water loop capacity calculation, and will determine which chiller, the lead or lag, will increase or decrease capacity. When the load re- duces, the lag chiller will unload first. To accomplish this, the lead chiller set point is decreased by 4F (2.2C) until the lag chiller unloads. To configure the two chillers for dual chiller operation, the master chiller must have the Control Method variable (Operating ModeSLCTOPER) set to meet the job requirements. The slave chiller must be set to Control Method variable (Operating ModeSLCTOPER) = 2 (CCN Control) and the remote-off- enable switch must be in the enable position. The master chiller

30RB SIZE

MINIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE (gpm)

MAXIMUM FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MINIMUM LOOP

VOLUME (gal.)

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MAXIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE (l/s)

MINIMUM LOOP

VOLUME (liters)

060 72 288 180 5 18 681 070 84 336 210 5 21 795 080 96 384 240 6 24 908 090 108 432 270 7 27 1022 100 120 480 300 8 30 1136 110 132 528 330 8 33 1249 120 144 576 360 9 36 1363 130 156 624 390 10 39 1476 150 180 720 450 11 45 1703 160 192 768 480 12 48 1817 170 204 816 510 13 51 1931 190 228 912 570 14 58 2158 210 252 950 630 16 60 2385 225 270 950 675 17 60 2555 250 300 950 750 19 60 2839 275 330 950 825 21 60 3123 300 360 950 900 23 60 3407

30RB SIZE

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MIN LOOP

VOLUME (gal.)

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MIN LOOP

VOLUME (liters)Module A Module B Module A Module B Module A Module B Module A Module B

315 192 192 768 768 945 12 12 48 48 3577 330 204 192 816 768 990 12 12 51 48 3748 345 204 204 816 816 1035 13 13 51 51 3918 360 228 204 912 816 1080 14 13 58 51 4088 390 228 228 912 912 1170 14 14 58 58 4429

45

and the slave chiller CCN addresses (Configuration OPTNCCNA) must be configured. The master and slave chillers can be addressed from 1 to 239. Each device connected to the network must have its own unique address. Both chillers must have the same CCN Bus Number (Configura- tionOPTNCCNB). Lead/Lag Chiller Enable must be set for both chillers by configuring Master/Slave Select (Configura- tionRSETMSSL) to 1 (Master) for the master chiller. The slave chiller Master/Slave Select must be set to 2 (Slave). The master chiller can be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance (Con- figurationRSETLLBL) to rotate the lead and lag chillers af- ter a configured number of hours of operation. The Lag Start De- lay (ConfigurationRSETLLBD) can be configured. This prevents the Lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller is fully loaded and the delay has elapsed.

Operating Modes MODE 1 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD01): STARTUP DELAY IN EFFECT Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is started. This mode is active when the Min- utes Off Time (ConfigurationOPTNDELY) timer is active. Action Taken The unit will not start until the timer has expired. Termination The mode will terminate when the timer expires. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to the Minutes Off Time timer. MODE 2 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD02): SECOND SETPOINT IN USE Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Cooling Setpoint 2 (SetpointsCOOL CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (Set- pointsCOOLCSP.3) is in use. While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Run StatusVIEWSETP) will show the CSP.2 or CSP.3 value. Action Taken The unit will operate to the Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or Ice Set- point (CSP.3). Termination This mode will terminate when the Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no longer in use. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 3 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD03): RESET IN EFFECT Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Tempera- ture Reset (ConfigurationRSETCRST) is enabled either by CRST=1 (Outside Air Temperature), CRST=2 (Return Water), CRST=3 (4-20 mA Input), or CRST=4 (Space Temperature) and is active. Action Taken The Active Setpoint (Run StatusVIEW SETP) will be modi- fied according to the programmed information and will be dis- played as the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT). Termination This mode will terminate when the Temperature Reset is not mod- ifying the active leaving water set point, so SETP is the same as CTPT. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options.

MODE 4 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD04): DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Demand Limit (ConfigurationRSET DMDC) is enabled either by DMDC=1 (Switch), DMDC=2 (4-20 mA Input) or the Night Time Low Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPTN LS.LT). Action Taken The Active Demand Limit Value (Run StatusVIEWLIM) will display the current demand limit according to the pro- grammed information and the units capacity will be reduced to the amount shown or lower. Termination This mode will terminate when the Demand Limit command has been removed. Possible Causes This mode is in effect when capacity is being limited by the de- mand limit function. MODE 5 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD05): RAMP LOADING ACTIVE Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Ramp Loading (ConfigurationOPTNRL.S) is enabled and the fol- lowing conditions are met: 1. The leaving water temperature is more than 4F (2.2C) from

the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT), and 2. The rate of change of the leaving water temperature is greater

than the Cool Ramp Loading (Set PointsCOOLCRMP). Action Taken The control will limit the capacity step increase until one of the two conditions in Mode 5 is no longer true. Termination This mode will terminate once both conditions in Mode 5 are no longer true. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only when capacity is being limited by the ramp loading function. MODE 6 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD06): COOLER HEATER ACTIVE Criteria for Mode Tested when unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active when the cooler heater is energized, if the Outdoor Air Temperature (Tem- peratureUNITOAT) is less than the calculated value (Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Setpoint [Configura- tionSERVHTR] default 2F [1.1C]), and either the Leav- ing Water Temperature (TemperatureUNITLWT) or the En- tering Water Temperature (TemperatureUNITEWT) are less than or equal to the Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Set- point (HTR). The Freeze Setpoint is 34F (1.1C) for fresh water systems (Con- figurationSERVFLUD=1). The Freeze Setpoint is the Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) for Medium Temperature Brine systems (ConfigurationSERV FLUD=2). Action Taken The cooler heater will be energized. Termination The cooler heater will be deenergized when both the Entering Wa- ter Temperature (EWT) and Leaving Water Temperature (LWT) are above the Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Setpoint (HTR).

46

Possible Causes This mode will be enabled for freeze protection. If the tempera- tures are not as described above, check the accuracy of the outside air, entering and leaving water thermistors. MODE 7 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD07): WATER PUMP ROTATION Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active when the Cooler Pump Sequence (ConfigurationOPTNPUMP) =2 (2 Pumps Automatic Changeover) and the Pump Rotation Delta Timer (ConfigurationOPTN ROT.P) has expired. Action Taken The control will switch the operation of the pumps. The lead pump will be operating normally. The lag pump will be started, becoming the lead, and then the original lead pump will be shut down. Termination This mode will terminate when the pump operation has been com- pleted. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 8 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD08): PUMP PERIODIC START Criteria for Mode This mode is active when the cooler pump is started for the Peri- odic Pump Start configuration (Configuration OPTNPM.PS=YES). Action Taken If the pump has not run that day, a pump will be started and will run for 2 seconds at 2:00 PM. If the machine is equipped with dual pumps, Pump no. 1 will run on even days (such as day 2, 4, 6 of the month). Pump no. 2 will run on odd days (such as day 1, 3, 5 of the month). Termination This mode will terminate when the pump shuts down. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 9 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD09): NIGHT LOW NOISE ACTIVE Criteria for Mode This mode is active when the Night Time Low Noise Option has been configured and the time is within the configured time. Pro- gramming a Night Low Noise Start Time (Configura- tionOPTNLS.ST) and a Night Low Noise End Time (Con- figurationOPTNLS.ND) configures the option. Action Taken The control will raise the head pressure set point to reduce the number of condenser fans on, thereby reducing the sound of the machine. Additionally, if the Night Time Low Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPTN LS.LT) has been configured, the units capacity will be limited to the programmed level. Termination This mode will terminate once the Night Low Noise End Time (LS.ND) has been reached. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options.

MODE 10 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD10): SYS- TEM MANAGER ACTIVE Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active if a Sys- tem Manager such as Building Supervisor, Chillervisor System Manager, or another CCN device is controlling the machine. Action Taken The machine will respond to the specific command received from the System Manager. Termination The mode will be terminated if the System Manager control is re- leased. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 11 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD11): MAST SLAVE CTRL ACTIVE Criteria for Mode Tested if the machine is ON. This mode is active if the Master Slave Control has been enabled. and 2 machines are programmed, one as the master (Configuration RSETMSSL=1 [Master]) and the other as a slave (ConfigurationRSETMSSL=2 [Slave]). Action Taken Both the master and slave machine will respond to the capacity control commands issued by the master controller. This may in- clude control point changes and demand limit commands. Termination This mode will terminate when the Master Slave Control has been disabled. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 12 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD12): AUTO CHANGEOVER ACTIVE Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. Action Taken None. Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 13 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD13): FREE COOLING ACTIVE Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. Action Taken None. Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 14 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD14): RECLAIM ACTIVE Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. Action Taken None.

47

Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 15 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD15): ELEC- TRIC HEAT ACTIVE Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. Action Taken None. Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 16 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD16): HEAT- ING LOW EWT LOCKOUT Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. Action Taken None. Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 17 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD17): BOILER ACTIVE Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units. Action Taken None. Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 18 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD18): ICE MODE IN EFFECT Criteria for Mode Tested when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Ice Setpoint (SetpointsCOOLCSP.3) is in use. While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Run Status VIEWSETP) will show the CSP.3 value. Action Taken The unit will operate to the Ice Setpoint (CSP.3). Termination This mode will terminate when the Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no lon- ger in use. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 19 OPERATING MODEMODEMD19): DEFROST ACTIVE ON CIR A

MODE 20 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD20): DEFROST ACTIVE ON CIR B Criteria for Mode This mode is not supported for Cooling Only units.

Action Taken None. Termination None. Possible Causes This mode is in effect only due to programming options. MODE 21 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD21): LOW SUCTION CIRCUIT A

MODE 22 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD22): LOW SUCTION CIRCUIT B

MODE 23 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD23): LOW SUCTION CIRCUIT C Criteria for Mode The criteria are tested when the circuit is ON. The appropriate cir- cuit mode will be active if one of the following conditions is true: 1. If the circuits Saturated Suction Temperature (SST) is more

than 6F (3.3C) less than the freeze point and both the cooler approach (Leaving Water TemperatureSST) and superheat (Suction Gas TemperatureSST) are greater than 15F (8.3C).

2. If there is more than one compressor ON in the circuit and the circuits SST is greater than 18F (10.0C) below the freeze point for more than 90 seconds.

3. If there is more than one compressor ON in the circuit and the circuits SST is greater than 4F (20.0C) and the SST 30 seconds ago was 18F (10.0C) below the freeze point.

4. If the circuits saturated suction temperature is greater than 6F (3.3C) below the freeze point for more than 3 minutes.

For a fresh water system (ConfigurationSERVFLUD =1), the freeze point is 34F (1.1C). For medium temperature brine systems, (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2), the freeze point is Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP). Action Taken For criterion 1, no additional stages will be added. For criteria 2, 3 and 4, one stage of capacity will be removed. Termination The mode will terminate when the circuits Saturated Suction Temperature is greater than the freeze point minus 6F (3.3C) or the circuit has alarmed. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarms P.05, P.06, and P.07 on page 72. MODE 24 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD24): HIGH DGT CIRCUIT A

MODE 25 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD25): HIGH DGT CIRCUIT B

MODE 26 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD26): HIGH DGT CIRCUIT C Criteria for Mode This mode is tested for when any circuit is running. The circuit saturated condensing and suction temperatures are monitored to ensure that the compressors always operate withing their allowed map. Operation at conditions at or outside the map boundaries will cause this mode to be in effect. Operation at extremely low suction pressures and high condensing temperatures will cause the mode to be generated. Action Taken The circuit will not be allowed to increase capacity and may be au- tomatically unloaded or stopped.

48

Termination This mode will terminate when or if the circuit refrigerant condi- tions return to within the compressor map. Possible Causes This mode could be in effect due to a low fluid flow rate, over- charge of oil in a circuit, dirty condenser coils, refrigerant over- charge, or excessive brine concentration. MODE 27 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD27): HIGH PRES OVERRIDE CIR A

MODE 28 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD28): HIGH PRES OVERRIDE CIR B

MODE 29 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD29): HIGH PRES OVERRIDE CIR C Criteria for Mode Tested when the circuit is ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be active if the discharge pressure for the circuit, Discharge Pres- sure Circuit A (Pressure PRC.ADP.A), Discharge Pressure Circuit B (PressurePRC.BDP.B), or Discharge Pressure Circuit C (PressurePRC.CDP.C) is greater than the High Pressure Threshold (ConfigurationSERVHP.TH). Action Taken The capacity of the affected circuit will be reduced. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load Control and has been configured for High Ambient (Configuration UNITHGBP=3), the min- imum load control valve will be energized. Two minutes follow- ing the capacity reduction, the circuits saturated condensing tem- perature (SCT) is calculated and stored. The affected circuit will not be allowed to add capacity for at least 5 minutes following the capacity reduction. If after 5 minutes, the circuits saturated con- densing temperature is less than SCT 3F (1.7C), if required, another stage of capacity will be added. If additional steps of capacity are required, the control will look for other circuits to add capacity. Termination This mode will terminate once the circuits saturated condensing temperature is less than SCT 3F (1.7C). Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarm A1.03. on page 68. MODE 30 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD30): LOW SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT A

MODE 31 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD31): LOW SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT B

MODE 32 (OPERATING MODEMODEMD32): LOW SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT C Criteria for Mode Tested when the circuit is ON with at least 1 compressor ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be active is the circuits superheat is less than 5F (2.8C) or greater than 45F (25C). Action Taken No additional stages of circuit capacity will be added until the cir- cuits superheat is greater than 5F (2.8C) and less than 45F (25C). The control will look for other circuits to add capacity if additional steps of capacity are required. Termination This mode will terminate once the affected circuits superheat is greater than 5F (2.8C) and less than 45F (25C).

Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarms P.08, P.09, P.10, P.11, P.12 and P.13 on page 73.

Optional Heat Reclaim Module The heat reclaim option adds a water-cooled condenser in parallel with the standard air-cooled condenser for the purpose of simulta- neously producing tempered hot water while satisfying the chilled water requirement. For chillers with the heat reclaim option, Configuration UNITRECL should be set to YES. This option requires installation of an additional board (EMM-HR). This board allows control of the components shown in Table 11. Table 38 lists EMM-HR outputs for the solenoid valves. Item numbers in Table 38 refer to Fig. 24 of this document. For more control details, refer to the unit low voltage control sche- matic (Fig. 25). The heat reclaim mode can be selected by either the Heat Recov- ery Enable Switch or by CCN control. SWITCH CONTROLLED To configure Heat Reclaim for SWITCH control, the unit Operat- ing Type Control can be configured to 0, 1 or 2 (Operating ModesSLCTOPER). The Reclaim Select configuration must be set to Switch Control (Operating ModesSLCT RL.SE=2). Switch input connection should be field wired to ter- minals 14 and 15 on TB7, cooling mode (open) or heat reclaim mode (closed). Switch status can be accessed through In- putGEN.IRECL. CCN CONTROL To configure Heat Reclaim for CCN control, the unit Operating Type Control must be set to CCN control (Operating modeSLCTOPER=2). The Reclaim Select configuration must be set to Yes (Operating ModesSLCTRL.SE=1). Heat reclaim mode is selected by forcing CCN point RECL_SEL (Status DisplayGENUNITRECL_SEL) to NO for cooling mode or YES for Heat Reclaim mode. The heat reclaim function is active when the heat reclaim entering water temperature is lower than the heat reclaim set point (Set- pointsMISCRSP), default 122F (50C), minus half or quar- ter of the heat reclaim deadband, depending on the number of re- frigerant circuits in reclaim mode (SetpointsMISCRDB). The default heat reclaim deadband is 9F (5.0C) and the recom- mended deadband range is 5 to 18F (2.8 to 10C). The difference between the reclaim entering water temperature and reclaim set point will determine if one or two circuits are re- quired to provide heat reclaim capacity. See Table 39 for details. Heat Reclaim Active status is indicated by MODE_14=ON (Op- erating ModesMODEMD14) from the scrolling marquee display or Mode_14=1 accessed through CCN. The following is the changeover procedure from cooling mode to heat reclaim mode. 1. Verify that the circuit has run for more than 2 minutes in

cooling. 2. Start the reclaim pump. 3. Verify the reclaim condenser flow switch is closed. If this

remains open after one minute of condenser pump operation, the circuit remains in cooling mode and P.15 alarm will be activated.

Once water flow is established the following conditions must be true: saturated condensing temperature is greater than saturated

suction temperature plus 18F (10C)

49

if reclaim water entering requires the circuit to go to a heat reclaim session and the number of air cooled to reclaim changeovers is not greater than 4 per hour

the last changeover occurred more than 7 minutes ago When all of these conditions are true, the heat reclaim pumpdown sequence is activated. During heat reclaim pumpdown, the control will open the entering heat reclaim condenser solenoid valve and close the entering air-cooled condenser solenoid valves 3 seconds later. After one minute or when the subcooling value is above 13.2F (10.4C), the heat reclaim operation is effective. During the heat reclaim operation, if the sub-cooling value is less than 13.2F (10.4C) leaving air-cooled condenser solenoids may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds to recover more charge. If sub-cooling is greater than 16 F (9.0 C) the entering air cooled condenser solenoids may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds to transfer charge back into the air-cooled condenser to prevent excessive condensing temperature. The leaving heat re- claim condenser solenoid should remain closed. Once the heat reclaim set point (RSP) is satisfied, the system will transition back to normal air-cooled mode. The air-cooled pump- down sequence is activated. During air-cooled pumpdown, the control will open the entering air-cooled condenser solenoids and close the entering heat reclaim condenser valves 3 seconds later.

During the air-cooled operation, leaving heat reclaim condenser solenoids may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds to recover more charge into air-cooled operation, based on the system sub- cooling level. Leaving air-cooled condenser solenoids should re- main closed. Heat reclaim entering water temperature (HEWT), leaving water temperature (HLWT), heat reclaim pump hours (HR.CD), refrig- erant sub-cooling (HRS.x) can be accessed from the scrolling marquee display through the following paths:

TemperaturesUNITHEWT TemperatureUNITHLWT Run StatusRUNHR.CD TemperaturesCir.AHRS.A TemperaturesCir.BHRS.B

To view circuit status through CCN, two points are available: Re- claim Status Circuit A and Reclaim Status Circuit B. Each will show a single-digit number as defined in Table 40. RECLAIM CONDENSER WATER VALVE OUTPUT This output (0 to 10 vdc) controls the heat reclaim condenser 3- way water valve position through a variable speed device. A 10 vdc signal corresponds to 100% open.

Table 38 Heat Reclaim Circuits

Table 39 Heat Reclaim Staging

OUTPUT ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION CONNECTION RELAY SOLENOID TYPE

OPERATION COOLING RECLAIM

HR1.A 4 Ckt. A Ent A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J3-CH24 ECA-A N/O OPEN CLOSED HR2.A 6 Ckt. A Lvg A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH18 LCA-A N/C CLOSED CYCLING HR3.A 2 Ckt. A Ent W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH20 ECW-A N/C CLOSED OPEN HR4.A 9 Ckt. A Lvg W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH22 LCW-A N/C CYCLING CLOSED HR1.B 5 Ckt. B Ent A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J3-CH25 ECA-B N/O OPEN CLOSED HR2.B 7 Ckt. B Lvg A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH19 LCA-B N/C CLOSED CYCLING HR3.B 3 Ckt. B Ent W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH21 ECW-B N/C CLOSED OPEN HR4.B 10 Ckt. B Lvg W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH23 LCW-B N/C CYCLING CLOSED

HEAT RECLAIM ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE RECLAIM SELECT NUMBER OF CIRCUITS IN RECLAIM

NUMBER OF CIRCUITS IN RECLAIM STATUS CHANGE

No 0 - 2 hr_ew < rsp - hr_deadb/2 Yes + 2

rsp - hr_deadb/2 < hr_ewt < rsp - hr_deadb/4 Yes 0 + 1 rsp - hr_deadb/2 < hr_ewt < rsp - hr_deadb/4 Yes 1 Unchanged rsp - hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/4 Yes Unchanged rsp + hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes 1 Unchanged rsp + hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes 2 - 1

hr_ewt > rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes - 2

50

Table 40 CCN Table Reclaim Status Display

*x = a or b.

The 3-way valve should be installed to facilitate the cold water start-up below 59F (15C) and maintain a stable head pressure control during heat reclaim operation. The minimum position of the water valve should be set at 20% and maximum position should be set at 100%. When the entering water temperature is be- low 68F (20C), the water valve should remain at 20% position

to allow a maximum re-circulating of the warm water between the 3-way water valve and heat reclaim condenser. When the entering water temperature is above 104F (40C), the water valve will remain fully open, allowing no recirculation of the warm water. When the entering water temperature is between 68F and 104F (20 and 40C), the water valve will be adjusted between 20% and 100% position in linear proportion to the value of the entering water temperature. RECLAIM CONDENSER HEATER OPERATION For freeze protection the heat reclaim condenser is equipped with an electric heater. The heater is energized when entering or leaving heat reclaim fluid temperature is lower than 37.4F (3.0C). The heater is de-energized when both temperatures are above 40.0F (4.4C).

Fig. 24 Solenoid Valve Location in Chiller System 30RB with Heat Reclaim

RECLAIM STATUS (hrstat_x)* DESCRIPTION

0 Air cooled mode 1 Reclaim mode request 2 Reclaim pumpdown sequence 3 Reclaim operation mode 4 Air cooled mode request

6

12 13

15

17

18 18

11

10

8

7

8

13542

16

14

11

9

88

1

19

19

LEGEND

ITEM NUMBERS

EXV Electronic Expansion Valve

1 Air condenser (coils) 2 Solenoid valve: Heat reclaim mode ckt A (entering heat reclaim condenser) 3 Solenoid valve: Heat reclaim mode ckt B (entering heat reclaim condenser) 4 Solenoid valve: Cooling mode ckt A (entering air-cooled condenser) 5 Solenoid valve: Cooling mode ckt B (entering air-cooled condenser) 6 Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in heat reclaim mode ckt A (leaving air-cooled condenser) 7 Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in heat reclaim mode ckt B (leaving air-cooled condenser) 8 Check valve 9 Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in cooling mode ckt A (leaving heat reclaim condenser) 10 Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in cooling mode ckt B (leaving heat reclaim condenser) 11 Compressor 12 Hot Gas Bypass ckt A 13 Hot Gas Bypass ckt B 14 Pumpdown pressure transducer ckt A 15 Pumpdoiwn pressure transducer ckt B 16 Subcooled condenser gas temperature ckt A 17 Subcooled condenser gas temperature ckt B 18 Expansion Device (EXV) 19 Filter Drier (FD)

51

Fig. 25 Heat Reclaim Low Voltage Control Schematic

CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH

52

SERVICE

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) See Fig. 26 for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refrigerant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2- phase condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve operates through an electronically controlled activation of a stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for ro- tation in either direction. The direction depends on the phase rela- tionship of the power pulses.

Fig. 26 Cutaway View of the Electronic Expansion Valve

The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating move- ments that are transformed into linear motion by the transmission in the cage assembly. The valve cone is a V-port type which in- cludes a positive shut-off when closed. There are two different EXVs. For circuits with 1 or 2 compres- sors, the total number of steps is 2785. For circuits with 3 or 4 compressors, the total number of steps is 3690. The EXV motor moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra 160 steps to the move, to ensure the value is open or closed completely. The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pressure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature. The thermistor mea- sures the temperature of the superheated gas entering the compres- sor and the pressure transducer determines the saturated tempera- ture of suction gas. The difference between the temperature of the superheated gas and the saturated suction temperature is the super- heat. The EXV board controls the position of the electronic expan- sion valve stepper motor to maintain superheat set point. The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approximately 9.0F (5.0C). Because EXV status is communicated to the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV boards, it is pos- sible to track the valve position. The unit is then protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. During initial start-up, the EXV is fully closed. After initialization period, valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly monitoring the amount of valve movement.

The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction temperature to 50F (10C). This makes it possible for the chiller to start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compres- sor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating pressure). If it appears that the EXV module is not properly controlling cir- cuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a number of checks that can be made using test functions and initialization fea- tures built into the microprocessor control. See the EXV Trouble- shooting Procedure section to test EXVs. EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Follow the steps below to diagnose and correct EXV problems. Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/Remote (EOR) Contact switch to the Off position. Press on the scrolling marquee until the highest operating level is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test mode and press

. The display will be TEST. Use the arrow keys until display shows QUIC. Press (password entry may be re- quired) and use or to change OFF to ON. The Quick Test sub-mode is now enabled. Move the arrow down to the appropriate circuit EXV, Circuit A EXV % Open (Service Test ModeQUICEXV.A), Circuit B EXV % Open (Service Test ModeQUICEXV.B), or Circuit C EXV % Open (Service Test ModeQUICEXV.C), and press . The current value of 0 will be displayed.

Press and the value will be flashing. Using the in- crease the EXV position to select 100% valve position (hold for quick movement) and press . The actuator should be felt moving through the EXV. Press again twice if nec- essary to confirm this has occurred. This will attempt to force the EXV to 100% again. To close the valve, press , select 0% with and press . The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly, con- tinue with the following test procedure: Check the 8-position DIP switch on the board for the proper ad- dress. Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on the EXV module. Connect positive test lead to EXV-J2A terminal 5 for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2A terminal 5 for sizes 210-300 for Circuit A. Connect lead to EXV-J2B terminal 5 for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2B terminal 5 for sizes 210-300 for Circuit B. Connect lead to EXV2-J2A terminal 5 for sizes 210-300 for Circuit C. Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the Service Test procedure above, move the valve output under test to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 5 to any other pin, as board damage will occur. During the next several seconds, carefully connect the negative test lead to pins 1,2,3 and 4 in succession. Digital voltme- ters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If the output remains at a constant voltage other than 6 vdc or shows 0 volts, remove the connector to the valve and recheck. Press and select 0% to close the valve. If a problem still exists, replace the EXV board. If the reading is correct, the expan- sion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. Check the EXV connector and interconnecting wiring. 1. Check color-coding and wire connections. Make sure they

are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV board and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

1. Cable 2. Glass Seal 3. Motor Housing 4. Stepper Motor 5. Bearing 6. Lead Screw 7. Insert 8. Valve Piston 9. Valve Seat

10. Valve Port

CAUTION Do not remove EXV cables from the EXV board with the power applied to the board. Damage to the board may occur.

ESCAPE

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

53

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Remove the EXV module plug. Module plug is labeled EXV-J2A on sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2A on sizes 210-300 for Circuit A, EXV-J2B for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2B for sizes 210-300 for Circuit B, or EXV2-J2A on sizes 210-300 for Circuit C. Check the resis- tance of the two windings between pins 1 and 3 for one winding and pins 2 and 4 for the other winding. The resistance should be 52 ohms ( 5.2 ohms). Check resistance of pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ground. The resistance should be infinity. Inspecting/Opening Electronic Expansion Valves

To check the physical operation of an EXV, the following steps must be performed. 1. Close the liquid line shut off valve of the circuit to be

checked. Put the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in the Off position. Using the scrolling marquee, enter the Service Test mode and change Service TestTEST T.REQ from OFF to ON. A password may be required. Switch the EOR switch to the Enable position. Under the COMP sub-mode, enable the one of the compressors (Service TestTEST CP.xn) for the circuit. Let compressor run until gage on suc- tion pressure port reads 10 psig. Press , and

to turn the compressor off. The compressor will turn off. Immediately after the compressor shuts off, close the discharge valve.

2. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low side using proper reclaiming techniques. Turn off the line voltage power supply to the compressors.

3. The expansion valve motor is hermetically sealed inside the top portion of the valve. See Fig. 26. Carefully unscrew the 11/16 in. (27 mm) retaining nut securing the motor portion to the body of the valve making sure the EXV plug is still con- nected. The EXV operator will come out with the motor por- tion of the device.

4. Enter the appropriate EXV test step under the (Service TestQUIC) sub-mode in the Service Test mode. Locate the desired item Service TestQUICEXV.A, Service TestQUICEXV.B, or Service TestQUIC EXV.C. Press twice to make the valve position of 0% flash. Press and hold until 100% is displayed and press

. Observe the operation of the lead screw. See Fig. 26. The motor should be turning, raising the operator

closer to the motor. Motor actuator movement should be smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open posi- tion. Press twice, use to select 0% and press

again to check open to closed operation. If the valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving correct signals, yet does not operate as described above, the sealed motor portion of the valve should be replaced.

Installing EXV Motor

If re-installing the motor, be sure to use a new gasket in the assem- bly. See Fig. 27. It is easier to install the motor assembly with the lead screw in the fully closed position. Using the steps outlined above, move the EXV position to 0. Insert the motor into the body of the EXV. Tighten the motor to the body to 36 ft-lb (50 N-m) and then tighten the valve another 30 degrees. Moisture Liquid Indicator Clear flow of liquid refrigerant indicates sufficient charge in sys- tem. Bubbles in the sight glass indicate undercharged system or presence of noncondensables. Moisture in system measured in parts per million (ppm), changes color of indicator. See Table 41. Change filter drier at first sign of moisture in system.

Table 41 Moisture Liquid Indicator

Filter Drier Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows presence of moisture, replace filter drier(s). There is one filter drier on each circuit. Refer to Carrier Standard Service Techniques Manual, Chapter 1, Re- frigerants, for details on servicing filter driers. Liquid Line Service Valve This valve is located immediately ahead of filter drier, and has a 1/4-in. Schrader connection for field charging. In combination with compressor discharge service valve, each circuit can be pumped down into the high side for servicing except on units equipped with MCHX condenser coils.

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gaskets before opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

REFRIGERANT R-410A AT 75F (24C) (ppm)

AT 125F (52C) (ppm)

Green Dry <20 <60 Yellow-green Caution 20 to 165 60 to 500 Yellow Wet >165 >500

IMPORTANT: Unit must be in operation at least 12 hours be- fore moisture indicator can give an accurate reading. With unit running, indicating element must be in contact with liquid refrigerant to give true reading.

ENTER ENTER

54

Fig. 27 Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

GASKET

OPEN VALVE IN QUICK TEST SUB-MODE BEFORE DISASSEMBLING

EF05BD271 NV 32.5mm EF05BD331 NV 36mm

50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30 27mm / 11/16''

27mm / 11/16''

ADAPTER

DISASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY

NOTES: 1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling. 2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.

NOTE: Open valve in Quick Test sub-mode before disassembling.

55

Cooler FREEZE PROTECTION Coolers can be ordered with heaters installed in the factory. If equipped, the main base board based on the outdoor-air tempera- ture and the entering and leaving water thermistors controls the cooler heaters. The Heater Set Point is the sum of the freeze point and Cooler Heater DT Setp (ConfigurationSERVHTR). If the entering or leaving water temperature is less than the Heater Set Point and the outdoor-air temperature is less than the Heater Set Point 2F (1.1C), then the heater will be turned on. If the Entering or Leaving Water Temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP)+ 1.0F (0.5C), then the heater will be turned on along with the pump. Entire cooler is covered with closed-cell insulation applied over the heater. Heater plus insulation protect cooler against low ambi- ent temperature freeze-up to 20F (28C).

LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE Main base board is programmed to shut chiller down if leaving fluid temperature drops below 34F (1.1C) for water or below Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP)for brine units. The unit will shut down without a pumpout. When fluid temperature rises to 6F (3.3C) above the leaving fluid set point, safety resets and chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as this is the first occurrence. LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION All 30RB machines include an integral flow switch that protects the chiller against loss of cooler flow. TUBE PLUGGING A leaky tube can be plugged until retubing can be done. The num- ber of tubes plugged determines how soon the cooler must be re- tubed. If several tubes require plugging, check with a local Carrier representative to find out how the number and location of tubes can affect unit capacity. Up to 10% of the tubes per refrigerant pass can be plugged. Fig. 28 shows an Elliott tube plug and a cross-sectional view of a plug in place. See Tables 42 and 43 for plug components.

Table 42 Plug Component Part Numbers

*Order directly from Elliot Tube Company, Dayton, OH or RCD. Can be obtained locally.

Table 43 Plug Component Dimensions

NOTE: Tubes next to gasket webs must be flush with tube sheet (both ends).

For the 30RB150-390 coolers, the pass partition has a perforated distribution plate in the inlet pass to more uniformly distribute the refrigerant as it enters the first pass tubes of the cooler. The perfo- rated distribution plate is on the tubesheet side of the pass parti- tion. A tube plug in a first pass tube will interfere with the installa- tion of pass partition. The tube plug must be flush with the tube sheet to prevent this interference. The pass partition is symmetri- cal, meaning the partition plate can be rotated 180 degrees, how- ever, the performance of the machine will be affected if the pass partition is installed incorrectly. RETUBING When retubing is required, obtain service of qualified personnel experienced in boiler maintenance and repair. Most standard pro- cedures can be followed when retubing the coolers. An 8% crush is recommended when rolling replacement tubes into the tubesheet. The following Elliott Co. tube rolling tools are required: Expander Assembly Cage Mandrel Rolls

Place one drop of Loctite No. 609 or equivalent on top of tube pri- or to rolling. This material is intended to wick into the area of the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet, and prevent fluid from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet.

Fig. 28 Elliott Tube Plug

TIGHTENING COOLER HEAD BOLTS (FIG. 29-33) Gasket Preparation When reassembling cooler heads, always use new gaskets. Gas- kets are neoprene-based and are brushed with a light film of com- pressor oil. Do not soak gasket or gasket deterioration will result. Use new gaskets within 30 minutes to prevent deterioration. Reas- semble cooler nozzle end or plain end cover of the cooler with the gaskets. Torque all cooler bolts to the following specification and sequence: 5/8-in. Diameter Perimeter Bolts (Grade 5): 150 to 170 ft-lb

(201 to 228 N-m) 1/2-in. Diameter Flange Bolts (Grade 5): 70 to 90 ft-lb

(94 to 121 N-m) 1/2-in. Diameter Center Stud (Grade 5): 70 to 90 ft-lb

(94 to 121 N-m) 1. Install all bolts finger tight, except for the suction flange bolts.

Installing these flanges will interfere with tightening the cen- ter stud nuts.

2. Bolt tightening sequence is outlined in Fig. 29-33. Follow the numbering or lettering sequence so that pressure is evenly applied to gasket.

IMPORTANT: If unit is installed in an area where ambient temperatures fall below 32F (0C), it is recommended that a suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution be used in chilled water circuit.

CAUTION Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage to the tube sheet section between the holes.

COMPONENTS FOR PLUGGING PART NUMBER For Tubes

Brass Pin 853103-312* Brass Ring 853002-322*

For Holes without tubes Brass Pin 853103-375 Brass Ring 853002-377

Loctite No. 675 Locquic N

PLUG COMPONENT SIZE in. mm

Tube sheet hole diameter 0.377-0.382 9.58-9.70 Tube OD 0.373-0.377 9.47-9.58 Tube ID after rolling (Includes expansion due to clearance.) 0.328 8.33

56

3. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is reached. Load all bolts to each one-third step before proceed- ing to next one-third step.

4. No less than one hour later, retighten all bolts to required torque values.

5. After refrigerant is restored to system, check for refrigerant leaks using recommended industry practices.

6. Replace cooler insulation.

CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH A factory-installed flow switch is installed in the cooler nozzle for all machines. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set for approximately 0.5 ft/sec flow. See Table 44 for unit flow rate information.

Table 44 Unit Flow Rates

The sensor tip houses two thermistors and a heater element. One thermistor is located in the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. This thermistor is used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is affected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated from each other within the confines of the probe. In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried away from the sen- sor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing liquid. The difference in tem- perature between the two thermistors provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe. When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in temperature differential. When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then the out- put is switched on, sending 24 vac through a 560-ohm dropping resistor. This provides 12 vac to the MBB to prove flow has been established. For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If necessary, build- up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common vinegar cleansing agent.

RTPF (Round Tube Plate Fin) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and ex- tend the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning procedures are recommended as part of the routine maintenance activities to extend the life of the coil. REMOVE SURFACE LOADED FIBERS Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be ap- plied in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily dam- aged (fin edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of a protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins. NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a sur- face loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil. This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse. PERIODIC CLEAN WATER RINSE A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are ap- plied in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very im- portant that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning is rec- ommended. ROUTINE CLEANING OF COIL SURFACES Routine cleaning with Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This cleaner is avail- able from Carrier Replacement parts division as part number P902-0301 for a one-gallon container, and part number P902-0305 for a 5-gallon container. It is recommended that all coils, including the standard copper tube aluminum fin, pre-coated fin, copper fin, or e-coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline environmentally bal- anced coil cleaner as described below. Coil cleaning should be part of the units regularly scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment. Avoid the use of: coil brighteners acid cleaning prior to painting high pressure washers poor quality water for cleaning

Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner is non-flammable, hypoallergenic, nonbacterial, and a USDA accepted biodegrad- able agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding components such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected.

Fig. 29 Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB060,070

UNIT SIZE 30RB

COOLER CONNECTION

SIZE (in.)

MINIMUM FLOW - WATER

(GPM)

MINIMUM FLOW - 40% EG

(GPM) 060-100 4 20 53

110-300 6 44 117

315-390 6 44 (per module) 117 (per module)

4 8 12

16

20

24

23 19

15 11

5 7

27

9 13

17 21

25

26

22 18

14 10

6

2

3

1

4 8

12 16

20 24

23 19

15 11

5 7

27

9 13

17

21

25

26

22

18 14

10 6

2

3

1

57

Fig. 30 Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB080-100

Fig. 31 Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB110-130

Fig. 32 Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB150-190, 315A/B, 345A/B, 360A/B, 390A/B

Fig. 33 Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB210-300

1

2

4

3

5

6 10

13 17

21

25

28

24

20

16 12

9711 14

18

22

26

29

27

23

19 15

8

1

2

4

3

5

6 10

13 17

21

25

28

24

20

16 12

9711 14

18

22

26

29

27

23

19 15

8

1

2

4

3

5

10 13

17

21

25

28

24

20 16

12 9711

14 18

22 26

29

27

23 19

15 8 6

1

2

4

3

5

10 13

17

21 25

28

24

20 16

12 9711

14 18

22 26

29

27

23 19

15 8 6

1

2

4

3

5

11 15

19

30

26 22

18 14

1012 87 16

20 24

28

31 29

25 21

17 13 9 6

27

23

1 2

4

3

5

11 15

19

30

26 22

18 14

1012 87 16

20 24

28

31 29

25 21

17 13 9 6

27

23

1 2

4

3 5

11

30 26

22 18

14 10 12

8

7 16

20 24

28

37

29 25

21 17

13

6

35

32

9

33

40 38

34

36 39

31 27

23 19

15

1 2

4

3 5

11

30 26

22 18

14

10 12

8

7 16

20 24

28

37

29 25

21 17

13

6

35

32

9

33

40 38 34

36 39

31 27

23 19

15

58

Totaline Environmentally Balanced Coil Cleaner Application Equipment 21/2 gallon garden sprayer water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle

Totaline Environmentally Balanced Coil Cleaner Application Instructions 1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil face

or trapped within the mounting frame or brackets. 2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety glasses

and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and gloves. It is rec- ommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum cleaner as described above.

4. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins.

5. Mix Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner in a 21/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instructions included with the cleaner. The optimum solution temperature is 100F.

NOTE: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130F, as the enzymatic activity will be destroyed. 1. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally balanced coil

cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area, tube sheets and coil headers.

2. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and apply cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion. Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize potential for fin damage.

3. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned areas.

4. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly cleaned. 5. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution for

10 minutes. 6. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing. Reap-

plying cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute saturation is achieved.

7. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle. Pro- tect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.

MCHX Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and ex- tend the life of the unit. The following steps should be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil face or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and gloves. It is rec- ommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condenser coils. Only clean potable water is authorized for cleaning condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the coil steady and uni- formly from top to bottom while directing the spray straight toward the coil. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 degree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the coil face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent damage to air centers.

As part of normal maintenance, check the coil for leaks and corrosion. The condenser coil is connected to the refrigerant circuit with a fitting that forms a dielectric coupling. The cou- pling is held in place with two nuts and studs. The nuts should be tightened to 10 lb-ft (13.6 N-m).

Condenser Fans A formed metal mount bolted to the fan deck supports each fan and motor assembly. A shroud and a wire guard provide protec- tion from the rotating fan. The exposed end of fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If fan motor must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to regrease fan shaft and rein- stall fan guard. The fan motor has a step in the motor shaft. For proper performance, fan should be positioned such that it is se- curely seated on this step. Tighten the bolt to 12 to 15 ft-lb (16 to 20 N-m).

Refrigerant Circuit LEAK TESTING Units are shipped with complete operating charge of refrigerant R- 410A (see Physical Data tables supplied in the 30RB Installation Instructions) and should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test. If there is no pressure in the system, introduce enough ni- trogen to search for the leak. Repair the leak using good refrigera- tion practices. After leaks are repaired, system must be evacuated and dehydrated. REFRIGERANT CHARGE Refer to Physical Data tables supplied in the 30RB Installation Instructions. Immediately ahead of filter drier in each circuit is a factory-installed liquid line service valve. Each filter drier has a 1/4-in. Schrader connection for charging liquid refrigerant. Charging with Unit Off and Evacuated Close liquid line service valve before charging. Weigh in charge shown on unit nameplate. Open liquid line service valve; start unit and allow it to run several minutes fully loaded. Check for a clear sight glass. Be sure clear condition is liquid and not vapor.

CAUTION Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissim- ilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline environmentally balanced coil clean- er as described on page 56.

CAUTION High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase air- side pressure drop. Reduced unit performance or nuisance unit shutdown may occur.

CAUTION Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage the coil.

CAUTION Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between air centers and refrigerant tubes.

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counterclock- wise viewed from above). If necessary, switch any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

59

Charging with Unit Running If charge is to be added while unit is operating, all condenser fans and compressors must be operating. It may be necessary to block condenser coils at low ambient temperatures to raise condensing pressure to approximately 450 psig (3102 kPa) to turn all condens- er fans on. Do not totally block a coil to do this. Partially block all coils in uniform pattern. Charge each circuit until sight glass shows clear liquid, and has a liquid line temperature of 103F (39C). If unit has the HEVCF option, run unit in Service Test with all compressors on. Fans will adjust high side pressure to the correct value, 125F SCT (saturated condensing temperature), 450 psig.

Safety Devices Chillers contain many safety devices and protection logic built into electronic control. Following is a brief summary of major safeties. COMPRESSOR PROTECTION Circuit Breaker Each compressor is equipped with one molded case circuit breaker to provide short circuit protection. Do not bypass or increase size of a breaker to correct problems. Determine cause for trouble and correct before resetting breaker. Circuit breaker current rating is listed on individual circuit breakers. A high-pressure switch with a trip pressure of 641 psig (4419 kPa) is mounted on the discharge line of each circuit. Switch is wired in series with the SPM modules of all compressors in the circuit. If switch opens, the SPM opens all compressor contactors in the cir- cuit and all compressors are locked off. See the table below for high pressure switch protection.

CRANKCASE HEATERS Each compressor has a 56-w crankcase heater to prevent absorp- tion of liquid refrigerant by oil in crankcase when compressor is not running. Heater power source is control power transformer.

Relief Devices Fusible plugs are located in each circuit to protect against damage from excessive pressures. HIGH-SIDE PROTECTION One device is located between condenser and filter drier; a second is on filter drier. These are both designed to relieve pressure on a temperature rise to approximately 210F (99C). LOW-SIDE PROTECTION A device is located on suction line and is designed to relieve pres- sure on a temperature rise to approximately 170F (77C). Some local building codes require that relieved gases be removed. This connection will allow conformance to this requirement.

Compressors

COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT To change out a faulty compressor, refer to the compressor re- placement procedure included with the new compressor. Compressor oil equalization line fittings use Roto-lok fittings. If a leak is detected at these fittings, tighten fitting to 110 lb-ft (149 N- m). If leak persists, open system and inspect gasket surface for for- eign material or damage. If debris is found, clean the surface and install a new gasket. If the gasket surface is damaged, replace the compressor. Do not reuse gaskets. OIL CHARGE All units are factory charged with polyol ester (POE) oil to 7/8 sight glass. Acceptable oil level for each compressor is 3/4 to 7/8 full in the sight glass. Refer to installation instructions for oil quantity.

When additional oil or a complete charge is required it must meet the following specifications: Manufacturer: ICI Emkarate RL 32H Oil Type: Inhibited polyol ester-based synthetic compres-

sor lubricant ISO Viscosity Grade: 32

Do not reuse drained oil or any oil that has been exposed to the atmosphere. SYSTEM BURNOUT CLEANUP PROCEDURE Some compressor electrical failures can cause the motor to burn. When this occurs, byproducts such as sludge, carbon, and acids contaminate the system. Motor burnouts are classified as mild or severe. Test the oil for acidity using a POE oil acid test kit to deter- mine the severity of the burnout. In a mild burnout, there is little or no detectable odor. Compressor oil is clear or slightly discolored. An acid test of the oil will be negative. This type of failure is treated the same as a mechanical failure. The liquid line filter drier or core should be replaced. In a severe burnout, there is a strong, pungent, rotten egg odor. Compressor oil is very dark. Evidence of burning may be present in the tubing connected to the compressor. An acid test of the oil

IMPORTANT: When adjusting refrigerant charge, circulate fluid through cooler continuously to prevent freezing and pos- sible damage to the cooler. Do not overcharge, and never charge liquid into the low-pressure side of system.

DEVICE CUT-OUT CUT-IN High Pressure

Switch 641 10 psi

(4420 70 kPa) 493 29 psi

(3400 200 kPa)

IMPORTANT: Never open any switch or disconnect that deenergizes crankcase heaters unless unit is being serviced or is to be shut down for a prolonged period. After a prolonged shutdown or service, energize crankcase heaters for 24 hours before starting unit.

WARNING Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire resulting in per- sonal injury or death.

WARNING Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor currents when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the problems described below before installing and running a replacement compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves when handling re- frigerants. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire, re- sulting personal injury or death.

CAUTION Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the machine may result.

CAUTION

The compressor in a Puron system uses a polyol ester (POE) oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs wa- ter readily. POE oils can absorb 15 times as much water as oth- er oils designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all nec- essary precautions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmo- sphere.

60

will be positive. The following steps should be taken before re- starting any compressors in the circuit. 1. Isolate compressors and recover refrigerant from compressor

section. 2. Remove oil from all compressors in the circuit. An oil drain

fitting is provided on each compressor. Pressurize the low side of the compressor circuit with nitrogen. Less than 10 psig (68.9 kPa) should be adequate. This will help in the removal of the oil from the compressor sump. Dispose of contaminated oil as per local codes and regulations.

3. Replace failed compressor as outlined under compressor replacement procedure.

4. Recharge the circuit with fresh oil. The circuit oil charge information is supplied in the 30RB Installation Instructions. Oil level should be approximately 7/8 sight glass.

5. Install activated carbon (burnout) filter drier/core. 6. Leak check, evacuate and recharge refrigerant circuit. 7. Operate compressors. Check filter drier pressure drop period-

ically. Replace cores if pressure drop exceeds 4 psig (27.6 kPa).

Perform additional acid test after 24 hours of operation. Change liquid line filter drier/core if necessary. Replace with standard fil- ter drier/core once circuit is clean. Use the Carrier Standard Ser- vice Techniques Manual as a reference source.

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule The following are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite condi- tions may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more of- ten than recommended. Routine: For machines with e-coat condenser coils: Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and indus-

trial applications. Every month: Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary fol-

lowing recommended guidelines. Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refriger-

ant loss and presence of moisture. Every 3 months (for all machines): Check refrigerant charge. Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks,

repair as necessary. Check chilled water flow switch operation. Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary fol-

lowing recommended guidelines. Check sight glass moisture indicator for moisture. Check all condenser fans for proper operation. Check compressor oil level. Check crankcase heater operation. Inspect pump seal, if equipped with a hydronic pump

package.

Every 12 months (for all machines): Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary. Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary. Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than 2F

(1.2C) variance from calibrated thermometer. Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than

5 psi (34.47 kPa) variance. Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-

freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable. Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated. Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop,

replace as necessary. Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary. Check cooler heater operation, if equipped. Check pump heater operation, if equipped. Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are

securely fastened to the motor shaft. Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components.

Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Saturated Suction Temperature) which may indi- cate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if necessary.

TROUBLESHOOTING See Table 45 for an abbreviated list of symptoms, possible causes and possible remedies.

Alarms and Alerts The integral control system constantly monitors the unit and gen- erates warnings when abnormal or fault conditions occur. Alarms may cause either a circuit (Alert) or the whole machine (Alarm) to shutdown. Alarms and Alerts are assigned codes as described in Fig. 34. The alarm/alert indicator LED on the scrolling marquee or Navigator module is illuminated when any alarm or alert condi- tion is present. If an Alert is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will blink. If an Alarm is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will remain on. Currently active Alerts and Alarms can be found in Alarms ALRMALM1 to ALM5. The controller generates two types of alarms. Automatic reset alarms will reset without any intervention if the condition that caused the alarm corrects itself. Manual reset alarms require the service technician to check for the alarm cause and reset the alarm. The following method must be followed to reset manual alarms: Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press and sub- mode AlarmR.ALM (Reset All Current Alarms) is displayed. Press . The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying PASS and WORD. Press to display 1111. Press for each character. The default password is 0111. Use the arrow keys to change each individual character. Use the up or down arrow keys to toggle the display to YES and press

. The alarms will be reset. Indicator light will be turned off when switched correctly. Do not reset the chiller at random with- out first investigating and correcting the cause(s) of the failure. Each alarm is described by a three or four-digit code. The first one or two digits indicate the alarm source and are listed below. The last two digits pinpoint the problem. See Tables 46 and 47.

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

61

Table 45 Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE REMEDY Unit Does Not Run

Check for power to unit Check overcurrent protection device. Check non-fused disconnect (if equipped). Restore power to unit.

Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant. Wrong or incorrect unit configuration Check unit configuration.

Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow troubleshooting instructions. Check capacity control overrides.

Unit Operates Too Long or Continuously

Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant. Compressor or control contacts welded Replace contactor or relay. Air in chilled water loop Purge water loop. Non-condensables in refrigerant circuit. Remove refrigerant and recharge.

Inoperative EXV Check EXV, clean or replace. Check EXV cable, replace if necessary. Check EXV board for output signal.

Circuit Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Circuit Does Not Load Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Low saturated suction temperature See Operating Modes 21, 22 and 23.

High circuit suction superheat The circuit capacity is not allowed increase if circuit superheat is greater than 36F (20C). See Alarms P.08, P.09 and P.10 for potential causes.

Low suction superheat The circuit capacity is not allowed to increase if the circuit superheat is less than 5F (2.8C). See Alarms P.11, P.12 and P.13 for potential causes.

Compressor Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow troubleshooting instructions.

Inoperative compressor contactor Check control wiring. Check scroll protection module. Check contactor operation, replace if necessary.

Chilled Water Pump is ON, but the Machine is OFF Cooler freeze protection Chilled water loop temperature too low. Check cooler heater.

62

Table 46 Alarm Codes

PREFIX CODE

SUFFIX CODE DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL RESET TYPE PROBABLE CAUSE

A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4

.01 Compressor nn Motor Temperature Too High

Compressor Motor Sensor PTC resistance is greater than 4.5k

Circuit shut down or not allowed to start

Manual Compressor failure, wiring error, operation outside of limits, improper refrigerant charge

.02 Compressor nn Crankcase Heater Failure

Crankcase heater current not detected when required or detected when not required.

Compressor shut down or not allowed to start

Manual Wiring error, failed crankcase heater, failed SPM.

.03 Compressor nn High Pressure Switch

High Pressure Switch open.

Circuit shut down or not allowed to start

Manual

Wiring error, closed/ restricted discharge valve, improper refrigerant charge, dirty condenser coils, failed outdoor fan motor, discharge pressure transducer inaccuracy

.04 Compressor nn Motor Sensor PTC Out of Range

Compressor Motor Sensor PTC resistance is less than 50 or greater than 17k .

Circuit shut down or not allowed to start

Manual

Wiring error, operation outside of limits, compressor failure, improper refrigerant charge

.05 Compressor nn Power Reset 24-VAC power lost to SPM board.

Compressor shut down or not allowed to start

Automatic Low voltage from main power supply.

.06 Compressor nn Low Control Voltage Alert

24-VAC power to SPM board too low.

Compressor shut down or not allowed to start

Automatic Low voltage from main power supply.

Co

.A1 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board A1

No communication with SPM

Affected compressor is shut down

Automatic Wrong SPM address, wrong unit configuration, wiring error, power loss to SPM.

.A2 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board A2

.A3 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board A3

.A4 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board A4

.B1 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board B1

.B2 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board B2

.B3 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board B3

.B4 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board B4

.C1 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board C1

.C2 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board C2

.C3 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board C3

.C4 Loss of Communication with Compressor Board C4

.E1 Loss of Communication with EXV Board Number 1

No communication with EXV1

Circuit A & B shut down or not allowed to start

Automatic Wrong module address, wrong unit configuration, wiring error, power loss to module.E2 Loss of Communication with

EXV Board Number 2 No communication with EXV2

Circuit C shut down or not allowed to start

.F1 Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 1

No communication with Fan Board 1

Circuit A & B shut down or not allowed to start (060-150, 210-250) Circuit A shut down or not allowed to start (160-190, 275-300) Automatic

Wrong module address, wrong unit configuration, wiring error, power loss to module

.F2 Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 2

No communication with Fan Board 2

Circuit B shut down or not allowed to start (160-190, 275-300)

.F3 Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 3

No communication with Fan Board 3

Circuit C shut down or not allowed to start (210-300)

63

Co

.O1 Loss of Communication with Free Cooling Board

No communication with Free Cooling Board

None Automatic Configuration error. .O2 Loss of Communication with

Electrical Heaters Board No communication with Electrical Heaters Board

.O3 Loss of Communication with Energy Management Board

No communication with Energy Management Board

Disable or not allow EMM Functions (3-Step and 4-20 mA Demand Limit, 4-20 mA and Space Temperature Reset, Occupancy Override, and Ice Build)

Automatic Wrong module address, wrong unit configuration, wiring error, power loss to module

.O4 Loss of Communication with Heat Reclaim Board

No communication with Heat Reclaim Board

Unit shall return to the standard air cooled mode

Automatic Wrong module address, wrong unit configuration, wiring error, power loss to module

Ct

.01 Circuit A Welded Contactor Failure

Controls determine compressor is still running when circuit should be off

EXV, fan control, and pump operate as normal to save compressor until high pressure, freeze, or flow failure conditions occur

Manual One or more circuit compressor contactors welded closed.

.02 Circuit B Welded Contactor Failure

Controls determine compressor is still running when circuit should be off

EXV, fan control, and pump operate as normal to save compressor until high pressure, freeze, or flow failure conditions occur

Manual One or more circuit compressor contactors welded closed.

.03 Circuit C Welded Contactor Failure

Controls determine compressor is still running when circuit should be off

EXV, fan control, and pump operate as normal to save compressor until high pressure, freeze, or flow failure conditions occur

Manual One or more circuit compressor contactors welded closed.

FC .n0 Initial Factory Configuration

Required No configuration Unit not allowed to start Automatic

Configuration error. Password may default to 0113.

.nn Illegal Configuration Wrong or incompatible configuration data

Unit not allowed to start Automatic Configuration error.

MC .nn Master Chiller Configuration Error

Wrong or incompatible configuration data

Unit not allowed to start in Master- Slave Control

Automatic Configuration error. Refer to Table 49.

P

.01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection

Entering or Leaving Thermistor sensed a temperature at or below freeze point.

Unit shut down or not allowed to start. Chilled Water Pump will be started

Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours, Manual, if multiple alarms within 24 hours

Faulty thermistor, faulty wiring, low water flow rate, low loop volume, or freeze conditions.

.05 Circuit A Low Suction Temperature

Low Saturated Suction Temperatures sensed for a period of time.

Circuit shut down

Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours, Manual, if multiple alarms within 24 hours

Faulty transducer, faulty wiring, low water flow rate, low loop volume, fouled cooler, or freeze conditions.

.06 Circuit B Low Suction Temperature

.07 Circuit C Low Suction Temperature

.08 Circuit A High Superheat EXV>98%, Suction Superheat >54F (30.0C) and SST

Circuit shut down Manual

Faulty transducer, faulty thermistor, faulty wiring, faulty EXV, low refrigerant charge, plugged or restricted liquid line.

.09 Circuit B High Superheat

.10 Circuit C High Superheat

.11 Circuit A Low Superheat EXV 5% and Suction Superheat is less than the superheat setting by at least 5F (2.8C) or SST>Maximum Operating Pressure for more than 5 minutes

Circuit shut down

Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours, Manual, if multiple alarms within 24 hours

Faulty transducer, faulty thermistor, faulty wiring, faulty EXV, or incorrect configuration..12 Circuit B Low Superheat

.13 Circuit C Low Superheat

Table 46 Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX CODE

SUFFIX CODE DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL RESET TYPE PROBABLE CAUSE

64

P

.14 Cooler Interlock Failure

Cooler Pump Interlock circuit opens (consists of chilled water flow system and chilled water pump interlock)

Unit shut down or not allowed to start

Automatic if stage=0, Manual if stage>0.

Low Water Flow, faulty wiring or contacts, faulty water flow switch, or chilled water pump problem. Remote lockout if unit is equipped with an EMM.

.15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure None Manual Configuration error.

.16 Compressor A1 Not Started or Pressure not Established

Compressor differential (Discharge-Suction) did not increase by 10 psig (69 kPa) in 2 minutes

Circuit shut down Manual

No power to the compressor, faulty compressor contactor, low control voltage, faulty discharge or suction pressure transducers, wiring error, improper electrical phasing.

.17 Compressor A2 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.18 Compressor A3 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.19 Compressor A4 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.20 Compressor B1 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.21 Compressor B2 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.22 Compressor B3 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.23 Compressor B4 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.24 Compressor C1 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.25 Compressor C2 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.26 Compressor C3 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.27 Compressor C4 Not Started or Pressure not Established

.28 Electrical Box Thermostat Failure

Improper phasing detected by the reverse rotation board

Unit not allowed to start Automatic

Check power phasing, improper wiring, or faulty detection board.

.29 Loss of Communication with System Manager

Loss of communication with an external control device for more than 2 minutes

Unit changes to stand alone operation

Automatic Faulty communication wiring, no power supply to the external controller.

.30 Master/Slave Communication Failure

Communication between the master and slave machines has been lost.

Units operate as stand alone machines

Automatic Faulty communication wiring, no power or control power to the main base board to either module.

.31 Unit is in Emergency Stop Emergency Stop command has been received.

Unit shuts down or not allowed to start.

Automatic Carrier Comfort Network Emergency Stop Command received.

.32 Cooler Pump 1 Fault Pump Interlock status does not match pump status.

Unit shuts down. If available, another pump will start.

Manual Faulty contacts, wiring error, or low control voltage..33 Cooler Pump 2 Fault

.34 Circuit A Reclaim Operation Failure

Circuit A Reclaim Operation Failure Reclaim operation

failure due to high SCT

The affected circuit shall return to air cooled mode

Manual .35 Circuit B Reclaim Operation

Failure Circuit B Reclaim Operation Failure

.37 Circuit A Repeated High Discharge Gas Overrides Multiple capacity

overrides due to high saturated discharge temperatures

Circuit shut down Automatic

Condenser air recirculation, dirty or plugged condenser coils, inaccurate discharge transducer, faulty condenser fan,

.38 Circuit B Repeated High Discharge Gas Overrides

.39 Circuit C Repeated High Discharge Gas Overrides

.40 Circuit A Repeated Low Suction Temperature Overrides

Multiple capacity overrides due to low saturated suction temperatures

Circuit shut down Manual

Low water flow, low loop volume, fouled cooler, low refrigerant charge, unit not configured for brine with glycol in cooler.

.41 Circuit B Repeated Low Suction Temperature Overrides

.42 Circuit C Repeated Low Suction Temperature Overrides

.97 Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped

Control detects EWT below LWT for 1 minute Unit shuts down Manual Wiring error. EWT and

LWT sensors swapped.

Table 46 Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX CODE

SUFFIX CODE DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL RESET TYPE PROBABLE CAUSE

65

LEGEND

Pr

.01 Circuit A Discharge Transducer

Measured voltage is 0 vdc

Circuit shut down or not allowed to start.

Automatic

Faulty transducer, wiring error, failed Main Base Board or Fan Board 3. Compressor circuit breaker tripped.

.02 Circuit B Discharge Transducer

.03 Circuit C Discharge Transducer

.04 Circuit A Suction Transducer

.05 Circuit B Suction Transducer

.06 Circuit C Suction Transducer

.07 Circuit A Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer The affected circuit

shall return to air cooled mode

Automatic Faulty transducer, wiring error, failed EMM HR board..08 Circuit B Reclaim Pumpdown

Pressure Transducer

Sr .nn Service Maintenance Alert Field programmed elapsed time has expired for maintenance item

None Manual Maintenance required (see Table 50).

th

.01 Water Exchanger Entering Fluid Thermistor Failure

Temperature measured by the controller is less than 40F (40C) or greater than 240F (115.6C)

Unit will be shut down or not allowed to start.

Automatic Faulty thermistor, wiring error, failed Main Base Board..02 Water Exchanger Leaving Fluid

Thermistor Failure

.03 Circuit A Defrost Thermistor Failure

None Automatic Configuration error. .04 Circuit B Defrost Thermistor

Failure

.08 Reclaim Condenser Entering Thermistor

Unit shall return to the standard air cooled mode. Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring error, failed EMM HR board..09 Reclaim Condenser Leaving

Thermistor None

.10 OAT Thermistor Failure

Unit is shut down or not allowed to start. Cooler/Pump heaters are energized

Automatic Faulty thermistor, wiring error, failed Main Base Board.

.11 Master/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor

Dual Chiller deactivated. Master and Slave machines operate in stand alone mode

.12 Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor

Temperature measured by the controller is less than 40F (40C) or greater than 240F (115.6C)

Circuit shut down

Automatic Faulty thermistor, wiring error, failed Main Base Board or EXV Board

.13 Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor Circuit shut down

.14 Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor Circuit shut down

.18 Circuit A Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor Unit shall return to

the standard air cooled mode.

Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring error, failed EMM HR board..19 Circuit B Condenser Subcooling

Liquid Thermistor

.21 Space Temperature Sensor Failure

Temperature Reset based on Space Temperature disabled

Faulty thermistor, wiring error, failed Main Base Board.

V0 xx Circuit A Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure See Table 47 Variable

Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details on page 66 Danfoss drive only.

AlertNo action AlarmCircuit is stopped

Automatic See Table 47 Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details on page 66.

V1 xx Circuit B Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

V2 xx Circuit C Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

Table 46 Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX CODE

SUFFIX CODE DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL RESET TYPE PROBABLE CAUSE

EMM Energy Management Module OAT Outdoor Air Temperature EWT Entering Water Temperature PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient EXV Electronic Expansion Valve SCT Saturated Condensing Temperature HR Heat Reclaim SPM Scroll Protection Module LWT Leaving Water Temperature SST Saturated Suction Temperature MOP Maximum Operating Pressure

66

Table 47 Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details, Danfoss Drive

NOTES: 1. (X) = Dependent on parameter 2. Trip lock condition is an alarm for a condition that could cause

damage to the drive. The alarm can only be reset by cycling power to the drive.

3. If a warning and an alarm are marked against a code in the table, this means that either a warning occurs before the alarm, or it can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be dis- played for a given fault.

4. Alarms are shown on the drive in parameters 16-90 through 16-95. Parameters can only be accessed with drive display service tool.

NO. DESCRIPTION WARNING ALARM/ TRIP

ALARM/ TRIP LOCK

PARAMETER REFERENCE

1 10 Volts low X 2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01 3 No motor (X) 1-80 4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12 5 DC link voltage high X 6 DC link voltage low X 7 DC over voltage X X 8 DC under voltage X X 9 Inverter overloaded X X 10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90 11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) 1-90 12 Torque limit X X 13 Over current X X X 14 Earth fault X X X 15 Hardware mismatch X X 16 Short circuit X X 17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04 18 Start failed X 23 Internal fan fault X 24 External fan fault X 14-53 25 Brake resistor short-circuited X 26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13 27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X 28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15 29 Drive over temperature X X X 30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 33 Inrush fault X X 34 Field bus communication fault X X 35 Out of frequency range X X 36 Mains failure X X 37 Phase imbalance X X 38 Internal fault X X 39 Heatsink sensor X X 40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-00, 5-01 41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-00, 5-02 42 Overload of Digital Output Terminal On X30/6 (X) 5-32 42 Overload of Digital Output Terminal On X30/7 (X) 5-33 46 Power card supply X X 47 24 V supply low X X X 48 1.8 V supply low X X 49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86 50 AMA calibration failed X 51 AMA check Unom and Inom X 52 AMA low Inom X 53 AMA motor too big X 54 AMA motor too small X 55 AMA parameter out of range X 56 AMA interrupted by user X 57 AMA timeout X 58 AMA internal fault X X 59 Current limit X 60 External Interlock X

67

Table 47 Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details, Danfoss Drive (cont)

NOTES: 1. (X) = Dependent on parameter 2. Trip lock condition is an alarm for a condition that could cause

damage to the drive. The alarm can only be reset by cycling power to the drive.

3. If a warning and an alarm are marked against a code in the table, this means that either a warning occurs before the alarm, or it can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be dis- played for a given fault.

4. Alarms are shown on the drive in parameters 16-90 through 16-95. Parameters can only be accessed with drive display service tool.

NO. DESCRIPTION WARNING ALARM/ TRIP

ALARM/ TRIP LOCK

PARAMETER REFERENCE

62 Output frequency at maximum limit X 64 Voltage limit X 65 Control board over-temperature X X X 66 Heat sink temperature low X 67 Option configuration has changed X 69 Power card temperature X X 70 Illegal FC configuration X 71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X 72 Dangerous failure X 73 Safe stop auto restart 76 Power unit setup X 79 Illegal PS configuration X X 80 Drive initialized to default value X 91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X 92 NoFlow X X 22-2 93 Dry pump X X 22-2 94 End of curve X X 22-5 95 Broken belt X X 22-6 96 Start delayed X 22-7 97 Stop delayed X 22-7 98 Clock fault X 0-7 201 Fire M was active 202 Fire M limits exceeded 203 Missing motor 204 Locked rotor 243 Brake IGBT X X 244 Heatsink temperature X X X 245 Heatsink sensor X X 246 Power card supply X X 247 Power card temperature X X 248 Illegal PS configuration X X

68

Fig. 34 Alarm Description

DIAGNOSTIC ALARM CODES AND POSSIBLE CAUSES Motor Temperature Too High A1.01 Compressor A1 A2.01 Compressor A2 A3.01 Compressor A3 A4.01 Compressor A4 B1.01 Compressor B1 B2.01 Compressor B2 B3.01 Compressor B3 B4.01 Compressor B4 C1.01 Compressor C1 C2.01 Compressor C2 C3.01 Compressor C3 C4.01 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is checked whether the compressor is ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the scroll protection module (SPM) detects a compressor motor PTC (positive temperature co- efficient) resistance greater than 4500 ohms, indicating that the motor temperature is too high. Action to be Taken The circuit shuts down immediately or is not allowed to start. Reset Method Manual. PTC resistance must be less than 2500 ohms Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check for a PTC thermistor failure. Check for a compressor motor failure. Check for a wiring error. Check wiring terminations for corrosion. Check for operation outside of the limits. Check for condenser air recirculation. Check the circuit for proper charge. Check the EXV for proper operation.

Check the EXV input devices, pressure transducer and temperature for accuracy.

Check the liquid line filter drier for a restriction. Crankcase Heater Failure A1.02 Compressor A1 A2.02 Compressor A2 A3.02 Compressor A3 A4.02 Compressor A4 B1.02 Compressor B1 B2.02 Compressor B2 B3.02 Compressor B3 B4.02 Compressor B4 C1.02 Compressor C1 C2.02 Compressor C2 C3.02 Compressor C3 C4.02 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criteria are checked whether the compressor is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors crankcase heater current draw. This family of alarms is generated if one of the following criteria is detected: 1. The SPM fails to detect a crankcase current draw of at least

0.5 amp while the crankcase heater is ON. 2. The SPM detects a crankcase current draw of at least 0.5 amp

while the crankcase heater is OFF. The current is sensed inter- nally on the SPM.

Action to be Taken If a fault is detected, the affected compressor will be shut down or not allowed to start. Reset Method Manual Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the wiring to the crankcase heater. Check the crankcase heater for operation. Check the SPM crankcase heater output operation. Confirm unit configuration.

High Pressure Switch A1.03 Compressor A1 A2.03 Compressor A2 A3.03 Compressor A3 A4.03 Compressor A4 B1.03 Compressor B1 B2.03 Compressor B2 B3.03 Compressor B3 B4.03 Compressor B4 C1.03 Compressor C1 C2.03 Compressor C2 C3.03 Compressor C3 C4.03 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is checked whether the circuit is ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the circuit high-pressure switch (HPS) opens. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the HPS. The 30RB units employ one HPS for each circuit. The HPS signal is connected to all of the SPM modules of the circuit. Action to be Taken The circuit shuts down immediately or is not allowed to start. Reset Method Manual

Alarm Descriptor th

Alarm Suffix Code Number to identify source

.01 Alarm Prefix

A1 Compressor A1 Failure A2 Compressor A2 Failure A3 Compressor A3 Failure A4 Compressor A4 Failure B1 Compressor B1 Failure B2 Compressor B2 Failure B3 Compressor B3 Failure B4 Compressor B4 Failure C1 Compressor C1 Failure C2 Compressor C2 Failure C3 Compressor C3 Failure C4 Compressor C4 Failure Co Communication Failure Ct Circuit Welded Contactor Failure FC Factory Configuration Error MC Master Chiller Configuration Error P Process Failure Pr Pressure Transducer Failure Sr Service Notification th Thermistor Failure V0 Circuit A Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure V1 Circuit B Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure V2 Circuit C Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

Alarm

69

Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the wiring of the high pressure switch circuit. Be sure

the HPS is connected to all of the SPM boards in the circuit. Check the maximum condensing temperature (MCT) for

the proper setting. Check for non-condensables in the refrigerant circuit. Check for condenser air re-circulation. Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged). Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine. Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction. Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation

and operation. Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open. A

closed or restricted valve is a potential high pressure trip. Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy. Confirm unit configuration.

Motor Sensor PTC Out of Range A1.04 Compressor A1 A2.04 Compressor A2 A3.04 Compressor A3 A4.04 Compressor A4 B1.04 Compressor B1 B2.04 Compressor B2 B3.04 Compressor B3 B4.04 Compressor B4 C1.04 Compressor C1 C2.04 Compressor C2 C3.04 Compressor C3 C4.04 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is checked whether the circuit is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the compressor mo- tor temperature. This alarm will be generated if the motor sensor PTC in the compressor resistance is less than 50 ohms or greater than 17,000 ohms. Action to be Taken The circuit shuts down immediately or not allowed to start. Reset Method Manual Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the scroll compressor protec-

tion module (SPM). Check for a faulty SPM. Check for a compressor failure. Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit. Check for condenser air re-circulation. Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged). Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine. Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction. Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation

and operation. Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open. Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy. Confirm unit configuration.

SPM Board Power Reset A1.05 Compressor A1 A2.05 Compressor A2 A3.05 Compressor A3 A4.05 Compressor A4 B1.05 Compressor B1 B2.05 Compressor B2 B3.05 Compressor B3 B4.05 Compressor B4 C1.05 Compressor C1 C2.05 Compressor C2 C3.05 Compressor C3 C4.05 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is checked whether the compressor is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the 24 vac at the compressor through the high pressure switch input channel. This alarm will be generated if the main base board receives a sig- nal from the SPM board indicating that the compressor went through a power cycle. Action to be Taken The compressor is shut down immediately or not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the voltage from the main three phase power supply. Check the 24 vac wiring connections to the scroll com-

pressor protection module (SPM). Check for a faulty SPM.

SPM Board Low Control Voltage Alert A1.06 Compressor A1 A2.06 Compressor A2 A3.06 Compressor A3 A4.06 Compressor A4 B1.06 Compressor B1 B2.06 Compressor B2 B3.06 Compressor B3 B4.06 Compressor B4 C1.06 Compressor C1 C2.06 Compressor C2 C3.06 Compressor C3 C4.06 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is checked whether the compressor is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM) monitors the 24 vac at the compressor through the high pressure switch input channel. This alarm will be generated if the main base board receives a sig- nal from the SPM board indicating that the 24 vac level was lower than the allowed minimum threshold. Action to be Taken The compressor is shut down immediately or not allowed to start as to prevent any contactor chattering/welding from occurring. Reset Method Automatic Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the voltage from the main three phase power supply. Check the 24 vac wiring connections to the scroll com-

pressor protection module (SPM). Check for a faulty SPM.

70

Loss of Communication with Compressor Co.A1 Board A1 Co.A2 Board A2 Co.A3 Board A3 Co.A4 Board A4 Co.B1 Board B1 Co.B2 Board B2 Co.B3 Board B3 Co.B4 Board B4 Co.C1 Board C1 Co.C2 Board C2 Co.C3 Board C3 Co.C4 Board C4 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If communication with the scroll compressor protection module (SPM) is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be generated. Action to be Taken The affected compressor will be shut down. Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the compressor, if called for will start normally. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to the affected SPM. Check the address of the SPM to be sure that it is correct. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly. Confirm unit configuration.

Co.E1 Loss of Communication with EXV Board Number 1 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If communication with EXV1 is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken If running, Circuit A and B will shut down normally. If Circuit A or Circuit B is not operating, it will not be allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start normally. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to EXV1. Check the address of the EXV1 to be sure that it is correct. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly. Confirm unit configuration.

Co.E2 Loss of Communication with EXV Board Number 2 Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF, on 30RB210-300 units only. Action to be Taken If communication with EXV Board 2 is lost for a period of 10 sec- onds, the alarm will be triggered. If running, Circuit C will shut down normally. If Circuit C is not running, it will not be allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to EXV Board 2. Check the address of the EXV Board 2 to be sure that it is

correct. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be sure

that it is connected properly. Confirm unit configuration.

Co.F1 Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 1 Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If communi- cation with Fan Board 1 is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken For 30RB060-150 and 30RB210-250, Circuit A and B will shut down normally if they are running. For 30RB160-190 and 30RB275-300, Circuit A will shut down normally if it is running. If the circuit or circuits controlled by the board are not running, then they will not be allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start normally. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to Fan Board 1. Check the address of the Fan Board 1 to be sure that it is

correct. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly. Confirm unit configuration.

Co.F2 Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 2 Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and on 30RB160-190, 275, and 300 only. Action to be Taken If communication with Fan Board 2 is lost for a period of 10 sec- onds, the alarm will be triggered. If running, Circuit B will shut down normally for 30RB160-190, 275 and 300. If Circuit B is not running for 30RB160-190, 275 and 300, then it will not be al- lowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start nor- mally. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to Fan Board 2. Check the address of the Fan Board 2 to be sure that it is

correct. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly. Confirm unit configuration.

Co.F3 Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 3 Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF, and on 30RB210-300 machines only. If communication with Fan Board 3 is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken If running, Circuit C will shut down normally for 30RB210-300. If the circuit is not running for 30RB210-300, then it will not be allowed to start.

71

Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start nor- mally. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to Fan Board 3. Check the address of the Fan Board 3 to be sure that it is

correct. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly. Confirm unit configuration.

Co.O1 Loss of Communication with Free Cooling Board Criteria for Trip This alarm is for a free cooling machine only. This feature is not supported for a cooling only machine. Action to be Taken None Reset Method Automatic Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm unit configuration. Co.O2 Loss of Communication with Electrical Heaters Board Criteria for Trip This alarm is for a heat pump machines only. This feature is not supported for a cooling only machine. Action to be Taken None Reset Method Automatic Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm unit configuration. Co.O3 Loss of Communication with Energy Management Board Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and when a function that requires the energy management module (EMM) is configured. If communication with the EMM is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken If any function controlled by the EMM (3-Step and 4-20 mA De- mand Limit, 4-20 mA and Space Temperature Reset, Occupancy Override, and Ice Build) is active, that function will be terminated. If an EMM function is programmed, and communication is lost, the function will not be allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, if communication is established, the functions will be enabled. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check configuration to see if the EMM is installed, (Con-

figurationUNITEMM). If (EMM=YES), check for a control option that requires the EMM that may be enabled. Correct configuration if not correct.

Check the power supply to EMM. Check the address of the EMM to be sure that it is correct.

Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be sure that it is connected properly.

Check unit configuration to be sure that no options that re- quire the EMM are enabled.

Co.O4 Loss of Communication with Heat Reclaim Board Criteria for Trip This alarm is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and when the unit is configured for Heat Reclaim. If communication with the heat reclaim board is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken The unit will return to the air cooled mode. Reset Method Automatic, when communication is established, the functions will be enabled. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power supply to heat reclaim board. Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly. Check unit configuration to be sure that Heat Reclaim is en-

abled and unit does NOT contain the Heat Reclaim option. Welded Contactor Failure Ct.01 Circuit A Ct.02 Circuit B Ct.03 Circuit C Criteria For Trip This alarm is tested for when the circuit is off (all compressors switched to off). The algorithm will evaluate saturated suction and saturated condensing temperatures to determine if the compressor is still running even though it has been commanded off. Action to be Taken 1. Unit capacity will go to and remain at 0%. The EXV, fan con-

trol, and cooler pump will continue their normal operation. 2. If a high pressure, cooler flow, or cooler freeze failure occurs,

then circuit operation is disabled. The critical alarm relay will be energized in order to shut off the main power supply.

Reset Method Reset is manual. FC.n0 Initial Factory Configuration Required Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The alarm will be generated if Configuration UNITTONS=0. Action to be Taken The unit is not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic after factory configuration is complete. The configura- tion must be manually completed. The password may default to 0113. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm the unit configuration. FC.nn Illegal Configuration Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The alarm will be generated if the one of the following configuration errors is detected by the control. The nn refers to the error code listed in Table 48.

72

Table 48 Illegal Configuration Alarm Code

Action to be Taken The unit is not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic after factory reconfiguration is completed. A power cy- cle may be required. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm the unit configuration. MC.nn Master Chiller Configuration Error Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The units must be configured as a Master and Slave machine (Configura- tionRSETMSSL=1 and ConfigurationRSETMS- SL=2), and one of the following configuration errors has been found. The nn refers to the error code listed in Table 49. Action to be Taken Unit not allowed to start in Master Slave control. Reset Method Automatic Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm proper configuration. P.01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection Criteria for Trip The alarm criteria are checked whether the unit is ON or OFF. If the entering or leaving water thermistor senses a temperature at the freeze point or less, the alarm will be generated. For a fresh water system (Configuration SERVFLUD=1), the freeze point is 34F (1.1C). For medium temperature brine systems (Configuration SERVFLUD=2), the freeze point is Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP). Action to be Taken Unit shut down or not allowed to start. Chilled water pump will be started. Reset Method Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours if LWT rises to 6F (3C) above set point. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the entering and leaving fluid thermistors for accuracy. Check the water flow rate.

Check loop volume. Low loop volume at nominal flow rates can in extreme cases bypass cold water to the cooler.

Check for freezing conditions. Check heater tape and other freeze protection items for

proper operation. Check glycol concentration and adjust LOSP accordingly. If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40F (4.4C) and

there is glycol in the loop, consider using the Medium Temperature Brine option (Configuration SERVFLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point in- stead of 34F (1.1C).

Low Suction Temperature P.05 Circuit A P.06 Circuit B P.07 Circuit C Criteria for Trip The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON. This alarm is gen- erated if one of the following criteria is met: If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below 13F

(25C) for more than 30 seconds. If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below 22F

(30C) for more than 8 seconds. If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below 40F

(40C) for more than 3 seconds. Action to be Taken The circuit is shut down immediately.Prior to the alarm trip, the control will take action to avoid the alarm. See Operating Modes 21, 22 and 23 on page 47. Reset Method Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to Main Base Board (P.05 and

P.06) or Fan Board 3 (P.07). Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty transducer. Check cooler water flow. Check loop volume. Check EXV operation. Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier,

service valve, etc. Check the refrigerant charge. If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40F (4.4C) and

there is glycol in the loop, consider using the Medium Temperature Brine option (Configuration SERVFLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point instead of 34F (1.1C).

FC ERROR CODE

DESCRIPTION

01 Unit size is unknown. 02 Reclaim option selected for Heat Pump machine.

03 Hot Gas Bypass configured for a Heat Pump machine.

04 Number of Fans controlled by Motormaster control is greater than expected.

73

Table 49 Master/Slave Alarm Code

LEGEND

High Superheat P.08 Circuit A P.09 Circuit B P.10 Circuit C Criteria for Trip The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON. This alarm is gen- erated if all of the following criteria are met: 1. The EXV position is equal to or greater than 98%. 2. The circuits Suction Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature

Saturated Suction Temperature) is greater than 54F (30.0C).

3. The circuits Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Max- imum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (Configura- tionSERVMOP) for more than 5 minutes.

Action to be Taken The circuit is shut down normally. Reset Method Manual. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the suction pressure transducer wiring to Main Base

Board (P.08 and P.09) or Fan Board 3 (P.10). Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty transducer. Check the suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1

(P.08 and P.09) or to EXV Board 2 (P.10) Check the suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy. Check for EXV Board 1 (P.08 and P.09) or EXV Board 2

(P.10) faulty channel. Check EXV operation. Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier,

service valve, etc. Check the refrigerant charge.

Low Superheat P.11 Circuit A P.12 Circuit B P.13 Circuit C

Criteria for Trip The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON. This alarm is gen- erated if the following criterion is met: The EXV position is equal to or less than 5% and the circuits Suc- tion Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature Saturated Suction Temperature) is less than the Suction Superheat Set Point (Config- urationSERVSHP.A, Configuration SERVSHP.B, or ConfigurationSERVSHP.C) by at least 5F (2.8C) or the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is greater than Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (ConfigurationSERV MOP) for more than 5 minutes. Action to be Taken The circuit is shut down normally. Reset Method Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the suction pressure transducer wiring to Main Base

Board (P.11 and P.12) or Fan Board 3 (P.13). Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty transducer. Check the suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1

(P.08 and P.09) or to EXV Board 2 (P.10) Check the suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy. Check for EXV Board 1 (P.11 and P.12) or EXV Board 2

(P.13) faulty channel. Check EXV operation. Confirm Maximum Operating Pressure Set Point. Check the refrigerant charge.

P.14 Cooler Interlock Failure Criteria for Trip The criteria are tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. This algo- rithm monitors the cooler flow switch circuit, which may include field-installed cooler pump interlock (PMPI) contacts. The pump interlock and flow switch are wired in series, therefore either de- vice can cause a cooler interlock failure.

MC ERROR CODE

MASTER SLAVE DESCRIPTION

01 X X The master or slave water pump is not configured while the control of the lag unit pump is required (lag_pump = 1)

02 X Master and slave units have the same network address. 03 X There is no slave configured at the slave address 04 X Slave pump_seq incorrect configuration

05 X There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for EWT control while the slave is configured for LWT control.

06 X There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for LWT control while the slave is configured for EWT control.

07 X There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is configured for lag pump control while the slave is not configured for lag pump control.

08 X There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is not configured for lag pump control while the slave is configured for lag pump control.

09 X X The slave chiller is in local or remote control (chilstat = 3) 10 X X The slave chiller is down due to fault (chilstat = 5) 11 X The master chiller operating type is not Master: master_oper_typ and master_status = off 12 X X No communication with slave. 13 X Master and slave heat/cool status are not the same.

EWT Entering Water Temperature LWT Leaving Water Temperature

74

This alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is met: 1. The circuit (flow switch and optional pump interlock installed

at TB5-1 and 2) fails to close within the OFF to ON delay (ConfigurationOPTNDELY).

2. If the unit is the lag chiller under Master/Slave Control and the circuit fails to close within 1 minute after its pump is com- manded ON.

3. The circuit opens while the machine is ON. 4. If the remote interlock switch is CLOSED while the

machine is ON (units with EMM only). 5. If the machine is configured for Cooler Pump Control and the

circuit does not open within 2 minutes. 6. The circuit fails to close within the OFF to ON delay

when the cooler pump has been commanded ON for freeze protection.

Action to be Taken The unit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, if the alarm occurs while the machine is at Stage 0 (no compressors ON). Manual reset if machine was at Stage 1 or greater. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the chilled water flow switch operation. Check for water flow. Be sure all water isolation valves are

open. Check the water strainer for a restriction. Check the interlock wiring circuit. Check for a power supply to the pump. Check for a control signal to the pump controller. Check the chilled water pump operation. Check the cooler pump contactor for proper operation.

P.15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure Criteria for Trip Condenser flow switch has not closed within 1 minute after con- denser pump output has energized or opens during normal opera- tion. This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only. Action to be Taken The unit will return to the air cooled mode. Reset Method Manual. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the condenser water flow switch operation. Check for low water flow. Be sure all water isolation

valves are open. Check for plugged water strainer. Check the interlock wiring circuit. Check the power supply to the pump. Check for a control signal to the pump starter. Check the condenser water pump operation. Check the condenser pump contactor for proper operation.

Compressor Not Started or Pressure Not Established P.16 Compressor A1 P.17 Compressor A2 P.18 Compressor A3 P.19 Compressor A4 P.20 Compressor B1 P.21 Compressor B2 P.22 Compressor B3 P.23 Compressor B4

P.24 Compressor C1 P.25 Compressor C2 P.26 Compressor C3 P.27 Compressor C4 Criteria for Trip The criteria are tested whether the unit is ON or in Service Test. This algorithm monitors the pressure differential across the com- pressor to prove proper rotation of the compressor. During normal operation with the start of a compressor, the dis- charge pressure for the circuit or the compressor differential (Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure) must increase 10 psig (69 kPa) after 2 minutes. If this criterion is not met, the alarm is generated. Action to be Taken The circuit is shut down immediately. Reset Method Manual Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check for power to the compressor. Check control voltage to the compressor contactor. On 208-

volt systems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is utilized. Check for proper electrical phasing of the unit power sup-

ply. Check the compressor contactor operation. Check the discharge and suction pressure transducers for

accuracy. Check the wiring and location of the discharge and suction

pressure transducers. P.28 Electrical Box Thermostat Failure/Reverse Rotation Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON. This alarm is gener- ated if the signal is open. Action to be Taken The unit is not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, once the phasing is corrected. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the power wiring for proper phasing. Check sensor wiring to reverse rotation protection board.

P.29 Loss of Communication with System Manager Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the System Manager had established communica- tions with the machine and is lost for more than 2 minutes. Action to be Taken The action to be taken by the control depends on the configura- tion. If Auto Start when SM lost is enabled, (Configura- tionSERVAU.SM=YES), then the unit will force the CCN Chiller Start Stop (Run Status R.CCNCH.SS) to ENBL and clear all forced points from the System Manager. The unit will re- vert to stand-alone operation. Reset Method Automatic, once communication is re-established. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check communication wiring. Check the power supply to the System Manager and unit

controls.

75

P.30 Master/Slave Communication Failure Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the units are ON or OFF and a Master and Slave machine has been configured (Configuration RSETMSSL=1 and ConfigurationRSETMSSL=2). If communication is lost for more than 3 minutes, this alarm is generated. Action to be Taken Dual chiller control will be disabled and each unit will operate in Stand-Alone mode. Reset Method Automatic, once communication is re-established. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the CCN wiring. Check for control power to each Main Base Board, Master

and Slave. Confirm correct configuration.

P.31 Unit is in Emergency Stop Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the units are ON or OFF and the machine receives a Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) command for an Emergency Stop. Action to be Taken Unit will stop, or not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, once a return to normal command is received. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check for CCN Emergency Stop command. Cooler Pump Fault P.32 Pump 1 Fault P.33 Pump 2 Fault Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the units are ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the cooler pump interlock opens. When starting the pump, the control must read a closed circuit for 3 con- secutive reads. If the pump is operating and the circuit opens, the alarm will be generated immediately. Action to be Taken The pump and machine will be shut down. If there is another pump available, the control will start that pump, restart the ma- chine and clear the alarm. If no other pump is available, the unit will remain OFF. Reset Method Manual. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the interlock wiring circuit. Check for a control signal to the pump controller. Check the cooler pump contactor for proper operation. Check control voltage for proper voltage. On 208-volt sys-

tems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is utilized. Reclaim Operation Failure P.34 Circuit A P.35 Circuit B Criteria for Trip Reclaim operation failure due to high SCT. This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only.

Action to be Taken The affected circuit will return to air cooled mode. Reset Method Manual. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check for low water flow. Be sure all water isolation

valves are open. Check for plugged water strainer. Check for fouled tubes in reclaim condenser.

Repeated High Discharge Gas Overrides P.37 Circuit A P.38 Circuit B P.39 Circuit C Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested when the circuit is ON. This alarm will be tripped if the circuit capacity is reduced more than 8 times in 30 minutes due to high discharge gas temperatures. If no override oc- curs in a 30-minute period, the counter is reset. Action to be Taken The affected circuit will be shut down. Reset Method Automatic, after 30 minutes. If the alarm is cleared via the Manual method, the counter will be reset to zero. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the maximum condensing temperature (MCT) for

the proper setting. Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit. Check for condenser air re-circulation. Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged). Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine. Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction. Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation

and operation. Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open.

Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy. Confirm unit configuration.

Repeated Low Suction Temperature Overrides P.40 Circuit A P.41 Circuit B P.42 Circuit C Criteria for Trip This alarm was added in software version 1.09. The criterion is ac- tive when circuit is ON. If the circuits capacity is reduced more than 6 times by the Capacity Override 23 (Circuit A), 24 (Circuit B), or 25 (Circuit C) for the respective circuit, without at least 30 minutes elapsing between the capacity reductions, the alarm is triggered. If at least 30 minutes elapse without a reduction in ca- pacity, the counter is reset to zero. Action to be Taken Circuit shut down. Reset Method Manual. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Confirm unit configuration. Check EXV operation. Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, service valve

partially closed, filter drier with excessive pressure drop.

76

Check the refrigerant charge. Check suction pressure transducer accuracy. Check return gas thermistor accuracy. Check Circuit Superheat Set Point (Configuration

SERVSHP.A, SHP.B, or SHP.C). Check if system contains antifreeze (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2). Check Brine Freeze Set Point (Configuration

SERVLOSP) if an antifreeze solution is used. Check fluid flow rate. Check strainer for a restriction, clean if necessary. Check for cooler fouling. Check compressor oil level. If oil level is above the top of

the sightglass, then oil may be logging in the cooler. Ad- just oil level in compressor(s).

P.97 Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped Criteria for Trip The alarm criterion is checked when the chiller is ON and one or more compressors is running. This alarm will be tripped if the en- tering water temperature is less than the leaving water temperature for more than 1 minute. Action to be Taken The chiller is shut down immediately. Reset Method Manual Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check LWT and EWT wiring at main base board (connec-

tor J6, channels 1,2). Check for a faulty entering or leaving water temperature

sensor. Check cooler nozzles for proper water temperature sensor

locations. Discharge Transducer Failure Pr.01 Circuit A Pr.02 Circuit B Pr.03 Circuit C Criteria for Trip The criterion is tested whether the circuit is ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the MBB or FB3 is 0 vdc. Action to be Taken The circuit is shut down normally, or not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, once the transducer voltage is greater than 0 vdc. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to main base board (Pr.01 and

Pr.02). Check the sensor wiring to Fan Board 3 (Pr.03). Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty transducer. Confirm unit configuration.

Suction Transducer Failure Pr.04 Circuit A Pr.05 Circuit B Pr.06 Circuit C

Criteria for Trip The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON or OFF. The alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is met: 1. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the MBB

or FB3 is 0 vdc. 2. The circuit is ON in cooling mode and the saturated suction

temperature for the circuit is greater than the referenced cooler leaving temperature (RCLT) for more than 60 seconds. RCLT = EWT (EWT LWT) * circuit running tons / total tons

Action to be Taken The circuit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic when the suction pressure reading is within the range except if it was tripped by criteria 2. The reset will be manual if the alarm trips 3 times within a 24-hour period or if it has been tripped by criteria 2. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check for power to the compressor (i.e., circuit breaker,

contactor operation). Check the sensor wiring to main base board (Pr.04 and

Pr.05). Check the sensor wiring to Fan Board 3 (Pr.06). Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty transducer. Check for a faulty leaving water temperature sensor. Confirm unit configuration. Check EWT sensor.

Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pr.07 Circuit A Pr.08 Circuit B Criteria for Trip Tested when the unit is On or Off. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the heat reclaim board is 0 vdc. This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only. Action to be Taken The circuit will initiate a reclaim to air cooled changeover and stay in air cooled mode if it had been operating in reclaim mode. Reset Method Automatic when the transducer reading returns to normal. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to heat reclaim board. Check for a faulty transducer. Check the board for a faulty channel. Confirm unit configuration.

Sr.nn Service Maintenance Alert Criteria for Trip This alert is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and the Servic- ing Alert decisions listed under Time ClockMCFG have been enabled. The alarm will be generated if the one of the following configuration errors is detected by the control. The nn refers to the error code listed in Table 50. Action to be Taken None. Reset Method Manual, after the service has been completed and Time ClockMCFG RS.SV is reset for the alert.

77

Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm the machines configuration.

Table 50 Service Maintenance Alert Codes

Water Exchanger Fluid Thermistor Failure th.01 Entering th.02 Leaving Criteria for Trip If the temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C). Action to be Taken The unit shuts down normally, or is not allowed to start. Reset Method Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the main base board. Check the sensor for accuracy.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Thermistors on page 78. th.03 Circuit A Defrost Thermistor Failure th.04 Circuit B Defrost Thermistor Failure Criteria for Trip This alarm is for a heat pump machine only. This feature is not supported for a cooling only machine. Action to be Taken None Reset Method Automatic Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration. th.08 Entering Condenser Reclaim Thermistor Criteria for Trip Tested when the unit is On or Off. This alarm is generated if the temperature measured by the sensor is outside the range of 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C). This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only. Action to be Taken The unit will return to the air-cooled mode. Reset Method Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the heat reclaim board. Check for a faulty thermistor.

Check the board for a faulty channel. Confirm unit configuration.

th.09 Leaving Condenser Reclaim Thermistor Criteria for Trip Tested when the unit is On or Off. This alarm is generated if the temperature measured by the sensor is outside the range of 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C). This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only. Action to be Taken None Reset Method Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the heat reclaim board. Check for a faulty thermistor. Check the board for a faulty channel. Confirm unit configuration.

th.10 OAT Thermistor Failure Criteria for Trip If the outdoor-air temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C). Action to be Taken Unit shuts down under normal conditions or is not allowed to start. Temperature reset based on outdoor air temperature will be disabled. The OAT sensor controls the cooler heaters. If this sensor fails, the cooler heaters will be energized when the machine stages to 0. Reset Method Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range and Temperature reset based on out- door-air temperature will be enabled. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the main base board. Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Thermistors on this page. th.11 Master/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor Criteria for Trip This alarm criterion is checked whether the unit is ON or OFF and has been configured for Dual Chiller Control. The alarm will be triggered if the Dual Chiller Common Fluid temperature as mea- sured by the thermistor is outside of the range 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C). Action to be Taken Dual Chiller Control disabled. Units operate as a stand-alone machine. Reset Method Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. The Dual Chiller algorithm will resume once the alarm is cleared. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the main base board. Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Thermistors on page 78.

CODE DESCRIPTION 01 Circuit A Loss of Refrigerant Charge 02 Circuit B Loss of Refrigerant Charge 03 Circuit C Loss of Refrigerant Charge 04 Water Loop Size Warning 05 Air Exchanger Cleanliness Warning 06 Pump 1 Servicing Required 07 Pump 2 Servicing Required 08 Reclaim Pump Servicing Required 09 Water Filter Servicing Required

78

Suction Gas Thermistor th.12 Circuit A th.13 Circuit B th.14 Circuit C Criteria for Trip This alarm criterion is checked whether the unit is ON or OFF. If the suction gas temperature as measured by the thermistor is out- side of the range 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C), the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken The affected circuit shuts down normally. Reset Method Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. The affected circuit will restart once the alarm has cleared. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the EXV board. Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Thermistors on this page. Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor th.18 Circuit A th.19 Circuit B Criteria for Trip Tested when the unit is On or Off. If the temperature as mea- sured by the sensor is outside of the range of 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C). This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only. Action to be Taken The unit will return to the air cooled mode. Reset Method Automatic, the alarm will reset once the reading is within the ex- pected range. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check the sensor wiring to the EMM HR. Check for a faulty thermistor. Confirm unit configuration.

th.21 Space Temperature Sensor Failure Criteria for Trip This alarm criterion is checked whether the unit is ON or OFF and if Space Temperature Reset has been enabled. If the outdoor-air temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range 40F (40C) to 240F (115.6C), the alarm will be triggered. Action to be Taken Unit operates under normal control. Temperature Reset based on Space Temperature is disabled. Reset Method Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. The Space Temperature Reset will resume once the alarm has cleared. Possible Causes If this condition is encountered, check the following items: Check sensor wiring to the energy management module. Check the board for a faulty channel. Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see Thermistors.

Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure V0-xx Circuit A V1-xx Circuit B V2-xx Circuit C Criteria for Trip See Table 24 on page 27 and Table 47 on page 66. Action to be Taken Alert No action Alarm Circuit is stopped

Reset Method Automatic reset. Possible Causes See Table 47 on page 66.

Sensors The electronic control uses up to 12 thermistors to sense tem- peratures and up to 8 transducers to sense pressure for con- trolling chiller operation. These sensors are outlined below.

Thermistors (Tables 51-53) Thermistors that are monitoring the chillers operation include: cooler entering water, cooler leaving water, dual chiller leaving water, compressor suction gas temperature, and outside air thermistors. These thermistors are 5,000 ohms at 77F (25C) and are identical in temperature versus resistance. The space temperature thermistor is 10,000 ohmsat 77F (25C) and has a different temperature vs. resistance. COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (T1) On all sizes, this thermistor is installed in a well in the entering water nozzle of the cooler. COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (T2) On all sizes, this thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving wa- ter nozzle of the cooler. See Fig. 35 and 36. OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE (T3) This sensor is factory-installed and is attached to the bottom of the condenser mounting rail. DUAL CHILLER LWT (T6) On duplex chillers, 30RB315-390, a factory-supplied, field-in- stalled well and thermistor are installed in the common supply wa- ter header of the two modules. COMPRESSOR SUCTION GAS TEMPERATURE (T4, T5, T7) This thermistor is installed in a well located in the common suc- tion line for the circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit. CONDENSING LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (T9) This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving water nozzle of the reclaim condenser. CONDENSING ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (T10) This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This thermistor is installed in a well in the entering water nozzle of the reclaim condenser. SUBCOOLED CONDENSER GAS TEMPERATURE (T11, T12) This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This thermistor is installed in a well in the common liquid line of each circuit. REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE (T8) This sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-supplied, field-in- stalled accessory mounted in the indoor space and is used for wa- ter temperature reset. The sensor should be installed as a wall- mounted thermostat would be (in the conditioned space where it

79

will not be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor). Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to terminals in the unit main control box. See Fig. 37. The space temperature sen- sor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier Comfort Net- work (CCN) at the sensor. To connect the space temperature sensor (see Fig. 37): 1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for the

application, connect one wire of the twisted pair to one SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN terminal located under the cover of the space temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 7 and 8 on TB6 located in the unit control box.

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 connector into the CCN: 1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black () conductors. (If another wire color scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space temperature sensor terminal block.

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black () wire to terminal 2 of the space temperature sensor.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

NOTE: The energy management module (EMM) is required for this accessory.

Transducers Table 54 lists pressure transducers for controlling chiller operation.

Table 51 Thermistor Identification

Fig. 35 5K Thermistor (P/N 30RB660036)

Fig. 36 Entering and Leaving Dual Water Thermistor Well (P/N 00PPG000008000A)

Fig. 37 Typical Remote Space Temperature Sensor Wiring

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 12 for acceptable wiring.

THERMISTOR ID DESCRIPTION RESISTANCE AT 77F (25C) CONNECTION POINT COMMENT EWT (T1) Entering Water Thermistor 5k MBB-J6-CH2 LWT (T2) Leaving Water Thermistor 5k MBB-J6-CH1 OAT (T3) Outdoor Air Thermistor 5k MBB-J6-CH4

SGTA (T4) Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor 5k EXV1-J3-A, THA SGTB (T5) Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor 5k EXV1-J3-B, THB SGTC (T7) Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor 5k EXV2-J3-A, THA DUAL (T6) Dual Chiller LWT Thermistor 5k MBB-J6-CH3 SPT (T8) Space Temperature Thermistor 10k EMM-J6-CH2

HLWT (T9) Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor 5k EMM HR-J5-CH1 Heat Reclaim Option HEWT (T10) Condenser Entering Water Thermistor 5k EMM HR-J5-CH2 Heat Reclaim Option HRT.A (T11) Sub Condenser Gas Temp A 5k EMM HR-J5-CH3 Heat Reclaim Option HRT.B (T12) Sub Condenser Gas Temp B 5k EMM HR-J5-CH4 Heat Reclaim Option

O-RING BRASS NUT 3/8 - 24 FOR ASSEMBLY ON BRASS WELL

6" MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR REMOVAL

1.188 in. 2.315 in.

1/4-18 NPT

7

8

TB6 SENSEN

SENSOR

80

Table 52 5K Thermistor Temperature (F) vs Resistance

TEMP (F)

RESISTANCE (Ohms)

25 98,010 24 94,707 23 91,522 22 88,449 21 85,486 20 82,627 19 79,871 18 77,212 17 74,648 16 72,175 15 69,790 14 67,490 13 65,272 12 63,133 11 61,070 10 59,081 9 57,162 8 55,311 7 53,526 6 51,804 5 50,143 4 48,541 3 46,996 2 45,505 1 44,066 0 42,679 1 41,339 2 40,047 3 38,800 4 37,596 5 36,435 6 35,313 7 34,231 8 33,185 9 32,176

10 31,202 11 30,260 12 29,351 13 28,473 14 27,624 15 26,804 16 26,011 17 25,245 18 24,505 19 23,789 20 23,096 21 22,427 22 21,779 23 21,153 24 20,547 25 19,960 26 19,393 27 18,843 28 18,311 29 17,796 30 17,297 31 16,814 32 16,346 33 15,892 34 15,453 35 15,027 36 14,614 37 14,214 38 13,826 39 13,449 40 13,084 41 12,730 42 12,387 43 12,053 44 11,730 45 11,416 46 11,112 47 10,816 48 10,529 49 10,250 50 9,979 51 9,717 52 9,461 53 9,213 54 8,973 55 8,739 56 8,511 57 8,291 58 8,076

TEMP (F)

RESISTANCE (Ohms)

59 7,686 60 7,665 61 7,468 62 7,277 63 7,091 64 6,911 65 6,735 66 6,564 67 6,399 68 6,238 69 6,081 70 5,929 71 5,781 72 5,637 73 5,497 74 5,361 75 5,229 76 5,101 77 4,976 78 4,855 79 4,737 80 4,622 81 4,511 82 4,403 83 4,298 84 4,196 85 4,096 86 4,000 87 3,906 88 3,814 89 3,726 90 3,640 91 3,556 92 3,474 93 3,395 94 3,318 95 3,243 96 3,170 97 3,099 98 3,031 99 2,964

100 2,898 101 2,835 102 2,773 103 2,713 104 2,655 105 2,597 106 2,542 107 2,488 108 2,436 109 2,385 110 2,335 111 2,286 112 2,239 113 2,192 114 2,147 115 2,103 116 2,060 117 2,018 118 1,977 119 1,937 120 1,898 121 1,860 122 1,822 123 1,786 124 1,750 125 1,715 126 1,680 127 1,647 128 1,614 129 1,582 130 1,550 131 1,519 132 1,489 133 1,459 134 1,430 135 1,401 136 1,373 137 1,345 138 1,318 139 1,291 140 1,265 141 1,240 142 1,214

TEMP (F)

RESISTANCE (Ohms)

143 1,190 144 1,165 145 1,141 146 1,118 147 1,095 148 1,072 149 1,050 150 1,029 151 1,007 152 986 153 965 154 945 155 925 156 906 157 887 158 868 159 850 160 832 161 815 162 798 163 782 164 765 165 750 166 734 167 719 168 705 169 690 170 677 171 663 172 650 173 638 174 626 175 614 176 602 177 591 178 581 179 570 180 561 181 551 182 542 183 533 184 524 185 516 186 508 187 501 188 494 189 487 190 480 191 473 192 467 193 461 194 456 195 450 196 445 197 439 198 434 199 429 200 424 201 419 202 415 203 410 204 405 205 401 206 396 207 391 208 386 209 382 210 377 211 372 212 367 213 361 214 356 215 350 216 344 217 338 218 332 219 325 220 318 221 311 222 304 223 297 224 289 225 282

81

Table 53 5K Thermistor Temperature (C) vs Resistance/Voltage

Table 54 Pressure Transducers

*00PPG000030600A High Pressure 00PPG000030700A Low Pressure

TRANSDUCER ID DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER* CONNECTION POINT COMMENT DPTA Ckt. A Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A MBB-J7A-CH6 SPTA Ckt. A Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A MBB-J7B-CH7 DPTB Ckt. B Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A MBB-J7C-CH8 SPTB Ckt. B Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A MBB-J7D-CH9 DPTC Ckt. C Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A FB3-J7-CH13 30RB210-300 Only SPTC Ckt. C Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A FB3-J8-CH14 30RB210-300 Only PD.A Ckt. A Pumpdown Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A EMM HR-J8-CH6 Heat Reclaim Option Only PD.B Ckt. B Pumpdown Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A EMM HR-J8-CH5 Heat Reclaim Option Only

TEMP (C)

RESISTANCE (Ohms)

32 100,260 31 94,165 30 88,480 29 83,170 28 78,125 27 73,580 26 69,250 25 65,205 24 61,420 23 57,875 22 54,555 21 51,450 20 48,536 19 45,807 18 43,247 17 40,845 16 38,592 15 38,476 14 34,489 13 32,621 12 30,866 11 29,216 10 27,633 9 26,202 8 24,827 7 23,532 6 22,313 5 21,163 4 20,079 3 19,058 2 18,094 1 17,184 0 16,325 1 15,515 2 14,749 3 14,026 4 13,342 5 12,696 6 12,085 7 11,506 8 10,959 9 10,441

10 9,949 11 9,485 12 9,044 13 8,627 14 8,231

TEMP (C)

RESISTANCE (Ohms)

15 7,855 16 7,499 17 7,161 18 6,840 19 6,536 20 6,246 21 5,971 22 5,710 23 5,461 24 5,225 25 5,000 26 4,786 27 4,583 28 4,389 29 4,204 30 4,028 31 3,861 32 3,701 33 3,549 34 3,404 35 3,266 36 3,134 37 3,008 38 2,888 39 2,773 40 2,663 41 2,559 42 2,459 43 2,363 44 2,272 45 2,184 46 2,101 47 2,021 48 1,944 49 1,871 50 1,801 51 1,734 52 1,670 53 1,609 54 1,550 55 1,493 56 1,439 57 1,387 58 1,337 59 1,290 60 1,244 61 1,200

TEMP (C)

RESISTANCE (Ohms)

62 1,158 63 1,118 64 1,079 65 1,041 66 1,006 67 971 68 938 69 906 70 876 71 836 72 805 73 775 74 747 75 719 76 693 77 669 78 645 79 623 80 602 81 583 82 564 83 547 84 531 85 516 86 502 87 489 88 477 89 466 90 456 91 446 92 436 93 427 94 419 95 410 96 402 97 393 98 385 99 376

100 367 101 357 102 346 103 335 104 324 105 312 106 299 107 285

82

Service Test Main power and control circuit power must be on for Service Test. The Service Test function is used to verify proper operation of var- ious devices within the chiller, such as condenser fan(s), compres- sors, minimum load valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s) and remote alarm relay. This is helpful during the start-up proce- dure to determine if devices are installed correctly. See Fig. 38-45 for 30RB wiring diagrams. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys to move to the Service Test mode. The items are described in the Service Test table. There are two sub-modes available. Service TestT.REQ allows for manual control of the compressors and minimum load control. In this mode the compressors will operate only on command. The capacity control and head pressure control algorithms will be active. The condenser fans will operate along with the EXVs. There must be a load on the chiller of operate for an extended period of time. All circuit safeties will be honored during the test. Service TestQUIC allows for test of EXVs, con- denser fans, pumps, low ambient head pressure control speed con- trol, crankcase and cooler heaters, and status points (alarm relays, running status and chiller capacity). This mode allows for the test- ing of non-refrigeration items. If there are no keys pressed for 5 minutes, the active test mode will be disabled. To enter the Manual Control mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Con- tact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to the Ser- vice Test mode. Press to access TEST.Press to access T.REQ. Press and the display will show OFF. Press and OFF will flash. Enter the password if re- quired. Use either arrow key to change the T.REQ value to ON and press . Manual Control mode is now active. Press the arrow keys to move to the appropriate item. To activate an item locate the item, press and the display will show OFF. Press and OFF will flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to ON and press . The item should be active. To turn the item off, locate the item, press and the

display will show ON. The chiller must be enabled by turning the Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch to Enable. Press and ON will flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to OFF and press . The item should be inactive. To enter the Quick Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to the Service Test mode. Press to access TEST.Use the key until the display reads QUIC. Press to access Q.REQ. Press

and the display will show OFF. Press and OFF will flash. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow key to change the QUIC value to ON and press . Quick Test mode is now active. Follow the same instructions for the Manual Control mode to activate a component. Example Test the chilled water pump (see Table 55). Power must be applied to the unit. Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by chang- ing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. Test the compressor and minimum load valve solenoid (if installed) outputs in a similar manner. The minimum load valve solenoids will be turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. Compressors will stay on until the operator turns them off. The Service Test mode will remain enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a compressor, circuit or the machine off if re- quired. Any other mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during the Manual Control mode only. The STAT item (Run StatusVIEW) will display 0 as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Re- mote contact for normal operation. NOTE: There may be up to a one-minute delay before the selected item is energized.

ENTER ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

83

Table 55 Testing the Chilled Water Pump

MODE (Red LED) SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY EXPANSION

VALUE DESCRIPTION

(Units) COMMENT

SERVICE TEST Service Test Mode

TEST Manual Sequence

QUIC Q.REQ

PASS WORD Password may be required

0111

Each will lock in the next

digit. If 0111 is not the password,

use the arrow keys to change the

password digit and press

when correct.

Q.REQ Returns to the original field

OFF

OFF OFF will flash

ON The Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position.

Q.REQ

EXV.A

EXV.B

PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1

OFF

OFF OFF will flash

ON

ON Pump 1 will turn on.

ON ON will flash

OFF

OFF Pump 1 will turn off.

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

84

LEGEND FOR FIG. 38-45 ALM R Alarm Relay ALT R Alert Relay CB Circuit Breaker CD-HT Condenser Heater CL-HT Cooler Heater CWFS Chilled Water Flow Switch DLSV Discharge Line Soleniod Valve DPT Discharge Pressure Transducer ECA-A Entering Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit A ECA-B Entering Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit B ECW-A Entering Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit A ECW-B Entering Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit B EMM Energy Management Module ENT A/C Entering Air-Cooled ENT W/C Entering Water-Cooled EXV Electronic Expansion Valve FIOP Factory-Installed Option FM Fan Motor FVFD Fan Motor Variable Frequency Drive HEVCF High Efficiency Variable Condenser Fan Option HOA Hand/Off/Auto HOA-A Hand/Off/Auto, Auto Setting HR Heat Reclaim LCA-A Leaving Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit A LCA-B Leaving Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit B LCW Leaving Condenser Water LCW-A Leaving Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit A LCW-B Leaving Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit B LLSV Liquid Line Solenoid Valve LVG A/C Leaving Air-Cooled LVG W/C Leaving Water-Cooled LWT Leaving Water Temperature MLV Minimum Load Valve MM Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

OAT Outdoor Air Temperature PDP Pumpdown Pressure PMP Pump, Chilled Water PMPI Chilled Water Pump Interlock PVFD Pump Variable Frequency Drive RDY R Ready Relay RRB Reverse Rotation Board RUN R Run Relay SGT Suction Gas Thermistor SHD R Shutdown Relay SPM Scroll Protection Module SPT Suction Pressure Transducer TB Terminal Block TRAN Transformer UPC Unitary Protocol Controller

Terminal Block Connection

Marked Terminal

Unmarked Terminal

Unmarked Splice

Factory Wiring

Optional Wiring

Indicates common potential. Does not represent wiring.

FIOP or Accessory

Wire Tag

85

Fig. 38 Control Schematic, 30RB060-080

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

86

Fig. 39 Control Schematic, 30RB090-150

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

87

Fig. 40 Control Schematic, 30RB160-190

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

88

Fig. 41 Control Schematic, 30RB210-300

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 2-ADDRESS 66

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

89

Fig. 42 Control Schematic, 30RB080-150 with HEVCF Option

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

90

Fig. 43 Control Schematic, 30RB160-190 with HEVCF Option

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

91

Fig. 44 Control Schematic, 30RB210-300 with HEVCF Option

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 1-ADDRESS 65

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

ON OFF

1 2 3 4

EXV BOARD 2-ADDRESS 66

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

92

Fig. 45 Heat Reclaim Control Schematic

? ? ? ? ?

?

? ? ? ? ?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

?

? ? ?

?

? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

?

?

?

?

?

?

? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

?? ?

?? ?

?? ?

?? ?

?

?? ?

?? ??

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

?

?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

?

?

?

? ? ? ?

?

?

?

? ?

? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

?

?

?

? ? ? ?

? ? ??

? ? ??

? ? ? ?

? ? ?

?

?

?

? ? ? ? ?

?

?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

?

?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

?

?

?

? ? ? ?

? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ??

?

?

? ? ? ? ?

?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ?

?? ?

? ?

?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ??

?

???? ?

?? ??

?

? ? ?

? ?

?

?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

?? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

???? ???

? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

?? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

?? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ?? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ?? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ?? ? ?? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ?? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ?

? ? ? ?

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

???? ?

?? ??

? ?

? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?

???

? ? ? ? ? ?

? ?

? ?

? ? ?

? ? ?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

?

? ? ? ?? ? ?? ? ?

a30-4622

93

Table A Mode Run Status

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. VIEW AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS 5,82

EWT Entering Fluid Temp XXXX.X (deg F/deg C) 0-100 STATEGEN EWT 23

LWT Leaving Fluid Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C) 0-100 STATEGEN LWT 23

SETP Active Setpoint XXX.X (deg F/deg C) 0-100 GENUNIT SP 45

CTPT Control Point XXX.X (deg F/deg C) 0-100 GENUNIT CTRL_PNT 23,42,

45

STAT Unit Run Status

0=Off 1=Running 2=Stopping 3=Delay

GENUNIT STATUS 29,30, 82

OCC Occupied NO/YES GENUNIT CHIL_OCC 29

CTRL Status Unit Control Typ

0=Local Off 1=Local On 2=CCN 3=Remote

GENUNIT ctr_type 29

CAP Percent Total Capacity XXX (%) 0-100 GENUNIT CAP_T CAP.S Capacity Indicator XX over_cap 23 LIM Active Demand Limit Val XXX (%) 0-100 GENUNIT DEM_LIM 39 STGE Current Stage XX cur_stag

ALRM Alarm State 0=Normal 1=Partial 2=Shutdown

GENUNIT ALM

HC.ST Heat Cool Status 0=Cooling 1=Heating 2=Standby

GENUNIT HEATCOOL 23

RC.ST Reclaim Select Status NO/YES GENUNIT reclaim_sel TIME Time of Day XX.XX 00.00-23.59 N/A TIME

MNTH Month of Year

1=January 2=February 3=March 4-April 5=May 6=June 7=July 8=August 9=September 10=October 11=November 12=December

N/A moy

DATE Day of Month XX 1-31 N/A dom YEAR Year of Century XX 00-99 N/A yoc

R.CCN CCN FOR PRODIALOG CH.SS CCN Chiller Start Stop ENBL/DSBL forcible GENUNIT CHIL_S_S 74

HC.SL Heat Cool Select 0=Cool 1=Heat 2=Auto

forcible GENUNIT HC_SEL

C.OCC Chiller Occupied NO/YES forcible GENUNIT CHIL_OCC RECL Reclaim Select NO/YES forcible GENUNIT RECL_SEL SP.OC Setpoint Occupied NO/YES forcible GENUNIT SP_OCC D.LIM Active Demand Limit Val XXX (%) 0-100 forcible GENUNIT DEM_LIM

CTRL Control Point XXX.X (deg F/deg C) 0-100 forcible GENUNIT CTRL_PNT

EMGY Emergency Stop ENBL/DSBL forcible GENUNIT EMSTOP RUN UNIT RUN HOUR AND START HRS.U Machine Operating Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible hr_mach STR.U Machine Starts XXXX 0-9999 forcible STRTHOUR st_mach HR.P1 Water Pump 1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_cpum1 HR.P2 Water Pump 2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_cpum2 HR.CD Heat Reclaim Pump Hours XXXX (hours) forcible FANHOURS hr_hpump 49

HOUR COMPRESSOR RUN HOURS HR.A1 Compressor A1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a1 HR.A2 Compressor A2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a2 HR.A3 Compressor A3 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a3 HR.A4 Compressor A4 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a4 HR.B1 Compressor B1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b1 HR.B2 Compressor B2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b2 HR.B3 Compressor B3 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b3 HR.B4 Compressor B4 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b4 HR.C1 Compressor C1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c1 HR.C2 Compressor C2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c2 HR.C3 Compressor C3 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c3 HR.C4 Compressor C4 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c4

STRT COMPRESSOR STARTS ST.A1 Compressor A1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a1 ST.A2 Compressor A2 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a2 ST.A3 Compressor A3 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a3 ST.A4 Compressor A4 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a4 ST.B1 Compressor B1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b1 ST.B2 Compressor B2 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b2 ST.B3 Compressor B3 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b3 ST.B4 Compressor B4 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b4 ST.C1 Compressor C1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c1 ST.C2 Compressor C2 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c2

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES

94

*As data in all of these categories can exceed 9999 the following display strategy is used: From 0-9999 display as 4 digits. From 9999-99900 display xx.xK From 99900-999000 display as xxxK.

STRT (cont) COMPRESSOR STARTS ST.C3 Compressor C3 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c3 ST.C4 Compressor C4 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c4

FAN FAN RUN HOURS FR.A1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana1 FR.A2 Fan 2 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana2 FR.A3 Fan 3 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana3 FR.A4 Fan 4 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana4 FR.A5 Fan 5 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana5 FR.A6 Fan 6 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana6 FR.B1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb1 FR.B2 Fan 2 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb2 FR.B3 Fan 3 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb3 FR.B4 Fan 4 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb4 FR.B5 Fan 5 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb5 FR.B6 Fan 6 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb6 FR.C1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc1 FR.C2 Fan 2 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc2 FR.C3 Fan 3 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc3 FR.C4 Fan 4 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc4 FR.C5 Fan 5 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc5 FR.C6 Fan 6 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc6

CP.UN COMPRESSOR DISABLE A1.UN Compressor A1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a1 A2.UN Compressor A2 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a2 A3.UN Compressor A3 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a3 A4.UN Compressor A4 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a4 B1.UN Compressor B1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b1 B2.UN Compressor B2 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b2 B3.UN Compressor B3 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b3 B4.UN Compressor B4 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b4 C1.UN Compressor C1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c1 C2.UN Compressor C2 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c2 C3.UN Compressor C3 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c3 C4.UN Compressor C4 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c4

MAIN PREDICTIVE MAINTENANCE CHRG Refrigerant Charge NO/YES SERMAINT charge_m WATE Water Loop Size NO/YES SERMAINT wloop_m PMP.1 Pump 1 (days) (days) SERMAINT cpump1_m PMP.2 Pump 2 (days) (days) SERMAINT cpump2_m PMP.C Cond Pump (days) (days) SERMAINT hpump_m W.FIL Water Filter (days) (days) SERMAINT wfilte_m

VERS SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to read version information

APPL CSA-XX-XXXXXXXXX PD5_APPL MARQ XXXXXX-XX-XX STDU NAVI XXXXXX-XX-XX Navigator EXV1 XXXXXX-XX-XX EXV_BRD1 EXV2 XXXXXX-XX-XX EXV_BRD2 AUX1 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD1 AUX2 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD2 AUX3 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD3 AUX4 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD4 AUX5 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD5 CPA1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA1 CPA2 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA2 CPA3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA3 CPA4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA4 CPB1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB1 CPB2 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB2 CPB3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB3 CPB4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB4 CPC1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC1 CPC2 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC2 CPC3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC3 CPC4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC4 EMM XXXXXX-XX-XX EMM_NRCP

Table A Mode Run Status (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO.

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

95

*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configur- ing T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then place the Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch to the Enable position. Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configur- ing Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position to perform Quick Test.

Table B Service Test

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. TEST COMPRESSORS N/A T.REQ Manual Sequence OFF/ON* forcible N/A service_test 53 CP.A1 Compressor A1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_1 53 CP.A2 Compressor A2 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_2 53 CP.A3 Compressor A3 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_3 53 CP.A4 Compressor A4 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_4 53 HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass A Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_a CP.B1 Compressor B1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_1 53 CP.B2 Compressor B2 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_2 53 CP.B3 Compressor B3 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_3 53 CP.B4 Compressor B4 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_4 53 HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass B Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_b CP.C1 Compressor C1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_1 53 CP.C2 Compressor C2 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_2 53 CP.C3 Compressor C3 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_3 53 CP.C4 Compressor C4 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_4 53 HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass C Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_c

QUIC QUICK TEST MODE N/A 53 Q.REQ Quick Test Mode OFF/ON forcible N/A test_request EXV.A Circuit A EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_a 52 EXV.B Circuit B EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_b 52 EXV.C Circuit C EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_c 52 FAN.A Circuit A Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_a FAN.B Circuit B Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_b FAN.C Circuit C Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_c SPD.A Circ A Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_a SPD.B Circ B Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_b SPD.C Circ C Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_c FRV.A Free Cooling Valve A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1a FRP.A Refrigerant Pump Out A OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2a FRV.B Free Cooling Valve B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1b FRP.B Refrigerant Pump Out B OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2b FRV.C Free Cooling Valve C OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1c FRP.C Refrigerant Pump Out C OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2c RV.A 4 Way Valve Circuit A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A rv_qck_a RV.B 4 Way Valve Circuit B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A rv_qck_b BOIL Boiler Command OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A boiler_qck HR1.A Air Cond Enter Valve A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ea_qck_a HR2.A Air Cond Leaving Valv A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_la_qck_a HR3.A Water Cond Enter Valv A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ew_qck_a HR4.A Water Cond Leav Valve A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_lw_qck_a HR1.B Air Cond Enter Valve B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ea_qck_b HR2.B Air Cond Leaving Valv B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_la_qck_b HR3.B Water Cond Enter Valv B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ew_qck_b HR4.B Water Cond Leav Valve B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_lw_qck_b PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1 OFF/ON forcible N/A cpump_qck1 PMP.2 Water Exchanger Pump 2 OFF/ON forcible N/A cpump_qck2 CND.P Reclaim Condenser Pump OFF/ON forcible N/A cond_pump_qck CL.HT Cooler Heater Output OFF/ON forcible N/A coo_heat_qck CP.HT Condenser Heater Output OFF/ON forcible N/A cond_htr_qck CH.A1 Compressor A1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a1 CH.A2 Compressor A2 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a2 CH.A3 Compressor A3 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a3 CH.A4 Compressor A4 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a4 CH.B1 Compressor B1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b1 CH.B2 Compressor B2 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b2 CH.B3 Compressor B3 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b3 CH.B4 Compressor B4 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b4 CH.C1 Compressor C1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c1 CH.C2 Compressor C2 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c2 CH.C3 Compressor C3 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c3 CH.C4 Compressor C4 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c4 HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass A Output OFF/ON forcible N/A HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass B Output OFF/ON forcible N/A HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass C Output OFF/ON forcible N/A Q.RDY Chiller Ready Status OFF/ON forcible N/A ready_qck

QUIC (cont) QUICK TEST MODE Q.RUN Chiller Running Status OFF/ON EMM forcible N/A running_qck SHUT Customer Shutdown Stat OFF/ON EMM forcible N/A shutdown_qck CATO Chiller Capacity 0-10v XX.X (vdc) 0-100 EMM forcible N/A CAPT_010_qcK ALRM Alarm Relay OFF/ON forcible N/A alarm_qck ALRT Alert Relay OFF/ON forcible N/A alert_qck C.ALM Critical Alarm Relay OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A critical_qck

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

96

Table C Mode Temperature

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMP EWT Water Exchanger Enter XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) 45-245F (43-118C) STATEGEN EWT 43

LWT Water Exchanger Leaving XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) STATEGEN LWT 43

OAT Outside Air Temperature XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) GENUNIT OAT 45

CHWS Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) STATEGEN CHWS TEMP

HEWT Heat Reclaim Entering XXX.X (deg F/deg C) RECLAIM HR_EWT 49

HLWT Heat Reclaim Leaving XXX.X (deg F/deg C) RECLAIM HR_LWT 49

SPT Optional Space Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) STATEGEN SPACETMP

CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A SCT.A Sat Cond Temp Circ A XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) 45-245F (43-118C) CIRCA_AN SCT_A

SST.A Sat Suction Temp Circ A XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) CIRCA_AN SST_A

SGT.A Suction Gas Temp Circ A XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) CIRCA_AN SUCT_T_A

SUP.A Superheat Temp Circ A XXX.X (F/C) CIRCA_AN SH_A HRT.A Sub Condenser Gas Tmp A XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) 45-245F (43-118C) RECLAIM hr_subta

HRS.A Sub Cooling Temp A XXX.X (F/C) RECLAIM hr_subca 49 CIR.B TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B SCT.B Sat Cond Temp Circ B XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) 45-245F (43-118C) CIRCB_AN SCT_B

SST.B Sat Suction Temp Circ B XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) CIRCB_AN SST_B

SGT.B Suction Gas Temp Circ B XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) CIRCB_AN SUCT_T_B 9

SUP.B Superheat Temp Circ B XXX.X (F/C) CIRCB_AN SH_B HRT.B Sub Condenser Gas Tmp B XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) 45-245F (43-118C) RECLAIM hr_subtb

HRS.B Sub Cooling Temp B XXX.X (F/C) RECLAIM hr_subcb 49 CIR.C TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT C CIRCC_AN SCT.C Sat Cond Temp Circ C XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) 45-245F (43-118C) CIRCC_AN SCT_C

SST.C Sat Suction Temp Circ C XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) CIRCC_AN SST_C

SGT.C Suction Gas Temp Circ C XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

45-245F (43-118C) CIRCC_AN SUCT_T_C

SUP.C Superheat Temp Circ C XXX.X (F/C) CIRCC_AN SH_C

Table D Mode Pressure

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. PRC.A PRESSURE CIRCUIT A DP.A Discharge Pressure Cir A XXX.X

(psig/kPa) CIRCA_AN DP_A 48

SP.A Suction Pressure Circ A XXX.X (psig/kPa) CIRCA_AN SP_A

PD.A Pumpdown Pressure Cir A XXX.X (psig/kPa) RECLAIM PD_P_A

PRC.B PRESSURE CIRCUIT B DP.B Discharge Pressure Cir B XXX.X

(psig/kPa) CIRCB_AN DP_B 48

SP.B Suction Pressure Circ B XXX.X (psig/kPa) CIRCB_AN SP_B

PD.B Pumpdown Pressure Cir B XXX.X (psig/kPa) RECLAIM PD_P_B

PRC.C PRESSURE CIRCUIT C DP.C Discharge Pressure Cir C XXX.X

(psig/kPa) CIRCC_AN DP_C 48

SP.C Suction Pressure Circ C XXX.X (psig/kPa) CIRCC_AN SP_C

PD.C Pumpdown Pressure Cir C XXX.X (psig/kPa) RECLAIM PD_P_C

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

97

Table E Mode Setpoints

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. COOL COOLING SETPOINTS

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1 XXXX.X (deg F/deg C)

20-70F (29-21C), Default = 44.0

forcible SETPOINT csp1 30,31, 42

CSP.2 Cooing Setpoint 2 XXXX.X (deg F/deg C)

20-70F (29-21C), Default = 44.0

forcible SETPOINT csp2 30,31

CSP.3 Ice Setpoint XXXX.X (deg F/deg C)

20-70F (29-21C), Default = 44.0

forcible SETPOINT ice_sp 31,45

CRV1 Current No Reset Val XX.X (mA) 0-20, Default = 0 forcible SETPOINT v_cr_no 31

CRV2 Current Full Reset Val XX.X (mA) 0-20, Default = 0 forcible SETPOINT v_cr_fu 31

CRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) 0-125F (0-69.4C), Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT dt_cr_no 31

CRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) 0-125F (0-69.4C), Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT dt_cr_fu 31

CRO1 OAT No Reset Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

0-125F (18-52C), Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT oatcr_no 31

CRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

0-25F (18-52C), Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT oatcr_fu 31

CRS1 Space T No Reset Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

0-125F (18-52C), Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT spacr_no 31

CRS2 Space T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C)

0-125F (18-52C), Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT spacr_fu 31

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset XX.X (F/C) 30-30F (16.7-16.7C), Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT cr_deg 31

CAUT Cool Changeover Setpt XX.X (deg F/deg C) Default = 75.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT cauto_sp

CRMP Cool Ramp Loading X.X 0.2-2.0F (0.1-1.1C), Default = 1.0

forcible cramp_sp 17,23

HEAT HEATING SETPOINTS HSP.1 Heating Setpoint 1 XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) Default = 100 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT HSP.1

HSP.2 Heating Setpoint 2 XXX.X (deg F/deg C) Default = 100 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT HSP.2

HRV1 Current No Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT v_hr_no HRV2 Current Full Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT v_hr_fu HRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT dt_hr_no HRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT dt_hr_fu HRO1 OAT No Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C) Default = 14.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT oathr_no

HRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp XXX.X (deg F/deg C) Default = 14.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT oathr_fu

DGRH Degrees Heat Reset XX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT DGRH HAUT Heat Changeover Setpt XX.X

(deg F/deg C) Default = 64 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT hauto_sp HRMP Heat Ramp Loading X.X Default = 1.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT hramp_sp

MISC MISCELLANEOUS SETPOINTS DLS1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 XXX (%) 0-100,

Default = 100 forcible SETPOINT lim_sp1 39

DLS2 Switch Limit Setpoint 2 XXX (%) 0-100, Default = 100 forcible SETPOINT lim_sp2 39

DLS3 Switch Limit Setpoint 3 XXX (%) 0-100, Default = 100 forcible SETPOINT lim_sp3 39

RSP Heat Reclaim Setpoint XXX.X (deg F/deg C) Default = 122 forcible SETPOINT rsp 48

RDB Reclaim Deadband XX.X (F/C) Default = 9.0 forcible SETPOINT hr_deadb 48

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

98

Table F Mode Inputs

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS ONOF On Off Switch OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN ONOF LOCK Cooler Interlock OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LOCK_1 23 DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LIM_SW1 39 DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LIM_SW2 39 ICE.D Ice Done OFF/ON STATEGEN ICE_SW DUAL Dual Setpoint Switch OFF/ON STATEGEN SETP_SW ELEC Electrical Box Safety OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN ELEC_BOX PUMP Pump Run Feedback OFF/ON STATEGEN PUMP_DEF OCCS Occupancy Override Swit OFF/ON STATEGEN OCC_OVSW RECL Heat Reclaim Switch OFF/ON STATEGEN RECL_SW 48 HC.SW Heat Cool Switch Status OFF/ON STATEGEN HC_SW RLOC Remote Interlock Switch OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN REM-LOCK C.FLO Reclaim Cond Flow OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN CONDFLOW DMND 4-20 mA Demand Signal XXX.X (mA) 4 to 20 STATEGEN LIM_ANAL 40 RSET 4-20 mA Reset/Setpoint XXX.X (mA) 4 to 20 STATEGEN SP_RESET 39

Table G Mode Outputs

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO. CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A CP.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A1 CP.A2 Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A2 CP.A3 Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A3 CP.A4 Compressor A4 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A4 HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass Circ A OFF/ON CIRCA_D HGBP_A HT.A1 Comp A1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a1_ht HT.A2 Comp A2 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a2_ht HT.A3 Comp A3 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a3_ht HT.A4 Comp A4 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a4_ht FAN.A Circuit A Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCA_D FAN_ST_A SPD.A Circ A Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCA_AN hd_pos_a EXV.A Circuit A EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCA_AN EXV_A 52 FRP.A Refrigerant Pump Out A OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_PMP_A FRVA Free Cooling Valve A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_VLV_A HR1.A Air Cond Enter Valve A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_ca_a HR2.A Air Cond Leaving Valv A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_la_a HR3.A Water Cond Enter Valv A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_en_a HR4.A Water Cond Leav Valve A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_lw_a RV.A 4 Way Valve Circuit A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D RV_A

CIR.B OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B CP.B1 Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B1 CP.B2 Compressor B2 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B2 CP.B3 Compressor B3 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B3 CP.B4 Compressor B4 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B4 HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass Circ B OFF/ON CIRCB_D HGBP_B HT.B1 Comp B1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B1 HT.B2 Comp B2 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B2 HT.B3 Comp B3 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B3 HT.B4 Comp B4 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B4 FAN.B Circuit B Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCB_D FAN_ST_B SPD.B Circ B Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCB_AN hd_pos_b EXV.B Circuit B EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCB_AN EXV_B 52 FRP.B Refrigerant Pump Out B OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCB_D FR_PMP_B FRVB Free Cooling Valve B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_VLV_B HR1.B Air Cond Enter Valve B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_ca_b HR2.B Air Cond Leaving Valv B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_la_b HR3.B Water Cond Enter Valv B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_en_b HR4.B Water Cond Leav Valve B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_lw_b RV.B 4 Way Valve Circuit B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCB_D RV_B

CIR.C OUTPUTS CIRCUIT C CP.C1 Compressor C1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C1 CP.C2 Compressor C2 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C2 CP.C3 Compressor C3 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C3 CP.C4 Compressor C4 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C4 HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass Circ C OFF/ON CIRCC_D HGBP_C HT.C1 Comp C1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c1_ht HT.C2 Comp C2 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c2_ht HT.C3 Comp C3 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c3_ht HT.C4 Comp C4 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c4_ht FAN.C Circuit C Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCC_D FAN_ST_C SPD.C Circ C Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCC_AN hd_pos_c EXV.C Circuit C EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCC_AN EXV_C 52 FRP.C Refrigerant Pump Out C OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCC_D FR_PMP_ C FRVC Free Cooling Valve C OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCC_D FR_VLV_C

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

99

GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1 OFF/ON STATEGEN CPUMP_1 PMP.2 Water Exchanger Pump 2 OFF/ON STATEGEN CPUMP_2 CND.P Reclaim Condenser Pump OFF/ON STATEGEN COND_PUMP CO.HT Cooler Heater Output OFF/ON STATEGEN COOLHEAT CN.HT Condenser Heater Output OFF/ON RECLAIM cond_htr REDY Chiller Ready Status OFF/ON forcible RECLAIM READY RUN Chiller Running Status OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN RUNNING SHUT Customer Shutdown Stat OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN SHUTDOWN CATO Chiller Capacity 0-10 v XX.X forcible STATEGEN CAPT_010 ALRM Alarm Relay OFF/ON STATEGEN ALARM ALRT Alert Relay OFF/ON STATEGEN ALERT BOIL Boiler Command OFF/ON Not supported. STATEGEN BOILER C.ALM Critical Alarm Relay OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN critical_qck

Table G Mode Outputs (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS CCN TABLE CCN POINT PAGE

NO.

Table H Mode Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS DEFAULT CCN

TABLE CCN

POINT PAGE NO.

DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION TEST Test Display LEDs OFF/ON OFF N/A display_test METR Metric Display US/METR US DISPCONF DISPUNIT

LANG Language Selection

0=English 1=Espanol 2=Francais 3=Portugues 4=Translated

0 DISPCONF LANGUAGE 3

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION TYPE Unit Type 1=Air Cooled

2=Heat Pump Heat pump not supported 1 FACTORY unit_typ

TONS Unit Size XXX (tons)

56 to 300 (nominal size refer to Table 1 for unit modular combinations)

FACTORY unitsize 71

VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A X 0-6

0: Std. unit, no fan drive options 1: Low ambient option. For HEVCF option set to number of fans on circuit: Size 60-70 n/a Size 80 2 Size 90-120 3 Size 130-150 4 Size 160-190 6 Size 210-250 4 Size 275-300 6

FACTORY varfan_a

VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B X 0-6

0: Std. unit, no fan drive options 1: Low ambient option. For HEVCF option set to number of fans on circuit: Size 60-70 n/a Size 80 2 Size 90-110 3 Size 120-170 4 Size 190 6 Size 210-250 4 Size 275-300 6

FACTORY varfan_b

VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C X 0-6

0: Std. unit, no fan drive options 1: Low ambient For HEVCF option set to number of fans on circuit: Size 210-225 4 Size 250 6 Size 275 4 Size 300 6

FACTORY varfan_c

HGBP Hot Gas Bypass Control 0=Unused 1=Startup Only 2=Close Ctrl 3=High Ambient

1 is default for med. temp. brine units (FLUD=2)

0 FACTORY hgbp_sel 17

60HZ 60 Hz Frequency NO/YES YES FACTORY freq_60H RECL Heat Reclaim Select NO/YES NO FACTORY recl_opt 48 EHS Electrical Heater Stage 0-4 Not supported 0 FACTORY ehs_sel EMM EMM Module Installed NO/YES NO FACTORY emm_nrcp 71

PAS.E Password Enable Password Protection Must Be Disabled to Change Password

DSBL/ENBL ENBL FACTORY pass_enb

PASS Password XXX 1 to 0150 0111 FACTORY fac_pass FREE Free Cooling Select NO/YES Not supported. NO FACTORY freecool PD4.D Pro_Dialog User Display NO/YES Must be set to

NO NO FACTORY pd4_disp BOIL Boiler Command Select OFF/ON Not supported. OFF FACTORY boil_sel

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

100

UNIT (cont) UNIT CONFIGURATION

VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 0=No fan drive 1=Low ambient option 2=HEVCF option

0 FACTORY Vh_sel

RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM XXXX 0 to 1140 1140 Low Ambient or HEVCF option

1140 FACTORY Vh_rpm

MCHX MCHX Exchanger Select NO/YES NO FACTORY mchx_sel FC Factory Country Code X 0 to 1 1=USA 1 FACTORY fac_code VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Volts 208,380,460,575 Volts Voltage dependent FACTORY vfd_volt QMFD Special Demand 0 to 255 Not supported 0 FACTORY qm_field

SERV SERVICE CONFIGURATION

FLUD Cooler Fluid Type 1=Water 2=Brine 3=Low Brine

Low Brine is not supported. 1 SERVICE1 flui_typ

17,30, 45,47, 72

MOP EXV MOP Setpoint XX.X (deg F/deg C)

40-60F (4.4-15.6C) 50 SERVICE1 mop_sp 73

HP.TH High Pressure Threshold XXX.X (psi/kPa) 500-640 psi (3447 to 4412 kPa)

609 SERVICE1 hp_th 23,48

SHP.A Cir A Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) 3-14F (1.7-7.8C) 9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_a 73

SHP.B Cir B Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) 3-14F (1.7-7.8C) 9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_b 73

SHP.C Cir C Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) 3-14F (1.7-7.8C) 9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_c 73

HTR Cooler Heater DT Setp XX.X (F/C) 0.5-9F (0.3-5.0C)

2.0 (Number of degrees added to brine freeze set point to enable cooler heater.)

SERVICE1 heatersp 45,55

EWTO Entering Water Control NO/YES NO SERVICE1 ewt_opt 30 AU.SM Auto Start When SM Lost NO/YES NO SERVICE1 auto_sm 74 BOTH HSM Both Command Select NO/YES NO USER both_sel LLWT Brine Min. Fluid Temp. XX

(deg F/deg C) 20-38F (28.9-3.3C) 28.0 (3.3) USER Mini_Lwt

LOSP Brine Freeze Setpoint XX.X (deg F/deg C)

4-50F (20-10C) 34.0 SERVICE1 lowestsp

23,30, 45,47, 55,72

HD.PG Varifan Proportion Gain XX.X 10-10 Std. Unit and Low Amb.: 2.0 HEVCF: 1.0

SERVICE1 hd_pg

HD.DG Varifan Derivative Gain XX.X 10-10 Std. Unit and Low Amb.: 0.4 HEVCF: 0.1

SERVICE1 hd_dg

HD.IG Varifan Integral Gain XX.X 10-10 Std. Unit and Low Amb.: 0.2 HEVCF: 0.1

SERVICE1 hd_ig

HR.MI Reclaim Water Valve Min XXX.X (%) 20 SERVICE1 min_3w HR.MA Reclaim Water Valve Max XXX.X (%) 100 SERVICE1 max_3w AVFA Attach Drive to Fan A NO/YES Not supported. NO AVFB Attach Drive to Fan B NO/YES Not supported. NO AVFC Attach Drive to Fan C NO/YES Not supported. NO

OPTN UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS CCNA CCN Address XXX 1-239 1 N/A CCNA 45 CCNB CCN Bus Number XXX 0-239 0 N/A CCNB 45

BAUD CCN Baud Rate

1=2400 2=4800 3=9600 4=19200 5=38400

3 N/A BAUD

LOAD Loading Sequence Select 0=Equal 1=Staged 0 USER seq_typ 20

LLCS Lead/Lag Circuit Select 0=Automatic 1=Cir A Leads 2=Cir B Leads 3=Cir C Leads

0 USER lead_cir 20

RL.S Ramp Load Select ENBL/DSBL DSBL USER ramp_sel 17,23, 45

DELY Minutes Off Time XX (Minutes) 1 to 15 1 USER off_on_d 17,17, 45

ICE.M Ice Mode Enable ENBL/DSBL DSBL USER ice_cnfg 30

PUMP Cooler Pumps Sequence

0=No Pump 1=1 Pump Only 2=2 Pumps Auto 3=PMP 1 Manual 4=PMP 2 Manual

0 USER pump_seq 29- 29,42, 46

ROT.P Pump Rotation Delay XXXX (hours) 24 to 3000 48 USER pump_del 46 PM.PS Periodic Pump Start NO-YES NO USER pump_per 29,46 P.SBY Stop Pump In Standby NO-YES NO USER pump_sby P.LOC Flow Checked if Pmp Off NO-YES YES USER pump_loc 29 LS.ST Night Low Noise Start XX.XX 00.00-23.59 00.00 USER nh_start 46 LS.ND Night Low Noise End XX.XX 00-00-23.59 00.00 USER nh_end 46 LS.LT Low Noise Capacity Lim XXX (%) 0-100 100 USER nh_limit 45,46

Table H Mode Configuration (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS DEFAULT CCN

TABLE CCN

POINT PAGE NO.

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

101

OPTN (cont) UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

OA.TH Heat Mode OAT Threshold XX.X (deg F/deg C) Not supported. 5 F USER heat_th

FREE Free Cooling OAT Limit XX.X (deg F/deg C) Not supported. 32.0 USER free_oat

BO.TH Boiler OAT Threshold XX.X (deg F/deg C)

5-32 F (15-0 C) Not supported. 14 USER boil_th

EHST Elec Stag OAT Threshold XX.XX (deg F/deg C)

23 -70 F (5-21 C) Not supported. 41 USER ehs_th

EHSB Last Heat Elec Backup NO-YES Not supported. NO USER ehs_back E.DEF Quick EHS in Defrost NO-YES Not supported. NO USER ehs_defr EHSP Elec Heating Pulldown XX (min) Not supported. 0 USER ehs_pull AUTO Auto Changeover Select NO-YES Not supported. NO USER auto_sel

RSET RESET, COOL AND HEAT TEMP

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0=No Reset 1=Out Air Temp 2=Delta T Temp 3=4-20 mA Input 4=Space Temp

0 USER cr_sel 31,45

HRST Heating Reset Type 0=No Reset 1=Out Air Temp 2=Delta T Temp 3=4-20 mA Input

Not supported. 0 USER hr_sel

DMDC Demand Limit Select 0=None 1=Switch 2=4-20 mA Input

0 USER lim_sel 39,40, 45

DMMX mA for 100% Demand Lim XX.X (mA) 0.0 USER lim_mx 40 DMZE mA for 0% Demand Limit XX.X (mA) 0.0 USER lim_ze 40

MSSL Master/Slave Select 0=Disable 1=Master 2=Slave

0 MST_SLV ms_sel 45,46, 72,75

SLVA Slave Address XXX 1-236 2 MST_SLV slv_addr LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select ENBL/DSBL DSBL MST_SLV ll_bal 17,44 LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta XXX (hours) 40-400 168 MST_SLV ll_bal_d 17,44 LLDY Lag Start Delay XX (minutes) 2-30 10 MST_SLV lsrt_tim 17,44 LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select 0=Off if Unit stopped

1=On if Unit stopped 0 MST_SLV lag_pump 17,44 LPUL Lead Pulldown Time XX (minutes) 0-60 0 MST_SLV lead_pul 17,44

Table H Mode Configuration (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS DEFAULT CCN

TABLE CCN

POINT PAGE NO.

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

102

Table I Mode Timeclock

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS

CCN TABLE

CCN POINT

PAGE NO.

TIME TIME OF DAY HH.MM Hour and Minute XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible* N/A HH.MM DATE MONTH DATE DAY AND YEAR

MNTH Month of Year

1=January 2=February 3=March 4=April 5=May 6=June 7=July 8=August 9=September 10=October 11=November 12=December

forcible* N/A MNTH

DOM Day of Month XX 1-31 forcible* N/A DOM

DAY Day of Week

1=Monday 2=Tuesday 3=Wednesday 4=Thursday 5=Friday 6=Saturday 7=Sunday

forcible* N/A DAY

YEAR Year of Century XX 00-99 forcible* N/A YEAR SCH1 TIME SCHEDULE 1 29,30 PER.1 Period 1 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.1OCC.1 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD1 PER.1UNO.1 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD1 PER.1MON.1 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1WED.1 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1THU.1 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1FRI.1 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1SAT.1 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1SUN.1 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.1HOL.1 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1 PER.2 Period 2 Occ/Unocc Sel OCC1P01S PER.2OCC.2 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD2 PER.2UNO.2 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD2 PER.2MON.2 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2TUE.2 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2WED.2 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2THU.2 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2FRI.2 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2SAT.2 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2SUN.2 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.2HOL.2 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2 PER.3 Period 3 Occ/Unocc Sel OCC1P01S PER.3OCC.3 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD3 PER.3UNO.3 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD3 PER.3MON.3 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3TUE.3 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3WED.3 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3THU.3 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3FRI.3 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3SAT.3 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3SUN.3 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.3HOL.3 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3 PER.4 Period 4 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.4OCC.4 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD4 PER.4UNO.4 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD4 PER.4MON.4 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4TUE.4 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4WED.4 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4THU.4 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4FRI.4 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4SAT.4 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4SUN.4 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.4HOL.4 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4 PER.5 Period 5 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.5OCC.5 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD5 PER.5UNO.5 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD5 PER.5MON.5 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5TUE.5 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5WED.5 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5THU.5 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5FRI.5 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5SAT.5 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5SUN.5 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.5HOL.5 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5 PER.6 Period 6 Occ/Unocc Sel

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

103

SCH1 (cont) TIME SCHEDULE 1 PER.6OCC.6 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD6 PER.6UNO.6 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD6 PER.6MON.6 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6TUE.6 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6WED.6 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6THU.6 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6FRI.6 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6SAT.6 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6SUN.6 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.6HOL.6 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6 PER.7 Period 7 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.7OCC.7 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S OCCTOD7 PER.7UNO.7 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S UNOCTOD7 PER.7MON.7 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7WED.7 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7THU.7 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7FRI.7 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7SAT.7 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7SUN.7 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.7HOL.7 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7 PER.8 Period 8 Occ/Unocc Sel OCCP01S PER.8OCC.8 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S OCCTOD8 PER.8UNO.8 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S UNOCTOD8 PER.8MON.8 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8WED.8 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8THU.8 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8FRI.8 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8SAT.8 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8SUN.8 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8 PER.8HOL.8 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

SCH2 TIME SCHEDULE 2 29,30 PER.1 Period 1 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.1OCC.1 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD1 PER.1UNO.1 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD1 PER.1MON.1 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1WED.1 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1THU.1 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1FRI.1 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1SAT.1 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1SUN.1 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.1HOL.1 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1 PER.2 Period 2 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.2OCC.2 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD PER.2UNO.2 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD2 PER.2MON.2 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2TUE.2 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2WED.2 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2THU.2 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2FRI.2 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2SAT.2 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2SUN.2 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.2HOL.2 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2 PER.3 Period 3 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.3OCC.3 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD PER.3UNO.3 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD3 PER.3MON.3 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3TUE.3 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3WED.3 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3THU.3 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3FRI.3 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3SAT.3 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3SUN.3 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.3HOL.3 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3 PER.4 Period 4 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.4OCC.4 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD4 PER.4UNO.4 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD4 PER.4MON.4 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4TUE.4 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4WED.4 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4THU.4 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4FRI.4 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4SAT.4 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4SUN.4 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4 PER.4HOL.4 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

Table I Mode Timeclock (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS

CCN TABLE

CCN POINT

PAGE NO.

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

104

SCH2 (cont) TIME SCHEDULE 2 PER.5 Period 5 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.5OCC.5 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD5 PER.5UNO.5 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD5 PER.5MON.5 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5TUE.5 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5WED.5 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5THU.5 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5FRI.5 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5SAT.5 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5SUN.5 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.5HOL.5 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5 PER.6 Period 6 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.6OCC.6 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD6 PER.6UNO.6 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD6 PER.6MON.6 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6TUE.6 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6WED.6 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6THU.6 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6FRI.6 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6SAT.6 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6SUN.6 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.6HOL.6 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6 PER.7 Period 7 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.7OCC.7 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD7 PER.7UNO.7 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible UNOCTOD7 PER.7MON.7 Monday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7WED.7 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7THU.7 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7FRI.7 Friday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7SAT.7 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7SUN.7 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.7HOL.7 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7 PER.8 Period 8 Occ/Unocc Sel PER.8OCC.8 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCTOD8

PER.8UNO.8 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible UNOCTOD8 PER.8MON.8 Monday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8WED.8 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8THU.8 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8FRI.8 Friday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8SAT.8 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8SUN.8 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8 PER.8HOL.8 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

HOLI HOLIDAYS CONFIGURATION HOL.1 Holidays Config 1

HOL.1MON.1 Holiday Start Month

1=January 2=February 3=March 4=April 5=May 6=June 7=July 8=August 9=September 10=October 11=November 12=December

forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_MON

HOL.1DAY.1 Holiday Start Day XX 1 to 31 forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_DAY HOL.1DUR.1 Holiday Duration in Day XX 1 to 99 forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_LEN HOL.1HOL.2 Holidays Config 2 HOL.1MON.2 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_MON

HOL.2DAY.2 Holiday Start Day See HOL.1DAY.1 forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_DAY

HOL.2DUR.2 Holiday Duration in Day See HOL.1DUR.1 forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_LEN

HOL.9 Holidays Config 9 HOL.9MON.9 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_MON

HOL.9DAY.9 Holiday Start Day See HOL.1DAY.1 forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_DAY

HOL.9DUR.9 Holiday Duration in Days See HOL.1DUR.1 forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_LEN

HOL.10HO.10 Holidays Config 10 HOL.10MO.10 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_09

HOL.10DA.10 Holiday Start Day See HOL.1DAY.1 forcible HOLDY_09

HOL.10DU.10 Holiday Duration in Days See HOL.1DUR.1 forcible HOLDY_09

Table I Mode Timeclock (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS

CCN TABLE

CCN POINT

PAGE NO.

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

105

*Default=NO. Default=0.

NOTE: See Operating Modes starting on page 111.

HOLI (cont) HOLIDAYS CONFIGURATION HOL.16HO.16 Holidays Config 16 HOL.16MO.16 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1 forcible HOLDY_16

HOL.16DA.16 Holiday Start Day See HOL.1DAY.1 forcible

HOL.16DU.16 Holiday Duration in Days See HOL.1DUR.1 forcible

MCFG SERVICE MAINTENANCE CONFIG 42,76 AL.SV Service Warning Select NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG s_alert CHRG Refrigerant Charge NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG charge_a WATE Water Loop Size NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG wloop_c PMP.1 Pump 1 (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible MAINTCFG pump1_c PMP.2 Pump 2 (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible MAINTCFG pump2_c PMP.C Cond Pump (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible MAINTCFG hpump_c W.FIL Water Filter (days) XXXX (days) forcible MAINTCFG wfilte_c 42

RS.SV Servicing Alert Reset

0=Default 1=Refrigerant Charge 2=Water loop size 3=Not used 4=Pump 1 5=Pump 2 6=Reclaim Pump 7=Water filter 8=Reset all

forcible SERMAINT s_reset

Table I Mode Timeclock (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS

CCN TABLE

CCN POINT

PAGE NO.

Table J Operating Mode

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS

CCN TABLE

CCN POINT

PAGE NO.

SLCT OPERATING TYPE CONTROL

OPER Operating Type Control 0=Switch Ctrl 1=Time Sched 2=CCN Control

Default = 0 forcible N/A N/A 30,41,44, 48

SP.SE Setpoint Select

0=Setpoint Occ 1=Setpoint1 2=Setpoint2 3=4-20mA Setp 4=Dual Setp Sw

Default = 0 forcible N/A N/A 31

HC.SE Heat Cool Select 0=Cooling 1=Heating 2=Auto Chgover 3=Heat Cool Sw

Default = 0 1-3 not supported.

forcible GENUNIT HC_SEL 30

RL.SE Reclaim Select 0=No 1=Yes 2=Switch Ctrl

Default = 0 Yes = CCN control

forcible GENUNIT RECL_SEL 48

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT MD01 Startup Delay in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_01 45 MD02 Second Setpoint in Use OFF/ON MODES MODE_02 45 MD03 Reset in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_03 45 MD04 Demand Limit Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_04 45 MD05 Ramp Loading Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_05 45 MD06 Cooler Heater Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_06 45 MD07 Water Pumps Rotation OFF/ON MODES MODE_07 45 MD08 Pump Periodic Start OFF/ON MODES MODE_08 45 MD09 Night Low Noise Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_09 45 MD10 System Manager Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_10 45 MD11 Mast Slave Ctrl Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_11 45 MD12 Auto Changeover Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_12 45 MD13 Free Cooling Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_13 45 MD14 Reclaim Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_14 45 MD15 Electric Heat Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_15 45 MD16 Heating Low EWT Lockout OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_16 45 MD17 Boiler Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_17 45 MD18 Ice Mode in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_18 45 MD19 Defrost Active on Cir A OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_19 45 MD20 Defrost Active on Cir B OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_20 45 MD21 Low Suction Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_21 45 MD22 Low Suction Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_22 45 MD23 Low Suction Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_23 45 MD24 High DGT Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_24 45 MD25 High DGT Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_25 45 MD26 High DGT Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_26 45 MD27 High Pres Override Cir A OFF/ON MODES MODE_27 45 MD28 High Pres Override Cir B OFF/ON MODES MODE_28 45 MD29 High Pres OVerride Cir C OFF/ON MODES MODE_29 45 MD30 Low Superheat Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_30 45 MD31 Low Superheat Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_31 45 MD32 Low Superheat Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_32 45

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

106

*Expanded display will be actual alarm expansion. Up to five current alarms will be displayed. **History of thirty past alarms will be displayed.

Table K Mode Alarms

ITEM EXPANSION* UNITS RANGE COMMENT WRITE STATUS

CCN TABLE

CCN POINT

PAGE NO.

R.ALM RESET ALL CURRENT ALRM forcible N/A N/A 60 ALRM CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARM 60

Current Alarm 1 GENUNIT alarm_1 Current Alarm 2 GENUNIT alarm_2 Current Alarm 3 GENUNIT alarm_3 Current Alarm 4 GENUNIT alarm_4 Current Alarm 5 GENUNIT alarm_5

H.ALM** ALARM HISTORY Alarm History #1 ALRMHIST alm_history_01 Alarm History #2 ALRMHIST alm_history_02

ALRMHIST Alarm History #29 ALRMHIST alm_history_29 Alarm History #30 ALRMHIST alm_history_30

APPENDIX A LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

107

Table L Status Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS CIRCA_AN

Percent Total Capacity 0 - 100 % CAPA_T Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_A Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_A Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpa1_cur Crank Heater Current Cp2 nnn.n AMPS cpa2_cur Crank Heater Current Cp3 nnn.n AMPS cpa3_cur Crank Heater Current Cp4 nnn.n AMPS cpa4_cur Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpa1_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 2 nnnn OHMS cpa2_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 3 nnnn OHMS cpa3_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 4 nnnn OHMS cpa4_tmp Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n F SCT_A Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n F SST_A Suction Gas Temperature nnn.n F SUCT_T_A Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_A EXV Position 0 - 100 % EXV_A

CIRCA_D Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_A1 Compressor 2 Output On/Off CP_A2 Compressor 3 Output On/Off CP_A3 Compressor 4 Output On/Off CP_A4 Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_a1_ht Compressor 2 Heater Out On/Off cp_a2_ht Compressor 3 Heater Out On/Off cp_a3_ht Compressor 4 Heater Out On/Off cp_a4_ht Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_A

Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_a1 Fan Output DO # 2 On/Off fan_a2 Fan Output DO # 3 On/Off fan_a3 Fan Output DO # 4 On/Off fan_a4 Fan Output DO # 5 On/Off fan_a5 Fan Output DO # 6 On/Off fan_a6 Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_A

4 Way Refrigerant Valve On/Off RV_A CIRCB_AN

Percent Total Capacity 0 - 100 % CAPB_T Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_B Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_B Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpb1_cur Crank Heater Current Cp2 nnn.n AMPS cpb2_cur Crank Heater Current Cp3 nnn.n AMPS cpb3_cur Crank Heater Current Cp4 nnn.n AMPS cpb4_cur Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpb1_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 2 nnnn OHMS cpb2_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 3 nnnn OHMS cpb3_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 4 nnnn OHMS cpb4_tmp Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n F SCT_B Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n F SST_B Suction Gas Temperature nnn.n F SUCT_T_B Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_B EXV Position 0-100 % EXV_B Head Press Actuator Pos 0-100 % hd_pos_b

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES

108

CIRCB_D Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_B1 Compressor 2 Output On/Off CP_B2 Compressor 3 Output On/Off CP_B3 Compressor 4 Output On/Off CP_B4 Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_b1_ht Compressor 2 Heater Out On/Off cp_b2_ht Compressor 3 Heater Out On/Off cp_b3_ht Compressor 4 Heater Out On/Off cp_b4_ht Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_B

Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_b1 Fan Output DO # 2 On/Off fan_b2 Fan Output DO # 3 On/Off fan_b3 Fan Output DO # 4 On/Off fan_b4 Fan Output DO # 5 On/Off fan_b5 Fan Output DO # 6 On/Off fan_b6 Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_B

4 Way Refrigerant Valve On/Off RV_B CIRCC_AN

Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPC_T Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_C Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_C Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpc1_cur Crank Heater Current Cp2 nnn.n AMPS cpc2_cur Crank Heater Current Cp3 nnn.n AMPS cpc3_cur Crank Heater Current Cp4 nnn.n AMPS cpc4_cur Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpc1_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 2 nnnn OHMS cpc2_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 3 nnnn OHMS cpc3_tmp Motor Thermistor Comp 4 nnnn OHMS cpc4_tmp Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n F SCT_C Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n F SST_C Suction Gas Temperature nnn.n F SUCT_T_C Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_C EXV Position 0-100 % EXV_C Head Press Actuator Pos 0-100 % hd_pos_c

CIRCC_D Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_C1 Compressor 2 Output On/Off CP_C2 Compressor 3 Output On/Off CP_C3 Compressor 4 Output On/Off CP_C4 Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_c1_ht Compressor 2 Heater Out On/Off cp_c2_ht Compressor 3 Heater Out On/Off cp_c3_ht Compressor 4 Heater Out On/Off cp_c4_ht Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_C

Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_c1 Fan Output DO # 2 On/Off fan_c2 Fan Output DO # 3 On/Off fan_c3 Fan Output DO # 4 On/Off fan_c4 Fan Output DO # 5 On/Off fan_c5 Fan Output DO # 6 On/Off fan_c6 Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_C

Table L Status Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

109

FANHOURS FAN Operating Hours Circuit A Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana1 Circuit A Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana2 Circuit A Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana3 Circuit A Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana4 Circuit A Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana5 Circuit A Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana6 Circuit B Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb1 Circuit B Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb2 Circuit B Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb3 Circuit B Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb4 Circuit B Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb5 Circuit B Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb6 Circuit C Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc1 Circuit C Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc2 Circuit C Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc3 Circuit C Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc4 Circuit C Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc5 Circuit C Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc6 WATER PUMPS Water Pump #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum1 Water Pump #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum2 Heat Reclaim Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_hpump FREE COOLING PUMPS Circuit A Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_a Circuit B Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_b Circuit C Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_c

FREECOOL GENERAL PARAMETER Free Cooling Disable? Yes/No FC_SW LWT-OAT Delta nnn.n ^F fc_delta Current Cooling Power nnn KW cool_pwr Estimated FreeCool Power nnn KW fc_pwr Next session allowed in nn min fc_next Cooling/FreeCool Timeout nn min fc_tmout Free Cool Conditions OK? Yes/No fc_ready Free Cool Request ? Yes/No fc_reqst Valve Actuator Heaters ? On/Off FC_HTR CIRCUIT A Free Cooling Active Yes/No fc_on_a Fan Staging Number 1-6 FAN_ST_A 3 Way Valve Position nnn % fc_vlv_a 3 Way Valve Status text* FC_VLV_A Refrigerant Pump Out On/Off fc_pmp_a Pump Inlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_inp_a Pump Outlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_oup_a Pump Differential Pressure nnn PSI fc_dp_a CIRCUIT B Free Cooling Active Yes/No fc_on_b Fan Staging Number 1-6 FAN_ST_B 3 Way Valve Position nnn % fc_vlv_b 3 Way Valve Status text* FC_VLV_B Refrigerant Pump Out On/Off fc_pmp_b Pump Inlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_inp_b Pump Outlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_oup_b Pump Differential Pressure nnn PSI fc_dp_b

Table L Status Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

110

GENUNIT GENERAL PARAMETER

Control Type Local CCN Remote

ctr_type

Run Status

0 = Off 1 = Running 2 = Stopping 3 = Delay 4 = Tripout 5 = Ready 6 = Override 7 = Defrost 8 = Run Test 9 = Test

STATUS

CCN Chiller Start/Stop Enable/Disable CHIL_S_S forcible Chiller Occupied? Yes/No CHIL_OCC forcible Minutes Left for Start 0-15 min min_left

Heat/Cool Status 0 = Cool, 1 = Heat 2 = Stand-by 3 = Both

HEATCOOL

Heat/Cool Select (0=Cool, 1=Heat, 2= Auto)

0 = Cool 1 = Heat 2 = Auto

HC_SEL forcible

Heat Reclaim Select Yes/No RECL_SEL forcible Free Cooling Disable Yes/No FC_DSBLE

Alarm State 0 Normal 1 Partial 2 Shutdown

ALM

Current Alarm 1 nnnnn alarm_1 Current Alarm 2 nnnnn alarm_2 Current Alarm 3 nnnnn alarm_3 Current Alarm 4 nnnnn alarm_4 Current Alarm 5 nnnnn alarm_5 Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAP_T Active Demand Limit Val nnn % DEM_LIM forcible Lag Capacity Limit Value nnn % LAG_LIM Current Setpoint nnn.n F SP Setpoint Occupied Yes/No SP_OCC forcible

Setpoint Control

Setpt 1 Setpt 2 Ice_sp 4-20mA Auto

sp_ctrl

Control Point nnn.n F CTRL_PNT forcible Controlled Water Temp nnn.n F CTRL_WT External Temperature nnn.n F OAT Emergency Stop Enable/Disable EMSTOP forcible

Table L Status Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

111

MODES OPERATING MODES Startup Delay in Effect Yes/No Mode_01 Second Setpoint in Use Yes/No Mode_02 Reset in Effect Yes/No Mode_03 Demand Limit Active Yes/No Mode_04 Ramp Loading Active Yes/No Mode_05 Cooler Heater Active Yes/No Mode_06 Cooler Pumps Rotation Yes/No Mode_07 Pump Periodic Start Yes/No Mode_08 Night Low Noise Active Yes/No Mode_09 System Manager Active Yes/No Mode_10 Master Slave Active Yes/No Mode_11 Auto Changeover Active Yes/No Mode_12 Free Cooling Active Yes/No Mode_13 Reclaim Active Yes/No Mode_14 Electric Heat Active Yes/No Mode_15 Heating Low EWT Lockout Yes/No Mode_16 Boiler Active Yes/No Mode_17 Ice Mode in Effect Yes/No Mode_18 Defrost Active On Cir A Yes/No Mode_19 Defrost Active On Cir B Yes/No Mode_20 Low Suction Circuit A Yes/No Mode_21 Low Suction Circuit B Yes/No Mode_22 Low Suction Circuit C Yes/No Mode_23 High DGT Circuit A Yes/No Mode_24 High DGT Circuit B Yes/No Mode_25 High DGT Circuit C Yes/No Mode_26 High Pres Override Cir A Yes/No Mode_27 High Pres Override Cir B Yes/No Mode_28 High Pres Override Cir C Yes/No Mode_29 Low Superheat Circuit A Yes/No Mode_30 Low Superheat Circuit B Yes/No Mode_31 Low Superheat Circuit C Yes/No Mode_32

RECLAIM Heat Reclaim Select Yes/no RECL_SEL Reclaim Condenser Pump On/Off CONDPUMP Reclaim Condenser Flow On/Off condflow Reclaim Condenser Heater On/Off cond_htr Reclaim Entering Fluid nnn.n F HR_EWT Reclaim Leaving Fluid nnn.n F HR_LWT Reclaim Fluid Setpoint nnn.n F RSP forcible Reclaim Valve Position nnn.n % hr_v_pos HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT A Reclaim Status Circuit A n hrstat_a Pumpdown Pressure Cir A nnn.n psi PD_P_A Sub Condenser Temp Cir A nnn.n F hr_subta Pumdown Saturated Tmp A nnn.n F hr_sat_a Subcooling Temperature A nnn.n ^F hr_subca Air Cond Entering Valv A On/Off hr_ea_a Water Cond Enter Valve A On/Off hr_ew_a Air Cond Leaving Valve A On/Off hr_la_a Water Cond Leaving Val A On/Off hr_lw_a HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT B Reclaim Status Circuit B n hrstat_b Pumpdown Pressure Cir B nnn.n psi PD_P_B Sub Condenser Temp Cir B nnn.n F hr_subtb Pumdown Saturated Tmp B nnn.n F hr_sat_b Subcooling Temperature B nnn.n ^F hr_subcb Air Cond Entering Valv B On/Off hr_ea_b Water Cond Enter Valve B On/Off hr_ew_b Air Cond Leaving Valve B On/Off hr_la_b Water Cond Leaving Val B On/Off hr_lw_b

Table L Status Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

112

STATEGEN UNIT DISCRETE IN On/Off Remote Switch Open/Close ONOFF_SW Remote Heat/Cool Switch Open/Close HC_SW

Current Control Off, On Cool, On Heat, On Auto on_ctrl

Remote Reclaim Switch Open/Close RECL_SW Free Cooling Disable Sw. Open/close FC_SW Remote Setpoint Switch Open/Close SETP_SW Limit Switch 1 Status Open/Close LIM_SW1 Limit Switch 2 Status Open/Close LIM_SW2 Occupied Override Switch Open/Close OCC_OVSW Ice Done Storage Switch Open/Close ICE_SW Interlock Status Open/Close LOCK_1 Pump Run Status Open/Close PUMP_DEF Remote Interlock Status Open/Close REM_ LOCK Electrical Box Safety Open/Close ELEC_BOX UNIT DISCRETE OUT Electrical Heat Stage 0-4/Off EHS_STEP Boiler Command On/Off BOILER Water Pump #1 Command On/Off CPUMP_1 forcible Water Pump #2 Command On/Off CPUMP_2 forcible Rotate Pumps Now Yes/No ROT_PUMP forcible Reclaim Condenser Pump On/Off COND_PMP forcible Cooler Heater Command On/Off COOLHEAT Shutdown Indicator State On/Off SHUTDOWN Alarm Relay Status On/Off ALARMOUT Alert Relay Status On/Off ALERT Ready or Running Status On/Off READY Running Status On/Off RUNNING Critical Alarm Status On/Off CRITICAL UNIT ANALOG Water Exchanger Entering nnn.n F EWT Water Exchanger Leaving nnn.n F LWT Optional Space Temp nnn.n F SPACETMP CHWS Temperature nnn.n F CHWSTEMP Reset /Setpoint 4-20mA In nn.n ma SP_RESET Limit 4-20mA Signal nn.n ma LIM_ANAL Chiller Capacity Signal nn.n volts CAPT_010

Table L Status Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

113

* Text reflects status of valve Closed, Closing, Opened, Opening, Stopped, or Failed. See RECLAIM table on page 111.

STRTHOUR Machine Operating Hours nnnnn hours HR_MACH Machine Starts Number nnnnn st_mach Compressor A1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A1 Compressor A2 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A2 Compressor A3 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A3 Compressor A4 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A4 Compressor A1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a1 Compressor A2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a2 Compressor A3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a3 Compressor A4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a4 Compressor B1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B1 Compressor B2 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B2 Compressor B3 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B3 Compressor B4 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B4 Compressor B1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b1 Compressor B2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b2 Compressor B3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b3 Compressor B4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b4 Compressor C1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C1 Compressor C2 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C2 Compressor C3 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C3 Compressor C4 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C4 Compressor C1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c1 Compressor C2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c2 Compressor C4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c3 Compressor C4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c4 CYCLES Starts Max During 1 Hour nn st_cp_mx Starts/hr From Last 24 h nn st_cp_av Circuit A Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_a Circuit B Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_b

Table L Status Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

114

Table M Configuration Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME ALARMDEF/ ALARMS01

Alarm Routing Control 0 or 1 for each position 00000000 ALRM_CNT Alarm Equipment Priority 0-7 4 EQP_TYP Comm Failure Retry Time 1-240 10 min RETRY_TM Realarm Time 1-255 30 min RE_ALARM Alarm System Name 8 chars PRO_RBRQ ALRM_NAM

BRODEFS/ BROCASTS

Activate

0=Unused 1=Broadcast time, date, holiday flag and OAT. 2=For Standalone chiller. Daylight savings time & holiday determination will be done without broadcasting through the bus.

2 ccnbroad

OAT Broadcast Bus # 0 to 239 0 oatbusnm Element # 0 to 239 0 oatlocad DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SELECT Disable/Enable Disable dayl_sel ENTERING Month 1 to 12 3 startmon Day of week* (1=Monday) 1 to 7 7 startdow Week Number of Month 1 to 5 5 startwom LEAVING Month 1 to 12 10 stopmon Day of week* (1=Monday) 1 to 7 7 stopdow Week Number of Month 1 to 5 5 stopwom

!CtrlD / PD5_RBRQ:

Device Name 8 chars

Description 24 chars PRO-DIALOG 5 30RB&30RQ

Location 24 chars

Software Part Number 16 chars CSA-SR- 20C46xxxx

Model Number 20 chars Serial Number 12 chars Reference Number 24 chars

DISPCONF Metric Display on STDU Yes/No No DISPUNIT Language Selection 0=English 1=Espanol 2=Francais 3=Portugues 4=English2

0=English 1=Espanol 2=Francais 3=Portugues 4=English2

0 LANGUAGE

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

115

* Day of week where daylight savings time will occur in the morning (at 2:00 am). In the default setting, daylight savings time occurs on Sunday (7) morning, 1 hour shall be added when entering and 1 hour sub- tracted when leaving. Date once selected (from 1) shall occur in the week number entered. 1: If day of week selected is 7 (Sunday) time change will occur the first Sunday (week number 1) in the month. 5: If day of week selected is 7 (Sunday) time change will occur the last Sunday of the month (week number 4 or 5). ** Enter unit size. This item allows the controls to determine capacity of each compressor and the total number of fans on each circuit based on a compressor arrangement array (can be viewed in table FACTORY2, next page). It is not necessary to enter compressor capacity and num- ber of fans on each circuit. See the Unit Compressor Configuration table on the next page as a reference.

Number of fans controlled directly by a variable speed fan actuator using 0 to 10 vdc signal or LEN communication. This will enable the controls to determine the remaining discrete fan staging outputs from the total fans on each circuit. Configure to 1 for low ambient head pres- sure control. Configuration to match number of fans on circuit for HEVCF option. *** Must be configured to nameplate voltage. Configure 208/230-v units for 208.

FACTORY Unit Type 1 (Cooling Only), 2 (not supported) 1 unit_typ

Unit Capacity** 56 to 500 Unit Dependent tons unitsize NB Fans on Varifan Cir A 0 to 6 0 varfan_a NB Fans on Varifan Cir B 0 to 6 0 varfan_b NB Fans on Varifan Cir C 0 to 6 0 varfan_c Air Cooled Reclaim Sel Yes/No No recl_opt Free Cooling Select Yes/No No free_opt Electrical Heat Stages 0 to 4 0 ehs_sel Boiler Command Select Yes/No No boil_sel Power Frequency 60HZ Sel Yes/No Yes freq_60H Energy Management Module Yes/No No emm_nrcp

Hot Gas Bypass Select

0-Hot gas bypass valve (not used) 1=Used for Startup only 2=Close Control 3=High Ambient (if High pressure mode is active, close control shall be active)

0 hgbp_sel

Pro_dialog Display Selec

No=Use ComfortLink display as user interface (factory installed) Yes=Use Pro_dialog synopsis as user interface (not supported)

No (Must be set to No for ComfortLink display)

pd4_disp

Factory Password 0 to 150 111 fac_pass MCHX Exchanger Select Yes/No Unit Dependent mchx_sel VLT Fan Drive Select Not Supported 0 vlt_sel VLT Fan Drive RPM Not Supported 0 vlt_rpm Desuperheater Select Not Supported No desuper Dual Speed Fan Select Not Supported No dual_fan

Factory Country Code 0-1 1 (Must be set to 1 for units manufactured in USA)

fac_code

VFD Voltage for USA 208,380,460,575*** Unit dependent volts vfd_volt Special Demand 0 0 qm_field

Table M Configuration Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

116

NOTES: 1. Compressor capacity will be automatically be determined if unit

size entered in FACTORY table matches the values in the unit compressor configuration table.

2. Total number of fans includes fans controlled by a variable speed fan. This value will be automatically populated if unit size entered in FACTORY table matches the values in the unit compressor config- uration table.

Unit Compressor Capacity (%) Configuration

30RB UNIT SIZE

POINT NAME (FACTORY2 TABLE) cap_a1 cap_a2 cap_a3 cap_a4 cap_b1 cap_b2 cap_b3 cap_b4 cap_c1 cap_c2 cap_c3 cap_c4

060 20 20 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 070 25 25 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 080 20 20 0 0 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 090 25 25 0 0 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 25 25 0 0 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 25 25 0 0 20 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 120 25 25 0 0 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 130 25 25 25 0 20 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 150 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 160 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 170 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 190 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 210 25 25 25 0 20 20 20 0 25 25 25 0 225 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 250 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 25 275 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0 300 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

Factory2 Table

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME FACTORY2 Compressor A1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a1

Compressor A2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a2 Compressor A3 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a3 Compressor A4 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a4 Compressor B1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b1 Compressor B2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b2 Compressor B3 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b3 Compressor B4 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b4 Compressor C1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c1 Compressor C2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c2 Compressor C3 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c3 Compressor C4 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c4 Circuit A Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_a Circuit B Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_b Circuit C Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_c EXV A Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0=EXV not used exva_max EXV B Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0 exvb_max EXV C Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0 exvc_max

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

117

Table N Configuration Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME HOLIDAY/ HOLDY01S to HOLDY16S

Holiday Start Month 0-12 0 HOL_MON Start Day 0-31 0 HOL_DAY Duration (days) 0-99 0 HOL_LEN

MST_SLV

MASTER SLAVE CONTROL Master/Slave Select 0=Disable 1=Master 2=Slave

0=Disable 1=Master 2=Slave

0 ms_sel

Master Control Type 1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control

1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control

1 ms_ctrl

Slave Address 1 to 236 2 slv_addr Lag Start Timer 2 to 30 10 min lstr_tim Lead/Lag Balance Yes/No No ll_bal Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 168 hours ll_bal_d Lag Unit Pump Control 0=Stop if Unit Stops 1=Run if Unit Stops

0=Stop if Unit Stops 1=Run if Unit Stops 0 lag_pump

Lead Pulldown Time 0 to 60 0 min lead_pul

OCCDEFCS/ OCCPC01S and OCCPC02S

Timed Override Hours 0-4 0 OVR_EXT Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 11111111 DOW1 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD1 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 24:00 UNOCTOD1 Period 2 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 11111111 DOW2 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD2 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD2 Period 3 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW3 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD3 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD3 Period 4 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW4 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD4 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD4 Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW5 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD5 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD5 Period 6 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW6 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD6 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD6 Period 7 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW7 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD7 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD7 Period 8 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW8 Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD8 Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD8

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

118

NOTES: 1. Flow checked if pump off needed when a command is sent to the

primary pump to prevent cooler from freezing in winter conditions. Command will set the cooler flow switch to closed while the con- trols stop the cooler pump. The controls may then generate an alarm. If this decision is active, the cooler flow switch is not checked when the cooler pump is stopped.

2. If cooling reset select set point has been selected the set point based on 4 to 20 mA input signal through ComfortLink controls, then a 4 to 20 mA reset function shall be ignored. Configuration 3 (4-20mA Control) and 4 (Space Temperature) shall require an Energy Management Module.

3. Configuration 2 (4-20mA Control) shall require an Energy Manage- ment Module. Configuration 1 Switch Demand limit provides 3 step demand limit if an Energy Management Module is present. Other- wise, only one step is allowed.

USER Circuit Loading Sequence 0=Auto,1=A Lead 2=B Lead, 3 =C Lead

0-3 0=Auto, 1=A Lead 2=B Lead, 3 =C Lead

0 lead_cir

Staged Loading Sequence No/Yes No seq_typ Ramp Loading Select No/Yes No ramp_sel Unit Off to On Delay 1-15 1 Min off_on_d Cooler Pumps Sequence 0=No Pump 1=One Pump Only 2=Two Pumps Auto 3=Pump#1 Manual 4=Pump#2 Manual

0-4 0=No Pump 1=One Pump Only 2=Two Pumps Auto 3=Pump#1 Manual 4=Pump#2 Manual

0 pump_seq

Pump Auto Rotation Delay 24-3000 48 hours pump_del Pump Sticking Protection No/Yes No pump_per Stop Pump During Standby No/Yes No pump_sby Flow Checked if Pump Off No/Yes Yes pump_loc Auto Changeover Select No/Yes No auto_sel Cooling Reset Select 0-4 0 cr_sel Heating Reset Select 1 =OAT, 0=None 2=Delta T, 3=4-20mA Control 4=Space Temp

0-4 1 =OAT, 0=None 2=Delta T, 3=4-20mA Control 4=Space Temp

0 hr_sel

Demand Limit Type Select 0=None 1=Switch Control 2=4-20mA Control

0-2 0=None 1=Switch Control 2=4-20mA Control

0 lim_sel

mA For 100% Demand Limit 0-20 0 ma lim_mx mA For 0% Demand Limit 0-20 0 ma lim_ze Heating OAT Threshold -4-32 5 F heat_th Boiler OAT Threshold 5-59 14 F boil_th Free Cooling -4-37.4 32 F free_oat OAT Threshold -4-37.4 32.0 F free_th Full Load Timeout 5-60 15 min fc_tmout Pre_Cooling Selected No/Yes No pre_cool HSM Both Command Select No/Yes No both_sel Elec Stage OAT Threshold 23-70 41 F ehs_th 1 Elec Stage for backup No/Yes No ehs_back Electrical Pulldown Time 0-60 0 min ehs_pull Quick EHS for Defrost No/Yes No ehs_defr Night control Start Hour 00:00-24:00 00:00 nh_start End Hour 00:00-24:00 00:00 nh_end Capacity Limit 0-100 100 % nh_cnfg Ice Mode Enable No/Yes No ice_cnfg Menu Description Select No/Yes Yes menu_des Pass For All User Config No/Yes No all_pass

Table N Configuration Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

119

Table O Setpoint Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME SETPOINT COOLING

Cooling Setpoint 1 20.0-78.8 44.0 F csp1 Cooling Setpoint 2 20.0-78.8 44.0 F csp2 Cooling Ice Setpoinp 20.0-32.0 44.0 F ice_sp OAT No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 F oatcr_no OAT Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 F oatcr_fu Delta T No Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_cr_no Delta T Full Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_cr_fu Current No Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_cr_no Current Full Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_cr_fu Space T No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 F spacr_no Space T Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 F spacr_fu Cooling Reset Deg. Value 30-30 0.0 ^F cr_deg Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2-2.0 1.0 ^F cramp_sp HEATING Heating Setpoint 1 68.0-122.0 100.0 F hsp1 Heating Setpoint 2 68.0-122.0 100.0 F hsp2 OAT No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 F oathr_no OAT Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 F oathr_fu Delta T No Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_hr_no Delta T Full Reset Value 0- 25 0.0 ^F dt_hr_fu Current No Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_hr_no Current Full Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_hr_fu Heating Reset Deg. Value 30-30 0.0 ^F hr_deg Heating Ramp Loading 0.2-2.0 1.0 ^F hramp_sp AUTO CHANGEOVER Cool Changeover Setpt 39-122 75.0 F cauto_sp Heat Changeover Setpt 32-115 64.0 F hauto_sp MISCELLANEOUS Switch Limit Setpoint 1 0-100 100 % lim_sp1 Switch Limit Setpoint 2 0-100 100 % lim_sp2 Switch Limit Setpoint 3 0-100 100 % lim_sp3 Reclaim Setpoint 95.0-122.0 122.0 F rsp Reclaim Deadband 5-27 9.0 ^F hr_deadb Head Setpoint 40.0-122.0 95.0 F head_stp Fan Max Speed 0-100 100 % fan_smax

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

120

Table P Maintenance Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS DEFROSTM [Table for display only. Forcing is not supported on this maintenance screen.]

CIR A DEFROST CONTROL Exchanger Frost Factor 0-100 % frost_a Next Sequence Allowed in nnn min def_se_a Defrost Active? True/False mode[19] Defrost Temperature nnn.n F DEFRT_A Defrost Duration nnn min defr_dua Fan Sequence Started n def_fa_a Override State nn over_d_a Mean SST Calculation nnn.n F sst_dm_a Delta: OAT - Mean SST nnn.n ^F delt_a Reference Delta nnn.n ^F delt_r_a Delta - Reference Delta nnn.n F delt_v_a Frost Integrator Gain n.n fr_int_a Defrost Fan Start Cal A 0.00 psi def_ca_a Defrost Fan Offset Cal A 0.00 psi def_of_a CIR B DEFROST CONTROL Exchanger Frost Factor 0-100 % frost_b Next Sequence Allowed in nnn min def_se_b Defrost Active? True/False mode[20] Defrost Temperature nnn.n F DEFRT_B Defrost Duration nnn min defr_dub Fan Sequence Started? n def_fa_b Override State nn over_d_b Mean SST calculation nnn.n F sst_dm_b Delta: OAT - Mean SST nnn.n ^F delt_b Reference Delta nnn.n ^F delt_r_b Delta - Reference Delta nnn.n ^F delt_v_b Frost Integrator Gain n.n fr_int_b Defrost Fan Start Cal B 0.00 psi def_ca_b Defrost Fan Offset Cal B 0.00 psi def_of_b

FANCTRL Cir A SCT Control Point F sct_sp_a Cir A SCT Candidate F sct_fu_a Cir A Fan Drive Power kW drva_pwr Cir A Fan Drive Version drva_ver Cir B SCT Control Point F sct_sp_b Cir B SCT Candidate F sct_fu_b Cir B Fan Drive Power kW drvb_pwr Cir B Fan Drive Version drvb_ver Cir C SCT Control Point F sct_sp_c Cir C SCT Candidate F sct_fu_c Cir C Fan Drive Power kW drvc_pwr Cir C Fan Drive Version drvc_ver

LAST_POR Power On 1: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on1 Power On 1: hour-minute nnnn time_on1 PowerDown 1:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of1 PowerDown 1:hour-minute nnnn time_of1 Power On 2: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on2 Power On 2: hour-minute nnnn time_on2 PowerDown 2:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of2 PowerDown 2:hour-minute nnnn time_of2 Power On 3: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on3 Power On 3: hour-minute nnnn time_on3 PowerDown 3:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of3 PowerDown 3:hour-minute nnnn time_of3 Power On 4: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on4 Power On 4: hour-minute nnnn time_on4 PowerDown 4:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of4 PowerDown 4:hour-minute nnnn time_of4 Power On 5: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on5 Power On 5: hour-minute nnnn time_on5 PowerDown 5:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of5 PowerDown 5:hour-minute nnnn time_of5

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

121

LOADFACT Average Ctrl Water Temp nnn.n F ctrl_avg Differential Water Temp nnn.n F diff_wt Water Delta T nnn.n ^F delta_t Control Point nnn.n F CTRL_PNT Reset Amount nnn.n ^F reset Controlled Temp Error nnn.n ^F tp_error Actual Capacity nnn % cap_t Actual Capacity Limit nnn % cap_lim Current Z Multiplier Val n.n zm Load/Unload Factor nnn.n % smz Active Stage Number nn cur_stag Active Capacity Override nn over_cap

EXV Position Limit Cir A nnn.n % exvlim_a SH Setpoint Circuit A nn.n ^F sh_sp_a Cooler Exchange DT Cir A nn.n ^F pinch_a Cooler Pinch Ctl Point A nn.n ^F pinch_spa EXV Override Circuit A nn ov_exv_a EXV Position Limit Cir B nnn.n % exvlim_b SH Setpoint Circuit B nn.n ^F sh_sp_b Cooler Exchange DT Cir B nn.n ^F pinch_b Cooler Pinch Ctl Point B nn.n ^F pinch_spb EXV Override Circuit B nn ov_exv_b EXV Position Limit Cir C nnn.n % exvlim_c SH Setpoint Circuit C nn.n ^F sh_sp_c Cooler Exchange DT Cir C nn.n ^F pinch_c Cooler Pinch Ctl Point C nn.n ^F pinch_spc EXV Override Circuit C nn ov_exv_c

EHS Ctrl Override nn over_ehs Requested Electric Stage nn eh_stage Electrical Pulldown? True/False Ehspulld Required Cooling Power req_pow Free Cool Override Cir A ov_fc_a Free Cool Override Cir B ov_fc_b

MSTSLAVE MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL Unit is Master or Slave Disable/Master/Slave mstslv Master Control Type* Local/Remote/CCN ms_ctrl Master/Slave Ctrl Active True/False ms_activ Lead Unit is the Master/Slave lead_sel Slave Chiller State 0/1/2/3/4/5/6*** slv_stat Slave Chiller Total Cap 0-100 % slv_capt Lag Start Delay** 1-30 min l_strt_d Lead/Lag Hours Delta* nnnnn hours ll_hr_d Lead/Lag Changeover?** Yes/No ll_chang Lead Pulldown? Yes/No ll_pull Master/Slave Error nn ms_error Max Available Capacity? Yes/No cap_max

OCCDEFCM/ OCC1PO1S OCC2PO2S

Current Mode (1=occup.) 0/1 MODE Current Occp Period # 1 to 8 PER_NO Timed-Override in Effect Yes/No OVERLAST Timed-Override Duration 0-4 hours OVR_HRS Current Occupied Time 00:00-23:59 STRTTIME Current Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 ENDTIME Next Occupied Day Mon-Sun NXTOCDAY Next Occupied Time 00:00-23:59 NXTOCTIM Next Unoccupied Day Mon-Sun NXTUNDAY Next Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 NXTUNTIM Prev Unoccupied Day Mon-Sun PRVUNDAY Prev Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 PRVUNTIM

PR_LIMIT [Table for display only. Used for Cooling and Heat Pump Compressor Envelope.]

Discharge A Temp Average nnn.n F sdt_m_a Discharge A Temp Rate nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_a Discharge A Gas Limit nnn.n F sdtlim_a Suction A Temp Average nnn.n F sst_m_a Discharge A Tp Average 2 nnn.n ^F sdt_m2_a Discharge A Temp Limit2 nnn.n ^F sdtlim2a Discharge B Temp Average nnn.n F sdt_m_b Discharge B Temp Rate nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_b Discharge B Gas Limit nnn.n F sdtlim_b Suction B Temp Average nnn.n F sst_m_b Discharge C Temp Average nnn.n F sdt_m_c Discharge C Temp Rate nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_c Discharge C Gas Limit nnn.n F sdtlim_c Suction C Temp Average nnn.n F sst_m_c

Table P Maintenance Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

122

*Always CCN for the slave chiller. Slave chiller chillstat value. **This decision is consistent for Master chiller only. It shall be set by default to 0 for the slave chiller. This item is true when chiller has loaded its total available capacity tonnage.

*** 0 Off and available 1 On CCN 2 Not used 3 Local mode 4 Restart after power failure 5 Shut down due to fault 6 Communication failure

SERMAINT Reset Maintenance Alert 1 to 6: reset individually 7: reset all

nn S_RESET forcible

OPERATION WARNINGS 1 Refrigerant Charge Normal/Low/Disable charge_m 2 Water Loop Size Normal/Low/Disable wloop_m GENERAL SERVICING DELAYS 3 Pump 1 (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable cpump1_m 4 Pump 2 (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable cpump2_m 5 Reclaim Pump (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable hpump_m 6 Water Filter (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable wfilte_m

Table P Maintenance Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

Table Q Service Display Tables

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS CP_UNABL1,2 Compressor A1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a1

Compressor A2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a2 Compressor A3 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a3 Compressor A4 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a4 Compressor B1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b1 Compressor B2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b2 Compressor B3 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b3 Compressor B4 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b4 Compressor C1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c1 Compressor C2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c2 Compressor C3 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c3 Compressor C4 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c4

MAINTCFG MAINTENANCE CONFIG Servicing Alert Enable/Disable Disable s_alert Refrigerant Charge Ctrl Enable/Disable Disable charge_c Water Loop Control Enable/Disable Disable wloop_c CPump 1 Ctl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 cpump1_c CPump 2 Ctl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 cpump2_c HPump Ctrl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 hpump_c Water Filter Ctrl (days) 0-1000 0 wfilte_c

SERVICE13 Cooler Fluid Type 1-3 1 flui_typ Entering Fluid Control Yes/No No ewt_opt Prop PID Gain Varifan 20.0-20.0 2.0 hd_pg Int PID Gain Varifan 5.0-5.0 0.2 hd_ig Deri PID Gain Varifan 20.0-20.0 0.4 hd_dg EXV A Superheat Setpoint 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_a EXV B Superheat Setpoint 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_b EXV C Superheat Setpoint 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_c EXV MOP Setpoint 30.8-50.0 50.0 F mop_sp High Pressure Threshold 500-640 609 psi hp_th Cooler Heater Delta Spt 1-6 2 ^F heatersp Brine Freeze Setpoint 20-34 34 F lowestsp Minimum LWT Setpoint 38 F mini_lwt Auto Start When SM Lost Enable/Disable Disable auto_sm Auto Z Multiplier Setpt 4-10 6 zm_spt Maximum Z Multiplier 1.0-6.0 6.0 hc_zm Recl Valve Min Position 0-50 20 % min_3w Recl Valve Max Position 20-100 100 % max_3w User Password 0-150 11 N/A use_pass Service Password 0-150 88 N/A ser_pass SPM Board Configuration 0 or 1 for each

digit 00001010 spm_conf Maximum Ducted Fan Speed 0-100 100 % fan_max

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

123

NOTES: 1 Table used to disable compressors for maintenance purposes. The capacity control will consider that these compressors (once set to YES) are failed manually (no alarm will appear). 2 All data will be re-initialized to NO at Power on reset on units using pro_dialog display. For ComfortLink display, data shall be saved. 3 This table shall be downloadable at any time. However, modified value shall not be used by tasks until the unit is in OFF state. This shall not apply to the Varifan gains that shall be modified at any time and used immediately by the head pressure control tasks even if the unit is in operation.

4 This table shall be used for purposes of transplanting the devices on time in the event of a module hardware failure or software upgrade via downloading. It shall be usable only if all items are still null. Afterwards, its access shall be denied. 5 This table shall be used for purposes of transplanting the devices on time in the event of a module hardware failure or software upgrade via downloading. It shall be usable only if all items are still null. Afterwards, its access shall be denied.

UPDHRFAN4 TABLE TO BE USED FOR RUN TIMES AND START UPDATE IN CASE OF CONTROL RETROFIT FAN Operating Hours Circuit A Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana1 Circuit A Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana2 Circuit A Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana3 Circuit A Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana4 Circuit A Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana5 Circuit A Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana6 Circuit B Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb1 Circuit B Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb2 Circuit B Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb3 Circuit B Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb4 Circuit B Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb5 Circuit B Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb6 Circuit C Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc1 Circuit C Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc2 Circuit C Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc3 Circuit C Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc4 Circuit C Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc5 Circuit C Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc6 WATER PUMP

UPDTHOUR5 TABLE TO BE USED FOR RUN TIMES UPDATE IN CASE OF CONTROL RETROFIT Machine Operating Hours nnnnn hours hr_mach Machine Starts nnnnn st_mach Compressor A1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a1 Compressor A2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a2 Compressor A3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a3 Compressor A4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a4 Compressor A1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a1 Compressor A2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a2 Compressor A3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a3 Compressor A4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a4 Compressor B1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b1 Compressor B2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b2 Compressor B3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b3 Compressor B4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b4 Compressor B1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b1 Compressor B2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b2 Compressor B3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b3 Compressor B4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b4 Compressor C1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_c1

Table Q Service Display Tables (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

APPENDIX B CCN TABLES (cont)

124

Table R CCN Alarm Descriptions

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE Thermistor Failure

th-01 Water exchanger Entering Fluid Thermistor th-02 Water exchanger Leaving Fluid Thermistor th-03 Circuit A Defrost Thermistor th-04 Circuit B Defrost Thermistor th-08 Reclaim Condenser Entering Thermistor th-09 Reclaim Condenser Leaving Thermistor th-10 OAT Thermistor th-11 MASTER/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor th-12 Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor th-13 Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor th-14 Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor th-18 Circuit A Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor th-19 Circuit B Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor th-21 Space Temperature Thermistor

Pressure Transducer Failure Pr-01 Circuit A Discharge Transducer Pr-02 Circuit B Discharge Transducer Pr-03 Circuit C Discharge Transducer Pr-04 Circuit A Suction Transducer Pr-05 Circuit B Suction Transducer Pr-06 Circuit C Suction Transducer Pr-07 Circuit A Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pr-08 Circuit B Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer

Communication with Slave Board Failure Co-A1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A1 Co-A2 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A2 Co-A3 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A3 Co-A4 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A4 Co-B1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B1 Co-B2 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B2 Co-B3 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B3 Co-B4 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B4 Co-C1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C1 Co-C2 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C2 Co-C3 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C3 Co-C4 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C4 Co-E1 Loss of communication with EXV Board Number 1 Co-E2 Loss of communication with EXV Board Number 2 Co-F1 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 1 Co-F2 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 2 Co-F3 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 3 Co-O1 Loss of communication with Free Cooling Board Co-O2 Loss of communication with Electrical Heaters Board Co-O3 Loss of communication with Energy Management NRCP2 Board Co-O4 Loss of communication with Heat Reclaim Board Ct-01 Circuit A Welded Contactor Failure Ct-02 Circuit B Welded Contactor Failure Ct-03 Circuit C Welded Contactor Failure

Process Failure FC-n0 No factory configuration FC-01 Illegal factory configuration Number #1 to nn MC-nn Master chiller configuration error Number #1 to nn P-01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection P-05 Circuit A Low Suction Temperature P-06 Circuit B Low Suction Temperature P-07 Circuit C Low Suction Temperature P-08 Circuit A High Superheat P-09 Circuit B High Superheat P-10 Circuit C High Superheat P-11 Circuit A Low Superheat

APPENDIX C CCN ALARMS

125

P-12 Circuit B Low Superheat P-13 Circuit C Low Superheat P-14 Cooler Interlock Failure P-15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure P-16 Compressor A1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-17 Compressor A2 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-18 Compressor A3 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-19 Compressor A4 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-20 Compressor B1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-21 Compressor B2 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-22 Compressor B3 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-23 Compressor B4 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-24 Compressor C1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-25 Compressor C2 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-26 Compressor C3 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-27 Compressor C4 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established P-28 Electrical Box Thermostat or Power Reverse Phase Detection P-29 Loss of communication with System Manager P-30 Master/Slave communication Failure P-31 Unit is in CCN emergency stop P-32 Water pump #1 default P-33 Water pump #2 default P-34 Circuit A Reclaim Operation Failure P-35 Circuit B Reclaim Operation Failure P-37 Circuit A Repeated high discharge gas overrides P-38 Circuit B Repeated high discharge gas overrides P-39 Circuit C Repeated high discharge gas overrides P-40 Circuit A Repeated low suction temp overrides P-41 Circuit B Repeated low suction temp overrides P-42 Circuit C Repeated low suction temp overrides P-43 Low entering water temperature in heating P-97 Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped

Service Failure Sr-nn Service maintenance alert Number # nn (see Table 49)

Compressor Failure A1-01 Compressor A1 Motor Temperature Too High A1-02 Compressor A1 Crankcase Heater Failure A1-03 Compressor A1 High Pressure Switch A1-04 Compressor A1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range A1-05 Compressor A1 Power Reset A1-06 Compressor A1 Low Control Voltage Alert A2-01 Compressor A2 Motor Temperature Too High A2-02 Compressor A2 Crankcase Heater Failure A2-03 Compressor A2 High Pressure Switch A2-04 Compressor A2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range A2-05 Compressor A2 Power Reset A2-06 Compressor A2 Low Control Voltage Alert A3-01 Compressor A3 Motor Temperature Too High A3-02 Compressor A3 Crankcase Heater Failure A3-03 Compressor A3 High Pressure Switch A3-04 Compressor A3 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range A3-05 Compressor A3 Power Reset A3-06 Compressor A3 Low Control Voltage Alert A4-01 Compressor A4 Motor Temperature Too High A4-02 Compressor A4 Crankcase Heater Failure A4-03 Compressor A4 High Pressure Switch A4-04 Compressor A4 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range A4-05 Compressor A4 Power Reset A4-06 Compressor A4 Low Control Voltage Alert B1-01 Compressor B1 Motor Temperature Too High B1-02 Compressor B1 Crankcase Heater Failure B1-03 Compressor B1 High Pressure Switch

Table R CCN Alarm Descriptions (cont)

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE

APPENDIX C CCN ALARMS (cont)

126

B1-04 Compressor B1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range B1-05 Compressor B1 Power Reset B1-06 Compressor B1 Low Control Voltage Alert B2-01 Compressor B2 Motor Temperature Too High B2-02 Compressor B2 Crankcase Heater Failure B2-03 Compressor B2 High Pressure Switch B2-04 Compressor B2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range B2-05 Compressor B2 Power Reset B2-06 Compressor B2 Low Control Voltage Alert B3-01 Compressor B3 Motor Temperature Too High B3-02 Compressor B3 Crankcase Heater Failure B3-03 Compressor B3 High Pressure Switch B3-04 Compressor B3 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range B3-05 Compressor B3 Power Reset B3-06 Compressor B3 Low Control Voltage Alert B4-01 Compressor B4 Motor Temperature Too High B4-02 Compressor B4 Crankcase Heater Failure B4-03 Compressor B4 High Pressure Switch B4-04 Compressor B4 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range B4-05 Compressor B4 Power Reset B4-06 Compressor B4 Low Control Voltage Alert

Compressor Failure C1-01 Compressor C1 Motor Temperature Too High C1-02 Compressor C1 Crankcase Heater Failure C1-03 Compressor C1 High Pressure Switch C1-04 Compressor C1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range C1-05 Compressor C1 Power Reset C1-06 Compressor C1 Low Control Voltage Alert C2-01 Compressor C2 Motor Temperature Too High C2-02 Compressor C2 Crankcase Heater Failure C2-03 Compressor C2 High Pressure Switch C2-04 Compressor C2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range C2-05 Compressor C2 Power Reset C2-06 Compressor C2 Low Control Voltage Alert C3-01 Compressor C3 Motor Temperature Too High C3-02 Compressor C3 Crankcase Heater Failure C3-03 Compressor C3 High Pressure Switch C3-04 Compressor C3 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range C3-05 Compressor C3 Power Reset C3-06 Compressor C3 Low Control Voltage Alert C4-01 Compressor C4 Motor Temperature Too High C4-02 Compressor C4 Crankcase Heater Failure C4-03 Compressor C4 High Pressure Switch C4-04 Compressor C4 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range C4-05 Compressor C4 Power Reset C4-06 Compressor C4 Low Control Voltage Alert V0-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit A V1-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit B V2-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit C

Table R CCN Alarm Descriptions (cont)

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE

APPENDIX C CCN ALARMS (cont)

127

Table S R410A Pressure vs. Temperature Chart

PSIG F C PSIG F C PSIG F C PSIG F C PSIG F C PSIG F C 12 37.7 38.7 114 37.8 3.2 216 74.3 23.5 318 100.2 37.9 420 120.7 49.3 522 137.6 58.7 14 34.7 37.1 116 38.7 3.7 218 74.9 23.8 320 100.7 38.2 422 121.0 49.4 524 137.9 58.8 16 32.0 35.6 118 39.5 4.2 220 75.5 24.2 322 101.1 38.4 424 121.4 49.7 526 138.3 59.1 18 29.4 34.1 120 40.5 4.7 222 76.1 24.5 324 101.6 38.7 426 121.7 49.8 528 138.6 59.2 20 26.9 32.7 122 41.3 5.2 224 76.7 24.8 326 102.0 38.9 428 122.1 50.1 530 138.9 59.4 22 24.5 31.4 124 42.2 5.7 226 77.2 25.1 328 102.4 39.1 430 122.5 50.3 532 139.2 59.6 24 22.2 30.1 126 43.0 6.1 228 77.8 25.4 330 102.9 39.4 432 122.8 50.4 534 139.5 59.7 26 20.0 28.9 128 43.8 6.6 230 78.4 25.8 332 103.3 39.6 434 123.2 50.7 536 139.8 59.9 28 17.9 27.7 130 44.7 7.1 232 78.9 26.1 334 103.7 39.8 436 123.5 50.8 538 140.1 60.1 30 15.8 26.6 132 45.5 7.5 234 79.5 26.4 336 104.2 40.1 438 123.9 51.1 540 140.4 60.2 32 13.8 25.4 134 46.3 7.9 236 80.0 26.7 338 104.6 40.3 440 124.2 51.2 544 141.0 60.6 34 11.9 24.4 136 47.1 8.4 238 80.6 27.0 340 105.1 40.6 442 124.6 51.4 548 141.6 60.9 36 10.1 23.4 138 47.9 8.8 240 81.1 27.3 342 105.4 40.8 444 124.9 51.6 552 142.1 61.2 38 8.3 22.4 140 48.7 9.3 242 81.6 27.6 344 105.8 41.0 446 125.3 51.8 556 142.7 61.5 40 6.5 21.4 142 49.5 9.7 244 82.2 27.9 346 106.3 41.3 448 125.6 52.0 560 143.3 61.8 42 4.5 20.3 144 50.3 10.2 246 82.7 28.2 348 106.6 41.4 450 126.0 52.2 564 143.9 62.2 44 3.2 19.6 146 51.1 10.6 248 83.3 28.5 350 107.1 41.7 452 126.3 52.4 568 144.5 62.5 46 1.6 18.7 148 51.8 11.0 250 83.8 28.8 352 107.5 41.9 454 126.6 52.6 572 145.0 62.8 48 0.0 17.8 150 52.5 11.4 252 84.3 29.1 354 107.9 42.2 456 127.0 52.8 576 145.6 63.1 50 1.5 16.9 152 53.3 11.8 254 84.8 29.3 356 108.3 42.4 458 127.3 52.9 580 146.2 63.4 52 3.0 16.1 154 54.0 12.2 256 85.4 29.7 358 108.8 42.7 460 127.7 53.2 584 146.7 63.7 54 4.5 15.3 156 54.8 12.7 258 85.9 29.9 360 109.2 42.9 462 128.0 53.3 588 147.3 64.1 56 5.9 14.5 158 55.5 13.1 260 86.4 30.2 362 109.6 43.1 464 128.3 53.5 592 147.9 64.4 58 7.3 13.7 160 56.2 13.4 262 86.9 30.5 364 110.0 43.3 466 128.7 53.7 596 148.4 64.7 60 8.6 13.0 162 57.0 13.9 264 87.4 30.8 366 110.4 43.6 468 129.0 53.9 600 149.0 65.0 62 10.0 12.2 164 57.7 14.3 266 87.9 31.1 368 110.8 43.8 470 129.3 54.1 604 149.5 65.3 64 11.3 11.5 166 58.4 14.7 268 88.4 31.3 370 111.2 44.0 472 129.7 54.3 608 150.1 65.6 66 12.6 10.8 168 59.0 15.0 270 88.9 31.6 372 111.6 44.2 474 130.0 54.4 612 150.6 65.9 68 13.8 10.1 170 59.8 15.4 272 89.4 31.9 374 112.0 44.4 476 130.3 54.6 616 151.2 66.2 70 15.1 9.4 172 60.5 15.8 274 89.9 32.2 376 112.4 44.7 478 130.7 54.8 620 151.7 66.5 72 16.3 8.7 174 61.1 16.2 276 90.4 32.4 378 112.6 44.8 480 131.0 55.0 624 152.3 66.8 74 17.5 8.1 176 61.8 16.6 278 90.9 32.7 380 113.1 45.1 482 131.3 55.2 628 152.8 67.1 76 18.7 7.4 178 62.5 16.9 280 91.4 33.0 382 113.5 45.3 484 131.6 55.3 632 153.4 67.4 78 19.8 6.8 180 63.1 17.3 282 91.9 33.3 384 113.9 45.5 486 132.0 55.6 636 153.9 67.7 80 21.0 6.1 182 63.8 17.7 284 92.4 33.6 386 114.3 45.7 488 132.3 55.7 640 154.5 68.1 82 22.1 5.5 184 64.5 18.1 286 92.8 33.8 388 114.7 45.9 490 132.6 55.9 644 155.0 68.3 84 23.2 4.9 186 65.1 18.4 288 93.3 34.1 390 115.0 46.1 492 132.9 56.1 648 155.5 68.6 86 24.3 4.3 188 65.8 18.8 290 93.8 34.3 392 115.5 46.4 494 133.3 56.3 652 156.1 68.9 88 25.4 3.7 190 66.4 19.1 292 94.3 34.6 394 115.8 46.6 496 133.6 56.4 656 156.6 69.2 90 26.4 3.1 192 67.0 19.4 294 94.8 34.9 396 116.2 46.8 498 133.9 56.6 660 157.1 69.5 92 27.4 2.6 194 67.7 19.8 296 95.2 35.1 398 116.6 47.0 500 134.0 56.7 664 157.7 69.8 94 28.5 1.9 196 68.3 20.2 298 95.7 35.4 400 117.0 47.2 502 134.5 56.9 668 158.2 70.1 96 29.5 1.4 198 68.9 20.5 300 96.2 35.7 402 117.3 47.4 504 134.8 57.1 672 158.7 70.4 98 30.5 0.8 200 69.5 20.8 302 96.6 35.9 404 117.7 47.6 506 135.2 57.3 676 159.2 70.7

100 31.2 0.4 202 70.1 21.2 304 97.1 36.2 406 118.1 47.8 508 135.5 57.5 680 159.8 71.0 102 32.2 0.1 204 70.7 21.5 306 97.5 36.4 408 118.5 48.1 510 135.8 57.7 684 160.3 71.3 104 33.2 0.7 206 71.4 21.9 308 98.0 36.7 410 118.8 48.2 512 136.1 57.8 688 160.8 71.6 106 34.1 1.2 208 72.0 22.2 310 98.4 36.9 412 119.2 48.4 514 136.4 58.0 692 161.3 71.8 108 35.1 1.7 210 72.6 22.6 312 98.9 37.2 414 119.6 48.7 516 136.7 58.2 696 161.8 72.1 110 35.5 1.9 212 73.2 22.9 314 99.3 37.4 416 119.9 48.8 518 137.0 58.3 112 36.9 2.7 214 73.8 23.2 316 99.7 37.6 418 120.3 49.1 520 137.3 58.5

APPENDIX D R-410A PRESSURE VS. TEMPERATURE

128

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Mainte- nance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

WEEKLY

Compressor Check Oil Level.

Condenser Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary. Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and industrial applications.

Controls Review Alarm/Alert History.

MONTHLY

Cooler Inspect water pumps.

Controls Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than 2F (1.2C) variance from calibrated thermometer. Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than 5 psi (34.47 kPa) variance.

Refrigerant System Check refrigerant charge level. Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrigerant loss and presence of moisture. Perform leak test.

QUARTERLY

Compressor Check crankcase heater operation. Controls Check chilled water flow switch operation.

Condenser Check all condenser fans for proper operation. Refrigerant System Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks, repair as necessary.

Hydronic System Inspect pump seal, if equipped with a hydronic pump package. Lubricate pump motor as required.

Starter Inspect all contactors.

ANNUALLY

Cooler

Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable. Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated. Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary. Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.

Condenser Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are securely fastened to the motor shaft.

Controls Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components. Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary. Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

Refrigerant System Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop, replace as necessary. Hydronic System Check pump heater operation if equipped.

APPENDIX E MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS

129

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Mainte- nance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

DATE OIL LEVEL CHECK

CONDENSER COIL

CHECK ALARMS / FAULTS

OPERATOR INITIALS REMARKS

APPENDIX E MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

130

Annually

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

APPENDIX E MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RB MAINTENANCE LOG FOR MONTHLY, QUARTERLY, AND ANNUAL CHECKS

Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Operator

UNIT SECTION ACTION UNIT ENTRY

Compressor Check Oil Level yes/no Check Crankcase Heater Operation yes/no Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis yes/no

Cooler

Check Cooler Heater Operation yes/no Check Chiller Water Loop yes/no Check Chilled Water Strainers yes/no Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) PSI Inspect Water Pumps yes/no

Condenser Inspect and Clean All Coils yes/no Check all Condenser Fans for Proper Operation yes/no Check Condition of Condenser Fan Blades yes/no

Controls

General Cleaning and Tightening Connections yes/no Check Chilled Water Flow Switch Operation yes/no Perform Service Test yes/no Confirm Accuracy of Pressure Transducers yes/no Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors yes/no

Starter General Tightening and Cleaning Connections yes/no Inspect All Contactors yes/no

System

Check Refrigerant Charge Level yes/no Verify Operation of EXVs and Record Position 0-100% Record System Superheat deg. F Check Moisture Sight Glass yes/no Perform Leak Test yes/no Check all Refrigerant Joints and Valves for Refrigerant Leaks yes/no

Check Filter Driers yes/no

131

NOTES: 1. Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty. 2. Refer to Installation Instructions for proper Winterization procedure.

APPENDIX E MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RB SEASONAL SHUTDOWN LOG

Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Operator

UNIT SECTION ACTION ENTRY Cooler Isolate and Drain Cooler

Controls Do Not Disconnect Control Power Unless Cooler is Completely Drained

132

The following section is used to configure the UPC Open con- troller which is used when the BACnet1 communication option is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in a separate enclosure below the main control box. TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER The user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is unique on the BACnet network. Perform the following proce- dure to assign an address: 1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw ter-

minal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address each time power is applied to it.

2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the con- troller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens digit of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones digit.

As an example in Fig. A, if the controllers address is 25, point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on the Ones (1's) switch to 5.

Fig. A Address Rotary Switches

BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS The UPC Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address. This Device Instance MUST be unique for the com- plete BACnet system in which the UPC Open controller is in- stalled. The Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number. The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101, but it can be changed using i-Vu Tools or BACView device. By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device Instance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of 1610120.

Fig. B UPC Open Controller

1. BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers).

10's

1's

1

3

45

2

7 8

9

6

0

1

3

45

2

7 8

9

6

0

876

5 4 321

09

876

5 4 321

09

BACNET BAUD RATE DIP SWITCHES

ADDRESS ROTARY SWITCHES

POWER LED

RUN LED

ERROR LED

BACNET CONNECTION (BAS PORT)

BT485 TERMINATOR

Tx2 LED

Rx2 LED

Tx1 LED

Rx1 LED

EIA-485 JUMPERS

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION

133

CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/TP Use the same baud rate and communication settings for all con- trollers on the network segment. The UPC Open controller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this protocol's communications. If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it. Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to enable. Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS4 to E1-485. Set the BMS Protocol DIP switches DS8 through DS5 to MSTP. See Table T.

Table T SW3 Protocol Switch Settings for MS/TP

Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set to EIA-485 and 2W. The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP. Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appropri- ate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. D and Table U.

Table U Baud Selection Table

WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/TP NETWORK The UPC Open controller communicates using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.

Fig. C DIP Switches Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a daisy- chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are 22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance, twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length is 2000 ft. Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E. To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network: 1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's

BAS Port. 2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and grounds. 3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS ports

screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield. NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network segment. 4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC

Open controller's power terminals if they are not currently connected.

5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a module status report. To perform a module status report using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold the FN key then press the . key.

Fig. D Network Wiring

DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 Off Off Off Off On Off

BAUD RATE DS2 DS1 9,600 Off Off 19,200 On Off 38,400 Off On 76,800 On On

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

134

Fig. E BT485 Terminator Installation To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector. NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with it. To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products i-Vu

Open Control System Master Prices.

MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS Recommendations are shown in Tables V and W. The wire jacket and UL temperature rating specifications list two accept- able alternatives. The Halar specification has a higher tempera- ture rating and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard specification, and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to crack in extremely low temperatures. NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum sig- nal integrity.

Table V MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

LEGEND

SPECIFICATION RECOMMMENDATION Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable

Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated) Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.

Color Code Black/White Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire

Jacket SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D. Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.

DC Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor

Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)

UL Temperature Rating SmokeGard 167F (75C) Halar -40 to 302F (40 to 150C)

Voltage 300 Vac, power limited Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better

AWG American Wire Gage CL2P Class 2 Plenum Cable DC Direct Current FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer NEC National Electrical Code O.D. Outside Diameter TC Tinned Copper UL Underwriters Laboratories

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

135

Table W Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors

LEGEND

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad display unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user interface to an Open controller. These items let the user access the controller network information. These are accessory items and do not come with the UPC Open controller. The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will re- quire an additional USB link cable for connection. See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instructions on connecting and using the BACview6 device. To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H), consult Commercial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLERS PROPERTIES The UPC Open device and ComfortLink control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) number and CCN Bus num- ber. The factory default settings for CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively. If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are re- quired, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations must be changed. The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. These configura- tions can be changed using the scrolling marquee display or ac- cessory Navigator handheld device.

ConfigurationCCNCCN.A (CCN Address) ConfigurationCCNCCN.B (CCN Bus Number)

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These configura- tions can be changed using the accessory BACview6 display. Navigation: BACviewCCN Home: Element Comm Stat Element: 1 Bus: 0

Fig. F BACview6 Device Connection

WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS

Wire Type Description Connect Air International Belden RMCORP Contractors

Wire and Cable

MS/TP Network (RS-485)

22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P, TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for specifications.

W221P-22227 25160PV CLP0520LC

24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P, TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for specifications.

W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR

Rnet 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442

AWG American Wire Gage CL2P Class 2 Plenum Cable CMP Communications Plenum Rated FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer TC Tinned Copper

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

136

If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of Lead/ Lag/Standby, all chillers and UPC Opens CCN element num- bers must be changed to a unique number in order to follow CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus. For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/ Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger on the CCN bus. For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/Lag/ Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broadcaster on the CCN bus. TROUBLESHOOTING If there are problems wiring or addressing the UPC Open con- troller, contact Carrier Technical Support.

COMMUNICATION LEDS The LEDs indicate if the controller is communicating with the devices on the network. See Tables X and Y. The LEDs should reflect communication traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs on UPC Open module. REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY The UPC Open controllers 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power outages.

Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the bat- tery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's po- larity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open controller. NETWORK POINTS LIST The points list for the controller is shown in Table Z.

Table X LED Status Indicators

Table Y Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication

IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will be lost.

LED STATUS

Power Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition that caused the fault returns to normal.

Rx Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2. Tx Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is a Tx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Run Lights based on controller status. See Table Y. Error Lights based on controller status. See Table Y.

RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS 2 flashes per second Off Normal 2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error 2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted 2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network 2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted 5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running 5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running 7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout 14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

137

Table Z Network Points List

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME

READ/ WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID

BACNET OBJECT NAME

Active Demand Limit Val DEM_LIM R/W % N/A 0-100 AV:1 dem_lim_1 Air Cond Entering Valv A hr_ea_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:4 hr_ea_a_1 Air Cond Entering Valv B hr_ea_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:5 hr_ea_b_1 Air Cond Leaving Valve A hr_la_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:6 hr_la_a_1 Air Cond Leaving Valve B hr_la_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:7 hr_la_b_1 Alarm Relay Status ALARMOUT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:8 alarmout_1

Alarm State ALM R N/A N/A 0=Normal, 1=Partial,

2=Shutdown AV:2 alm_1

Alert Relay Status ALERT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:9 alert_1 Auto Changeover Active Mode_12 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:10 mode_12_1 Boiler Active Mode_17 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:11 mode_17_1 Boiler Command BOILER R N/A N/A On/Off BV:12 boiler_1 CCN Chiller Start/Stop CHIL_S_S R/W N/A N/A Enable/Disable BV:1500 chil_s_s_1 Chiller Capacity Signal CAPT_010 R volts N/A nn.n AV:3 capt_010_1 Chiller Occupied? CHIL_OCC R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:1501 chil_occ_1 CHWS Temperature - Prime Variable CHWSTEMP R F N/A nnn.n AV:1612 chwstemp_1 Cir A Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_a1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:13 cp_a1_ht_1 Cir A Compressor 1 Output CP_A1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:14 cp_a1_1 Cir A Compressor 2 Heater Out cp_a2_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:15 cp_a2_ht_1 Cir A Compressor 2 Output CP_A2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:16 cp_a2_1 Cir A Compressor 3 Heater Out cp_a3_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:17 cp_a3_ht_1 Cir A Compressor 3 Output CP_A3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:18 cp_a3_1 Cir A Compressor 4 Heater Out cp_a4_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:19 cp_a4_ht_1 Cir A Compressor 4 Output CP_A4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:20 cp_a4_1 Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpa1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:4 cpa1_cur_1 Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp2 cpa2_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:5 cpa2_cur_1 Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp3 cpa3_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:6 cpa3_cur_1 Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp4 cpa4_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:7 cpa4_cur_1 Cir A Discharge Pressure DP_A R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1601 dp_a_1 Cir A EXV Position EXV_A R % N/A 0-100 AV:8 exv_a_1 Cir A Fan Output DO # 1 fan_a1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:21 fan_a1_1 Cir A Fan Output DO # 2 fan_a2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:22 fan_a2_1 Cir A Fan Output DO # 3 fan_a3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:23 fan_a3_1 Cir A Fan Output DO # 4 fan_a4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:24 fan_a4_1 Cir A Fan Output DO # 5 fan_a5 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:25 fan_a5_1 Cir A Fan Output DO # 6 fan_a6 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:26 fan_a6_1 Cir A Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_A R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:9 fan_st_a_1 Cir A Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_a R % N/A 0-100 AV:10 hd_pos_a_1 Cir A Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_A R N/A N/A On/Off BV:27 hgbp_v_a_1 Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpa1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:11 cpa1_tmp_1 Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 2 cpa2_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:12 cpa2_tmp_1 Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 3 cpa3_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:13 cpa3_tmp_1 Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 4 cpa4_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:14 cpa4_tmp_1 Cir A Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:15 capa_t_1 Cir A Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_A R F N/A nnn.n AV:1602 sct_a_1 Cir A Saturated Suction Temp SST_A R F N/A nnn.n AV:1603 sst_a_1 Cir A Suction Gas Temperature SUCT_T_A R F N/A nnn.n AV:16 suct_t_a_1 Cir A Suction Pressure SP_A R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1600 sp_a_1 Cir A Suction Superheat Temp SH_A R ^F N/A nnn.n AV:17 sh_a_1 Cir B Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_b1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:28 cp_b1_ht_1 Cir B Compressor 1 Output CP_B1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:29 cp_b1_1 Cir B Compressor 2 Heater Out cp_b2_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:30 cp_b2_ht_1 Cir B Compressor 2 Output CP_B2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:31 cp_b2_1 Cir B Compressor 3 Heater Out cp_b3_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:32 cp_b3_ht_1 Cir B Compressor 3 Output CP_B3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:33 cp_b3_1 Cir B Compressor 4 Heater Out cp_b4_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:34 cp_b4_ht_1 Cir B Compressor 4 Output CP_B4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:35 cp_b4_1 Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpb1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:18 cpb1_cur_1 Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp2 cpb2_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:19 cpb2_cur_1 Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp3 cpb3_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:20 cpb3_cur_1

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

138

Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp4 cpb4_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:21 cpb4_cur_1 Cir B Discharge Pressure DP_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1605 dp_b_1 Cir B EXV Position EXV_B R % N/A 0-100 AV:22 exv_b_1 Cir B Fan Output DO # 1 fan_b1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:36 fan_b1_1 Cir B Fan Output DO # 2 fan_b2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:37 fan_b2_1 Cir B Fan Output DO # 3 fan_b3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:38 fan_b3_1 Cir B Fan Output DO # 4 fan_b4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:39 fan_b4_1 Cir B Fan Output DO # 5 fan_b5 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:40 fan_b5_1 Cir B Fan Output DO # 6 fan_b6 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:41 fan_b6_1 Cir B Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_B R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:23 fan_st_b_1 Cir B Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_b R % N/A 0-100 AV:24 hd_pos_b_1 Cir B Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_B R N/A N/A On/Off BV:42 hgbp_v_b_1 Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpb1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:25 cpb1_tmp_1 Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 2 cpb2_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:26 cpb2_tmp_1 Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 3 cpb3_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:27 cpb3_tmp_1 Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 4 cpb4_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:28 cpb4_tmp_1 Cir B Percent Total Capacity CAPB_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:29 capb_t_1 Cir B Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_B R F N/A nnn.n AV:30 sct_b_1 Cir B Saturated Suction Temp SST_B R F N/A nnn.n AV:31 sst_b_1 Cir B Suction Gas Temperature UCT_T_B R F N/A nnn.n AV:32 suct_t_b_1 Cir B Suction Pressure SP_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:33 sp_b_1 Cir B Suction Superheat Temp SH_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:34 sh_b_1 Cir C Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_c1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:43 cp_c1_ht_1 Cir C Compressor 1 Output CP_C1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:44 cp_c1_1 Cir C Compressor 2 Heater Out cp_c2_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:45 cp_c2_ht_1 Cir C Compressor 2 Output CP_C2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:46 cp_c2_1 Cir C Compressor 3 Heater Out cp_c3_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:47 cp_c3_ht_1 Cir C Compressor 3 Output CP_C3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:48 cp_c3_1 Cir C Compressor 4 Heater Out cp_c4_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:49 cp_c4_ht_1 Cir C Compressor 4 Output CP_C4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:50 cp_c4_1 Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpc1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:35 cpc1_cur_1 Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp2 cpc2_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:36 cpc2_cur_1 Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp3 cpc3_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:37 cpc3_cur_1 Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp4 cpc4_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:38 cpc4_cur_1 Cir C Discharge Pressure DP_C R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1609 dp_c_1 Cir C EXV Position EXV_C R % N/A 0-100 AV:39 exv_c_1 Cir C Fan Output DO # 1 fan_c1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:51 fan_c1_1 Cir C Fan Output DO # 2 fan_c2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:52 fan_c2_1 Cir C Fan Output DO # 3 fan_c3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:53 fan_c3_1 Cir C Fan Output DO # 4 fan_c4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:54 fan_c4_1 Cir C Fan Output DO # 5 fan_c5 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:55 fan_c5_1 Cir C Fan Output DO # 6 fan_c6 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:56 fan_c6_1 Cir C Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_C R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:40 fan_st_c_1 Cir C Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_c R % N/A 0-100 AV:41 hd_pos_c_1 Cir C Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_C R N/A N/A On/Off BV:57 hgbp_v_c_1 Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpc1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:42 cpc1_tmp_1 Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 2 cpc2_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:43 cpc2_tmp_1 Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 3 cpc3_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:44 cpc3_tmp_1 Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 4 cpc4_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:45 cpc4_tmp_1 Cir C Percent Total Capacity CAPC_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:46 capc_t_1 Cir C Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_C R F N/A nnn.n AV:47 sct_c_1 Cir C Saturated Suction Temp SST_C R F N/A nnn.n AV:48 sst_c_1 Cir C Suction Gas Temperature SUCT_T_C R F N/A nnn.n AV:49 suct_t_c_1 Cir C Suction Pressure SP_C R psi N/A nnn.n AV:50 sp_c_1 Cir C Suction Superheat Temp SH_C R ^F N/A nnn.n AV:51 sh_c_1 Circuit A Fan #1 Hours hr_fana1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:52 hr_fana1_1 Circuit A Fan #2 Hours hr_fana2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:53 hr_fana2_1 Circuit A Fan #3 Hours hr_fana3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:54 hr_fana3_1 Circuit A Fan #4 Hours hr_fana4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:55 hr_fana4_1 Circuit A Fan #5 Hours hr_fana5 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:56 hr_fana5_1 Circuit A Fan #6 Hours hr_fana6 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:57 hr_fana6_1

Table Z Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME

READ/ WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID

BACNET OBJECT NAME

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

139

Circuit B Fan #1 Hours hr_fanb1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:58 hr_fanb1_1 Circuit B Fan #2 Hours hr_fanb2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:59 hr_fanb2_1 Circuit B Fan #3 Hours hr_fanb3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:60 hr_fanb3_1 Circuit B Fan #4 Hours hr_fanb4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:61 hr_fanb4_1 Circuit B Fan #5 Hours hr_fanb5 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:62 hr_fanb5_1 Circuit B Fan #6 Hours hr_fanb6 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:63 hr_fanb6_1 Circuit C Fan #1 Hours hr_fanc1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:64 hr_fanc1_1 Circuit C Fan #2 Hours hr_fanc2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:65 hr_fanc2_1 Circuit C Fan #3 Hours hr_fanc3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:66 hr_fanc3_1 Circuit C Fan #4 Hours hr_fanc4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:67 hr_fanc4_1 Circuit C Fan #5 Hours hr_fanc5 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:68 hr_fanc5_1 Circuit C Fan #6 Hours hr_fanc6 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:69 hr_fanc6_1

Circuit Loading Sequence lead_cir R/W N/A 0 0=Auto

1=A Lead 2=B Lead 3=C Lead

AV:70 lead_cir_1

Compressor A1 Hours HR_CP_A1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:71 hr_cp_a1_1 Compressor A1 Starts st_cp_a1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:72 st_cp_a1_1 Compressor A2 Hours HR_CP_A2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:73 hr_cp_a2_1 Compressor A2 Starts st_cp_a2 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:74 st_cp_a2_1 Compressor A3 Hours HR_CP_A3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:75 hr_cp_a3_1 Compressor A3 Starts st_cp_a3 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:76 st_cp_a3_1 Compressor A4 Hours HR_CP_A4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:77 hr_cp_a4_1 Compressor A4 Starts st_cp_a4 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:78 st_cp_a4_1 Compressor B1 Hours HR_CP_B1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:79 hr_cp_b1_1 Compressor B1 Starts st_cp_b1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:80 st_cp_b1_1 Compressor B2 Hours HR_CP_B2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:81 hr_cp_b2_1 Compressor B2 Starts st_cp_b2 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:82 st_cp_b2_1 Compressor B3 Hours HR_CP_B3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:83 hr_cp_b3_1 Compressor B3 Starts st_cp_b3 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:84 st_cp_b3_1 Compressor B4 Hours HR_CP_B4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:85 hr_cp_b4_1 Compressor B4 Starts st_cp_b4 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:86 st_cp_b4_1 Compressor C1 Hours HR_CP_C1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:87 hr_cp_c1_1 Compressor C1 Starts st_cp_c1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:88 st_cp_c1_1 Compressor C2 Hours HR_CP_C2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:89 hr_cp_c2_1 Compressor C2 Starts st_cp_c2 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:90 st_cp_c2_1 Compressor C3 Hours HR_CP_C3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:91 hr_cp_c3_1 Compressor C3 Starts st_cp_c3 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:92 st_cp_c3_1 Compressor C4 Hours HR_CP_C4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:93 hr_cp_c4_1 Compressor C4 Starts st_cp_c4 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:94 st_cp_c4_1 Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W F N/A nnn.n AV:96 ctrl_pnt_1 Controlled Water Temp CTRL_WT R F N/A nnn.n AV:95 ctrl_wt_1

Cooler Fluid Type flui_typ R N/A 1 1=Water, 2=Brine

3=Low Brine AV:97 flui_typ_1

Cooler Heater Active Mode_06 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:58 mode_06_1 Cooler Heater Command COOLHEAT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:59 coolheat_1 Cooler Pumps Rotation Mode_07 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:60 mode_07_1

Cooler Pumps Sequence pump_seq R/W N/A 0

0=No pump, 1=1 pump only,

2=2 pumps auto,

3=Pump 1 manual,

4=Pump 2 manual

AV:98 pump_seq_1

Cooling Ice Setpoint ice_sp R/W ^F 1 -20-+32 AV:99 ice_sp_1 Cooling Ramp Loading cramp_sp R/W ^F 0 0.2-2.0 AV:100 cramp_sp_1 Cooling Reset Deg. Value cr_deg R/W F 44 -30 -+30 AV:101 cr_deg_1 Cooling Setpoint 1 csp1 R/W F 44 -20.0-+78.8 AV:102 csp1_1 Cooling Setpoint 2 csp2 R/W min N/A -20.0-+78.8 AV:103 csp2_1 Critical Alarm Status CRITICAL R N/A N/A On/Off BV:61 critical_1 Current Full Reset Value v_cr_fu R/W ma 0 0-20 AV:104 v_cr_fu_1 Current No Reset Value v_cr_no R/W ma 0 0-20 AV:105 v_cr_no_1

Table Z Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME

READ/ WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID

BACNET OBJECT NAME

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

140

Current Setpoint SP R F N/A nnn.n AV:3500 chws_sp_1 Defrost Active On Cir A Mode_19 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:62 mode_19_1 Defrost Active On Cir B Mode_20 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:63 mode_20_1 Delta T Full Reset Value dt_cr_fu R/W ^F 0 0-25 AV:106 dt_cr_fu_1 Delta T No Reset Value dt_cr_no R/W ^F 0 0-25 AV:107 dt_cr_no_1 Demand Limit Active Mode_04 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:64 mode_04_1

Demand Limit Type Select lim_sel R/W N/A 0

0=None, 1=Switch control,

2=4-20mA Control

AV:108 lim_sel_1

Electric Heat Active Mode_15 R N/A N/A 0-4/Off BV:67 mode_15_1 Electrical Box Safety ELEC_BOX R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:65 elec_box_1 Electrical Heat Stage EHS_STEP R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:66 ehs_step_1 Element Comm Status R N/A N/A BV:2999 element_stat_1 Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W N/A N/A Enable/Disable BV:68 emstop_1 Equipment Alarm R N/A N/A BV:146 element_alarm_1 External Temperature OAT R F N/A nnn.n AV:109 oat_1 Flow Checked if Pump Off pump_loc R/W N/A Yes Yes/No BV:69 pump_loc_1 Free Cooling Active Mode_13 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:70 mode_13_1 Free Cooling Disable Sw. FC_SW R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:72 fc_sw_1 Free Cooling Disable? FC_DSBLE R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:71 fc_dsble_1 Heat Reclaim Pump Hours hr_hpump R hours N/A nnnnn AV:112 hr_hpump_1 Heat Reclaim Select RECL_SEL R/W N/A N/A Yes/No BV:74 recl_sel_1

Heat/Cool Select HC_SEL R/W N/A N/A 0=Cool, 1=Heat, 2=Auto

AV:110 hc_sel_1

Heat/Cool Status HEATCOOL R N/A N/A 0=Cool, 1=Heat

2=Stand-by, 3=Both

AV:111 heatcool_1

Heating Low EWT Lockout Mode_16 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:73 mode_16_1 High DGT Circuit A Mode_24 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:75 mode_24_1 High DGT Circuit B Mode_25 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:76 mode_25_1 High DGT Circuit C Mode_26 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:77 mode_26_1 High Pres Override Cir A Mode_27 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:78 mode_27_1 High Pres Override Cir B Mode_28 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:79 mode_28_1 High Pres Override Cir C Mode_29 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:80 mode_29_1 Ice Done Storage Switch ICE_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:81 ice_sw_1 Ice Mode in Effect Mode_18 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:82 mode_18_1 Interlock Status LOCK_1 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:83 lock_1_1 Lag Capacity Limit Value LAG_LIM R % N/A nnn AV:113 lag_lim_1 Limit 4-20mA Signal LIM_ANAL R ma N/A nn.n AV:114 lim_anal_1 Limit Switch 1 Status LIM_SW1 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:84 lim_sw1_1 Limit Switch 2 Status LIM_SW2 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:85 lim_sw2_1 Local Schedule R N/A N/A BV:2 schedule_1 Low Suction Circuit A Mode_21 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:86 mode_21_1 Low Suction Circuit B Mode_22 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:87 mode_22_1 Low Suction Circuit C Mode_23 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:88 mode_23_1 mA For 0% Demand Limit lim_ze R/W mA 0 0-20 AV:117 lim_ze_1 mA For 100% Demand Limit lim_mx R/W mA 0 0-20 AV:118 lim_mx_1 Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R hours N/A nnnnn AV:115 hr_mach_1 Machine Starts Number st_mach R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:116 st_mach_1

Master/Slave Select ms_sel R/W N/A 0 0= Disable, 1=Master, 2=Slave

AV:119 ms_sel_1

Minutes Left for Start min_left R min N/A 0-15 AV:120 min_left_1 Night Low Noise Active Mode_09 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:89 mode_09_1 OAT Full Reset Value oatcr_fu R/W F 14 14-125 AV:121 oatcr_fu_1 OAT No Reset Value oatcr_no R/W F 0 0-25 AV:122 oatcr_no_1 Occupied Override Switch OCC_OVSW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:90 occ_ovsw_1 On/Off - Remote Switch ONOFF_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:91 onoff_sw_1 Optional Space Temp SPACETMP R F N/A nnn.n AV:123 spacetmp_1 Pass For All User Config all_pass R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:92 all_pass_1 Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R % N/A nnn AV:1700 cap_t_1

Table Z Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME

READ/ WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID

BACNET OBJECT NAME

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

141

Pump Auto Rotation Delay pump_del R/W hours 48 24-3000 AV:124 pump_del_1 Pump Periodic Start Mode_08 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:93 mode_08_1 Pump Run Status PUMP_DEF R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:94 pump_def_1 Pump Sticking Protection pump_per R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:95 pump_per_1 Pumpdown Pressure Cir A PD_P_A R psi N/A nnn.n AV:125 pd_p_a_1 Pumpdown Pressure Cir B PD_P_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:126 pd_p_b_1 Pumpdown Saturated Tmp A hr_sat_a R F N/A n AV:127 hr_sat_a_1 Pumpdown Saturated Tmp B hr_sat_b R F N/A n AV:128 hr_sat_b_1 Ramp Loading Active Mode_05 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:96 mode_05_1 Ramp Loading Select ramp_sel R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:97 ramp_sel_1 Ready or Running Status READY R N/A N/A On/Off BV:98 ready_1 Reclaim Active Mode_14 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:99 mode_14_1 Reclaim Condenser Flow condflow R N/A N/A On/Off BV:100 condflow_1 Reclaim Condenser Heater cond_htr R N/A N/A On/Off BV:101 cond_htr_1 Reclaim Condenser Pump CONDPUMP R N/A N/A On/Off BV:102 condpump_1 Reclaim Condenser Pump COND_PMP R N/A N/A On/Off BV:103 cond_pmp_1 Reclaim Deadband hr_deadb R/W ^F 9.0 5-27 AV:129 hr_deadb_1 Reclaim Entering Fluid HR_EWT R F N/A nnn.n AV:130 hr_ewt_1 Reclaim Leaving Fluid HR_LWT R F N/A nnn.n AV:131 hr_lwt_1 Reclaim Setpoint rsp R/W F 122 95-122 AV:132 rsp_1 Reclaim Status Circuit A hrstat_a R N/A N/A n AV:133 hrstat_a_1 Reclaim Status Circuit B hrstat_b R N/A N/A n AV:134 hrstat_b_1 Reclaim Valve Position hr_v_pos R % N/A nnn.n AV:135 hr_v_pos_1 Remote Heat/Cool Switch HC_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:104 hc_sw_1 Remote Interlock Status REM_LOCK R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:105 rem_lock_1 Remote Reclaim Switch RECL_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:106 recl_sw_1 Remote Setpoint Switch SETP_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:107 setp_sw_1 Reset in Effect Mode_03 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:108 mode_03_1 Reset/Setpoint 4-20mA In SP_RESET R ma N/A nn.n AV:136 sp_reset_1 Rotate Pumps Now? ROT_PUMP R/W N/A N/A Yes/No BV:109 rot_pump_1

Run Status STATUS R N/A N/A

0=Off, 1=Running

2=Stopping, 3= Delay

4=Tripout, 5=Ready

6=Override, 7=Defrost

8=Run Test, 9=Test

AV:137 status_1

Running Status RUNNING R N/A N/A On/Off BV:110 running_1 Second Setpoint in Use Mode_02 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:111 mode_02_1 Setpoint Occupied? SP_OCC R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:112 sp_occ_1 Shutdown Indicator State SHUTDOWN R N/A N/A On/Off BV:113 shutdown_1 Space T Full Reset Value spacr_fu R F 14 14-125 AV:138 spacr_fu_1 Space T No Reset Value spacr_no R F 14 14-125 AV:139 spacr_no_1 Staged Loading Sequence seq_typ R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:114 seq_typ_1 Starts Max During 1 Hour st_cp_mx R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:141 st_cp_mx_1 Starts/hr From Last 24 h st_cp_av R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:140 st_cp_av_1 Startup Delay in Effect Mode_01 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:115 mode_01_1 Sub Condenser Temp Cir A hr_subta R F N/A nnn.n AV:142 hr_subta_1 Sub Condenser Temp Cir B hr_subtb R F N/A nnn.n AV:143 hr_subtb_1 Subcooling Temperature A hr_subca R F N/A nnn.n AV:144 hr_subca_1 Subcooling Temperature B hr_subcb R F N/A nnn.n AV:145 hr_subcb_1 Superheat Override Cir A Mode_30 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:116 mode_30_1 Superheat Override Cir B Mode_31 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:117 mode_31_1 Superheat Override Cir C Mode_32 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:118 mode_32_1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 lim_sp1 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:146 lim_sp1_1 Switch Limit Setpoint 2 lim_sp2 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:147 lim_sp2_1 Switch Limit Setpoint 3 lim_sp3 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:148 lim_sp3_1

System Cooling Demand Level R N/A N/A AV:9006 cool_demand_level_ 1

System Demand Limiting R N/A N/A BV:3 dem_lmt_act_1 System Manager Active Mode_10 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:119 mode_10_1

Table Z Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME

READ/ WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID

BACNET OBJECT NAME

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

142

LEGEND

System OAT Master R N/A N/A AV:80001 mstr_oa_temp_1 Unit Off to On Delay off_on_d R/W min 1 1-15 AV:149 off_on_d_1 User Defined Analog 1 R N/A N/A AV:2901 user_analog_1_1 User Defined Analog 2 R N/A N/A AV:2902 user_analog_2_1 User Defined Analog 3 R N/A N/A AV:2903 user_analog_3_1 User Defined Analog 4 R N/A N/A AV:2904 user_analog_4_1 User Defined Analog 5 R N/A N/A AV:2905 user_analog_5_1 User Defined Binary 1 R N/A N/A BV:2911 user_binary_1_1 User Defined Binary 2 R N/A N/A BV:2912 user_binary_2_1 User Defined Binary 3 R N/A N/A BV:2913 user_binary_3_1 User Defined Binary 4 R N/A N/A BV:2914 user_binary_4_1 User Defined Binary 5 R N/A N/A BV:2915 user_binary_5_1 Water Cond Enter Valve A hr_ew_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:120 hr_ew_a_1 Water Cond Enter Valve B hr_ew_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:121 hr_ew_b_1 Water Cond Leaving Val A hr_lw_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:122 hr_lw_a_1 Water Cond Leaving Val B hr_lw_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:123 hr_lw_b_1 Water Exchanger Entering Temp EWT R F N/A nnn.n AV:150 ewt_1 Water Exchanger Leaving Temp LWT R F N/A nnn.n AV:151 lwt_1 Water Pump #1 Command CPUMP_1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:124 cpump_1_1 Water Pump #1 Hours hr_cpum1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:152 hr_cpum1_1 Water Pump #2 Command CPUMP_2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:125 cpump_2_1 Water Pump #2 Hours hr_cpum2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:153 hr_cpum2_1

Table Z Network Points List (cont)

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT NAME

READ/ WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID

BACNET OBJECT NAME

CCN Carrier Comfort Network CHWS Chilled Water Setpoint DGT Discharge Gas Temperature DO Discrete Output EWT Entering Water Temperature EXV Electronic Expansion Valve OAT Outdoor Air Temperature R Read W Write

APPENDIX F BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

143

LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS The 30RB low ambient control is a variable frequency drive (VFD) that varies the speed of the lead condenser fan in each circuit to maintain the calculated head pressure control set point. The fan speed varies in proportion to the 0 to 10 vdc an- alog signal produced by the AUX1 fan board. The display indi- cates motor speed in Hz by default. These units may use a Sie- mens Micromaster 420/440 VFD or a Schneider Altivar 21 and 212. The Schneider Altivar VFD performs the same functions as Siemens drive. However, there are different control wiring connections and parameter programming. Siemens VFD Operation The low ambient temperature head pressure controller is pre- configured to operate from a 0 to 10 vdc analog input signal present on terminals 3 (AIN+) and 4 (AIN). Jumpers between terminals 2 and 4 and terminals 5 and 8 are required for proper operation. The drive is enabled based on an increase in the ana- log input signal above 0 vdc. Output is varied from 0 Hz to 60 Hz as the analog signal increases from 0 vdc to 10 vdc. When the signal is at 0 vdc the drive holds the fan at 0 rpm. The head pressure control set point is not adjustable. The MBB deter- mines the control set point as required. Siemens VFD Replacement If the controller is replaced the parameters in Table AA must be configured. See Fig. G and H.

Table AA Siemens VFD Head Pressure Control Parameters

*Remove jumper from terminals 5 and 8 (or terminals 5 and 9 for 575-v units) before configuring parameter. Reinstall jumper after configuration is complete.

Fig. G Low Ambient Temperature Control Power Wiring

Fig. H Low Ambient Temperature Control Signal Wiring

DIP switch settings: DIP switch 1 is not used. DIP switch 2 is the motor frequency: OFF = 50 Hz,

ON = 60 Hz) Siemens VFD Programming Parameter values can be altered via the operator panel. The op- erator panel features a five-digit, seven-segment display for displaying parameter numbers and values, alarm and fault mes- sages, set points, and actual values. See Fig. I. See Table AB for additional information on the operator panel. NOTE: The operator panel motor control functions are disabled by default. To control the motor via the operator panel, parame- ter P0700 should be set to 1 and P1000 set to 1. The operator panel can be fitted to and removed from the drive while power is applied. If the operator panel has been set as the I/O control (P0700 = 1), the drive will stop if the operator panel is removed.

Fig. I Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller

PARAMETER* VALUE DESCRIPTION P0010 1 Enter Quick Commissioning P0311 1140 Rated Motor Speed P3900 1 End of Quick Commissioning P0003 3 User Access Level P0757 0.50 Control Signal Scaling Offset P0761 0.50 Control Signal Scaling Offset P1210 6 Automatic Restart Setting P1310 10 Continuous Boost Parameter

T2

L3

L2

L 1

T3

W V

D C

D C

L L1

N L2

L3

+ -

U

T1 TO CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

ON

1 2 3 4

98765

DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 24V+ 0V

AOUT+ AOUT- P+ N-

12 13 14 15

DIP SWITCH 2

RLB RLC

10 11

10V+ 0V AIN+ AIN-

+ 0-10 VDC FROM FAN BOARD

ENABLE JUMPER

NOTE: For 575-v units, jumper terminals are 5 and 9.

APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES

144

Changing Single Digits in Parameter Values with the Siemens VFD Operator Panel To change the parameters value rapidly, the single digits of the dis- play can be changed by performing the following actions: 1. Press (parameter button) to enter the parameter value

changing level.

2. Press (function button) to cause the far right digit to blink.

3. Change the value of this digit by pressing or .

4. Press again to cause the next digit to blink.

5. Perform steps 2 to 4 until the required value is displayed.

6. Press to exit the parameter value changing level. NOTE: The function button may also be used to acknowledge a fault condition. Quick Commissioning with the Siemens VFD Operator Panel It is important that parameter P0010 be used for commission- ing and P0003 be used to select the number of parameters to be accessed. The P0010 parameter allows a group of parameters to be selected that will enable quick commissioning. Parame- ters such as motor settings and ramp settings are included. At the end of the quick commissioning sequences, P3900 should be selected, which, when set to 1, will carry out the necessary motor calculations and clear all other parameters (not included

in P0010=1) to the default settings. This will only occur in Quick Commissioning mode. See Fig. J. Reset the Siemens VFD to Factory Default To reset all parameters to the factory default settings, the fol- lowing parameters should be set as follows: 1. Set P0010=30. 2. Set P0970 =1. NOTE: The reset process can take up to 3 minutes to complete. Troubleshooting the Siemens VFD with the Operating Panel Warnings and faults are displayed on the operating panel with Axxx and Fxxx. The individual messages are shown in Table AC. If the motor fails to start, check the following: Power on T1, T2 and T3. Configuration jumpers in place. Control signal between 1 vdc and 10 vdc on terminals 3 and 4. P0010 = 0. P0700 = 2.

Siemens VFD Fault Messages (Tables AC and AD) In the event of a failure, the drive switches off and a fault code appears on the display. NOTE: To reset the fault code, use one of the following methods: 1. Cycle the power to the drive.

2. Press the button on the operator panel.

P

Fn

Fn

P

Fn

Table AB Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Operator Panel

PANEL/BUTTON FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Indicates Status The LCD displays the settings currently used by the converter.

Start Converter The Start Converter button is disabled by default. To enable this button set P0700 = 1.

Stop Converter Press the Stop Converter button to cause the motor to come to a standstill at the selected ramp down rate. Disabled by default, to enable set P0700 = 1. Press the Stop Converter button twice (or hold) to cause the motor to coast to a standstill. This function is always enabled.

Change Direction Press the Change Direction button to change direction of rotation of the motor. Reverse is indicated by a minus () sign or a flashing decimal point. Disabled by default, to enable set P0700 = 1.

Jog Motor Press the Jog Motor button while the inverter has no output to cause the motor to start and run at the preset jog frequency. The motor stops when the button is released. The Jog Motor button is not enabled when the motor is running.

Functions

Use the Functions button to view additional information. Press and hold the button to display the following information starting from any parameter during operation: 1. DC link voltage (indicated by d units V). 2. Output current. (A) 3. Output frequency (Hz) 4. Output voltage (indicated by o units V). 5. The value selected in P0005 (If P0005 is set to show any of the above [3, 4, or 5] then this will not be shown when toggling through the menu). Press the Functions button repeatedly to toggle through displayed values.

Jump Function Press of the Fn button from any parameter (rXXXX or PXXXX) to immediately jump to R0000, when another parameter can be changed, if required. Return to R0000 and press the Functions again to return.

Access Parameters Allows access to the parameters.

Increase Value Press the Increase Value button to increase the displayed value. To change the Frequency Setpoint using the operator panel set P1000 = 1.

Decrease Value Press the Decrease Value button to decrease the displayed value. To change the Frequency Setpoint using the operating panel set P1000 = 1.

0

jog

Fn

P

APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES (cont)

145

Fig. J Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Flow Chart Quick Commissioning

P0010 Start Quick Commissioning 0 Ready to Run 1 Quick Commissioning 30 Factory Setting NOTE: P0010 must always be set back to 0 before operating the motor. However if P3900 = 1 is set after commissioning this is done automatically.

P0100 Operation 0 Power in kW; f default 50 Hz 1 Power in hp; f default 60 Hz 2 Power in kW; f default 60 Hz NOTE: Settings 0 and 1 should be changed using the DIP switches to allow permanent setting.

P0304 Rated Motor Voltage* 10 V 2000 V Nominal motor voltage (V) from rating plate

P0305 Rated Motor Current* 0 2 x inverter rated current (A) Nominal motor current (A) from rating plate

P0307 Rated Motor Power* 0 kW 2000 kW Nominal motor power (kW) from rating plate. If P0100 = 1, values will be in hp

P0310 Rated Motor Frequency* 12 Hz 650 Hz Nominal motor frequency (Hz) from rating plate

P0311 Rated Motor Speed* 0 4000 1/min Nominal motor speed (rpm) from rating plate

P0700 Selection of Command Source (on/off/reverse) 0 Factory Setting 1 Basic Operator Panel 2 Terminal/Digital Inputs (default)

P1000 Selection of Frequency Setpoint 0 No frequency setpoint 1 Operator panel frequency control 2 Analog Setpoint (default)

P1080 Min. Motor Frequency Sets minimum motor frequency (0-650Hz) at which the motor will run independent of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.

P1082 Max. Motor Frequency Sets maximum motor frequency (0-650Hz) at which the motor will run at independent of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.

P1120 Ramp-Up Time 0 s - 650 s Time taken for the motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency.

P1121 Ramp-Down Time 0 s - 650 s Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency down to a standstill.

P3900 End Quick Commissioning 0 End Quick Commissioning without motor calculation or

factory reset. 1 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation and

factory reset (Recommended) 2 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation and with

I/O reset 3 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation but

without I/O reset*Motor-specific parameters see motor rating plate. NOTE: Shaded boxes are for reference only.

APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES (cont)

146

LEGEND I2t Current Squared Time

Table AC Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Fault Messages

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING

F0001 Overcurrent

Motor power does not correspond to the inverter power

Motor lead short circuit Ground fault

Check the following: 1. Motor power (P0307) must correspond to inverter power (P0206) 2. Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or ground faults 3. Motor parameters must match the motor in use 4. Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded After Steps 1-4 have been checked, increase the ramp time (P1120) and reduce the boost level (P1310, P1311, P1312).

F0002 Overvoltage

DC-link voltage (r0026) exceeds trip level (P2172)

Overvoltage can be caused either by too high main supply voltage or if motor is in regenera- tive mode

Regenerative mode can be caused by fast ramp downs or if the motor is driven from an active load

Check the following: 1. Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate 2. DC-link voltage controller must be enabled (P1240) and have parameters set

correctly 3. Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of load

F0003 Undervoltage

Main supply failed Shock load outside specified limits

Check the following: 1. Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate 2. Supply must not be susceptible to temporary failures or voltage reductions

F0004 Drive

Overtemperature

Ambient temperature outside of limits Fan failure

Check the following: 1. Fan must turn when inverter is running 2. Pulse frequency must be set to default value 3. Air inlet and outlet points are not obstructed 4. Ambient temperature could be higher than specified for the drive.

F0005 Drive I2t

Drive overloaded Duty cycle too demanding Motor power (P0307) exceeds drive power

capability (P0206)

Check the following: 1. Load duty cycle must lie within specified limits 2. Motor power (P0307) must match drive power (P0206)

F0011 Motor

Overtemperature I2t

Motor overloaded Motor data incorrect Long time period operating at low speeds

1. Check motor data 2. Check loading on motor 3. Boost settings too high (P1310, P1311, P1312) 4. Check parameter for motor thermal time constant 5. Check parameter for motor I2t warning level

F0041 Stator Resistance

Measurement Failure

Stator resistance measurement failure 1. Check if the motor is connected to the drive 2. Check that the motor data has been entered correctly

F0051 Parameter EEPROM Fault

Reading or writing of the non-volatile parameter storage has failed

1. Factory reset and new parameters set 2. Replace drive

F0052 Powerstack Fault

Reading of the powerstack information has failed or the data is invalid

Replace drive

F0060 Asic Timeout

Internal communications failure 1. Acknowledge fault 2. Replace drive if repeated

F0070 Communications

Board Setpoint Error

No setpoint received from communications board during telegram off time

1. Check connections to the communications board 2. Check the master

F0071 No Data for USS (RS232

Link) During Telegram Off Time

No response during telegram off time via USS (BOP link)

1. Check connections to the communications board 2. Check the master

F0072 No Data from USS (RS485

Link) During Telegram Off Time

No response during telegram off time via USS (COM link)

1. Check connections to the communications board 2. Check the master

F0080 Analog Input -

Lost Input Signal

Broken wire Signal out of limits

Check connection to analog input

F0085 External Fault

External fault is triggered via terminal inputs Disable terminal input for fault trigger

F0101 Stack Overflow

Software error or processor failure 1. Run self test routines 2. Replace drive

F0221 PI Feedback

Below Minimum Value

PID Feedback below minimum value P2268 1. Change value of P2268 2. Adjust feedback gain

F0222 PI Feedback Above

Maximum Value

PID Feedback above maximum value P2267 1. Change value of P2267 2. Adjust feedback gain

F0450 (Service Mode Only) BIST Tests Failure

Fault value 1 Some of the power section tests have failed 2 Some of the control board tests have failed 4 Some of the functional tests have failed 8 Some of the IO module tests have failed 16 The Internal RAM has failed its check on

power-up

1. Inverter may run but certain actions will not function correctly 2. Replace drive

APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES (cont)

147

LEGEND I2t Current Squared Time

Schneider Altivar VFD Operation The low ambient temperature head pressure controller is pre- configured to operate from a 0 to 10 vdc analog input signal present on terminals VIA and CC. A jumper between terminals P24 and F is required for proper operation. The drive is en- abled based on an increase in the analog input signal above 0 vdc. Output is varied from 0 Hz to 60 Hz as the analog signal increases from 0 vdc to 10 vdc. When the signal is at 0 vdc the drive holds the fan at 0 rpm. The head pressure control set point is not adjustable. The MBB determines the control set point as required. The operating panel is shown in Fig. K. Re- fer to the Quick Start Guide for how to access the program- ming mode, or the documentation available at http:// www.schneider-electric.com for a complete set of VFD param- eters, fault codes and troubleshooting information.

Schneider Altivar VFD Replacement For Altivar 212 VFDs, if the controller is replaced the parame- ters in Table AE must be configured. It is recommended that the configuration of the VFD is verified per Table AE prior to pro- ceeding. Also, the following must be wired (see Fig. G and H): 1. A jumper must be in place from terminal P24 to F. 2. Connect the red and black wires from fan board 0-10 VDC

output to terminal VIA and CC respectively. 3. Connect the motor power wires T1, T2 and T3 respec-

tively to terminal U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 of the drive. 4. Connect the line power wires L1, L2 and L3 from control

box respectively to terminal R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 of the drive.

Table AD Siemens VFD Alarm Messages

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING

A0501 Current Limit

Motor power does not correspond to the drive power

Motor leads are too short Ground fault

1. Check whether the motor power corresponds to the drive power 2. Check that the cable length limits have not been exceeded 3. Check motor cable and motor for short-circuits and ground faults 4. Check whether the motor parameters correspond with the motor being used 5. Check the stator resistance 6. Increase the ramp-up-time 7. Reduce the boost 8. Check whether the motor is obstructed or overloaded

A0502 Overvoltage Limit

Mains supply too high Load regenerative Ramp-down time too short

1. Check that mains supply voltage is within allowable range 2. Increase ramp down times NOTE: If the vdc-max controller is active, ramp-down times will be automatically increased

A0503 Undervoltage Limit

Mains supply too low Short mains interruption

Check main supply voltage (P0210)

A0504 Drive

Overtemperature

Warning level of inverter heat-sink temperature (P0614) is exceeded, resulting in pulse fre- quency reduction and/or output frequency reduc- tion depending on parameters set (P0610)

1. Check if ambient temperature is within specified limits 2. Check load conditions and duty cycle 3. Check if fan is turning when drive is running

A0505 Drive I2t

Warning level is exceeded; current will be reduced if parameters set (P0610 = 1)

Check if duty cycle is within specified limits

A0506 Drive Duty Cycle

Heatsink temperature and thermal junction model are outside of allowable range

Check if duty cycle is within specified limits

A0511 Motor

Overtemperature I2t

Motor overloaded Check the following: 1. P0611 (motor I2t time constant) should be set to appropriate value 2. P0614 (Motor I2t overload warning level) should be set to suitable level 3. Are long periods of operation at low speed occurring 4. Check that boost settings are not too high

A0541 Motor Data

Identification Active

Motor data identification (P1910) selected or run- ning

Wait until motor identification is finished

A0600 RTOS Overrun Warning

Software error

Table AE Schneider Altivar 212 VFD Operating Parameters

PARAMETER NAME VALUE uLu Rated Motor Voltage Nominal motor voltage(V) from rating plate F201 VIA Speed Reference Level 1 5 F202 VIA Output Frequency Level 1 0 F203 VIA Speed Reference Level 2 100 F204 VIA Output Frequency Level 2 60 F401 Slip compensation 60% F415 Rated Motor Current Nominal motor current(A) from rating plate F417 Rated Motor Speed Nominal motor speed(RPM) from rating plate F701 Keypad display: % or A/V 1 tHr Motor Rated Current Overload Setting Nominal motor current(A) from rating plate uL Rated Motor Frequency 60 Hz FH Maximum Frequency 60 Hz LL Low Speed 0 Hz UL High Speed 60 Hz

ACC Ramp-up Time 10 Sec dEC Ramp-down Time 10 Sec cnod Remote Mode Start/Stop Control 0 (Control terminal logic inputs)

fnod Remote Mode Primary Speed reference Source 1 (VIA)

APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES (cont)

148

Fig. K Schneider Altivar 212 VFD Display Panel

RUN PRG MON

%

Hz

MODELoc Rem

ENT

RUN STOP

13

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

9

10

11

14

12

8

CALL OUT LED/KEY DESCRIPTION

1 Display RUN LED

Illuminates when a run command is applied to the drive controller. Flashes when a speed reference is present with the run command.

2 Display PRG LED

Illuminates when Programming mode is active. Flashes when -GrU menus are active.

3 Display MON LED

Illuminates when Monitoring mode is active. Flashes in fault record display mode.

4 Display Unit

4 digits, 7 segments

5 Display Unit LED

The % LED illuminates when a displayed numeric value is a percentage. The Hz LED illuminates when a displayed numeric value is in hertz.

6 Up/Down arrows

Depending on the mode, use the arrows to: navigate between the menus, change a value, or change the speed reference when Up/Down LED (7) is lit.

7 Up/Down LED

Illuminates when the Up/Down arrows are controlling the speed reference.

8 Loc/Rem LED

Illuminates when Local mode is selected.

CALL OUT LED/KEY DESCRIPTION

9

MODE Press to select the Keypad mode. Modes are: Run mode (default on power-up), Programming mode, and Monitoring mode. Can also be used to go back to the previous menu.

10 Loc/Rem Switches between Local and Remote modes.

11 ENT Press to display a parameters value or to save a changed value.

12 RUN LED Illuminates when the Run key is enabled.

13 RUN Pressing this key when the RUN LED is illuminated starts the drive controller.

14

STOP Stop/reset key. In Local mode, pressing the STOP key causes the drive controller to stop based on the setting of parameter F721. In Remote mode, pressing the STOP key causes the drive controller to stop based on the setting of parameter F603. The display will indicate a flashing E. If F735 is set to 0 (default setting), press- ing the stop key twice will reset all resettable faults if the fault condition has been resolved.

APPENDIX G SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES (cont)

150

INDEX Actual start-up 42 Alarms and alerts 60

Alarm codes 62-67 Alarm descriptions 68, 31-33

BACnet communication option 40-50 Boards

Board addresses 16 Capacity control 20

Capacity control overrides 23 Compressor stages, circuit cycling 21 Compressor starts and run hours 20

CCN ComfortLink communication wiring 16, 17 Interface 16

CCN alarm description 31-33 CCN control 30 CCN global schedule 29 CCN tables 14-30 Chilled water flow switch 56 Compressor protection 59 Compressors 59

Oil charge 59 Replacement 59 System burnout cleanup procedure 59

Condenser coils Cleaning RTPF coils 56 Cleaning MCHX coils 58

Condenser fans 58 Configuration point conventions 3 Configuration set point limits 30 Control methods 29

CCN control 30 CCN global schedule 29 Switch control 29 Time schedule 29 Unit run status 30

Controls 4-42 Board addresses 16 Capacity control 20 Carrier Comfort Network interface 16 ComfortLink display menu structure 5 Configuring the master chiller 18 Configuring the slave chiller 19 Control methods 29 Control module communication 16 Cooler pump control 29 Demand limit 39 Dual chiller control 17 Electronic expansion valve board 8, 9 Emergency on/off switch 14 Enable-off-remote contact switch 14 Energy management module 14, 14 Energy management module

inputs and outputs 15 EXV1 board inputs and outputs 8 EXV2 inputs and outputs 9 Fan board 1 outputs 11 Fan board 2 outputs 12 Fan board 3 inputs and outputs 13 Fan boards 10 General 3-4 Heat reclaim 48 Local equipment network 16 Low ambient head pressure

control 26, 52-57 Machine control 29 Main Base Board 5 Main Base Board inputs and outputs 6 Minimum load control 17 Minutes off time 17 Navigator module 4 Ramp loading 17 Remote alarm and alert relays 41 Reverse rotation board 14 Scroll protection module (SPM) 7 Scroll protection module inputs, outputs 8 Scrolling marquee display 3 Temperature reset 31

Cooler head bolts tightening 55, 56-57 Cooler protection 55

Chilled water flow switch 56 Flow rate 56 Freeze protection 55 Loss of fluid flow protection 55 Low fluid temperature 55 Plug components 55 Tightening cooler head bolts 55, 56-57 Tube plugging 55

Cooler pump control 29 Cooling set point selection 30

4 to 20 mA input 30 Configuration set point limits 30 Control methods and cooling set points

table 30 Dual switch 30 Ice mode 31 Set point 1 30 Set point 2 30 Set point occupancy 31

Crankcase heaters 59 Demand limit 39

switch controlled 39 switch controlled configuration table 39 CCN controlled 41 Externally powered 40 Externally powered demand limit

configuration table 40 Electronic expansion valve 7, 52-54 Cutaway view of 52

Filter drier 53 Inspecting/opening 53 Installing motor 53 Liquid line service valve 53 Moisture liquid indicator 53 Troubleshooting procedure 52

Flow rate 56 Freeze protection 55 Head pressure control 24 Fan staging 25 High efficiency variable condenser fans 27 Low ambient 26 Standard unit 24 Heat Reclaim Option 48 EMM Board 14 Mode 14 46 Operation 50 Control Schematic 92 Local Display Table 0 CCN Display Table 18 Alarm Code Co.04 62, 71 Alarm Code P.15 62, 74 Alarm Code P.34 62, 75 Alarm Code P.35 62, 75 Alarm Code Pr.07 62, 76 Alarm Code Pr.08 62, 76 Alarm Code th.08 62, 77 Alarm Code th.09 62, 77 Alarm Code th.18 62, 78 Alarm Code th.19 62, 78 High-efficiency variable condenser fans 26 Alarms, common 28 Alarms, details 66 Danfoss VLT required configurations 26 Fan drive operation 26 Parameters, 6-fan circuits 27 Parameters, common 27 Parameters reset at power cycle 27 High-side protection 59 Local display tables 0-13 Loss of fluid flow protection 55 Low ambient head pressure control 26

Danfoss VLT required configurations 26

Siemens or Schneider operating instructions 52-57

Low fluid temperature 55 Low-side protection 59 Machine control 29 Maintenance 60, 35-38 Minimum and maximum cooler flow

rates table 44 Minimum fluid loop volume 43 Modular unit combinations 3 Navigator display 4

Alarms mode 13 Configuration mode 6-8 Inputs mode 5 Operating mode 12 Outputs mode 5-6 Pressure mode 3 Run status mode 0-1 Service test mode 2 Set points mode 4 Temperature mode 3 Time clock mode 9-12

Navigator module 4 Adjusting the backlight brightness 4 Adjusting the contrast 4

Operating limitations 43 Flow rate requirements 43

Minimum and maximum cooler flow rates table 44 Minimum fluid loop volume 43 Temperatures 43 Voltage 43

Plug components 55 Recommended maintenance schedule 60, 35-38 Refrigerant circuit 58 Relief devices 59

High-side protection 59 Low-side protection 59 Safety considerations 1 Safety devices 59

Compressor protection 59 Crankcase heaters 59

Scrolling marquee display 3 Alarms mode 106 Configuration mode 6-8 Display menu structure 5 Inputs mode 5 Operating mode 12 Outputs mode 5-6 Pressure mode 3 Run status mode 0-1 Service test mode 2 Set points mode 4 Temperature mode 3 Time clock mode 9-12

Service 52-60 Compressors 59 Condenser fans 58 Cooler protection 55 Electronic expansion valve (EXV) 52 MCHX coil maintenance and cleaning 58 Refrigerant circuit 58 Relief devices 59 RTPF coil maintenance and cleaning 56 Safety devices 59

Start-up 42 Actual start-up 42 Operating limitations 43 Pre-start-up 42 System check 42

Start-up and operation. See Start-up Checklist Start-up checklist Cl-153 to Cl-162 Switch control 29 System check 42 Temperature limits

Standard units 43 Low ambient operation 43

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg 151 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T

2021 Carrier

Temperature reset 31 4 to 20mA set point control 32

4 to 20mA temperature reset 36 4 to 20mA temperature reset

configuration 37 Chilled water temperature control 33 Outdoor air temperature reset 33 Outdoor air temperature reset

configuration table 43 Space temperature reset 36 Space temperature reset

configuration 37 Water temperature difference reset 32

Water temperature difference reset configuration 34

Thermistors 78 Compressor suction gas temperature 78

Condensing entering fluid sensor 78 Condensing leaving fluid sensor 78 Cooler entering fluid sensor 78

Cooler leaving fluid sensor 78 Dual chiller LWT 78 Outdoor air temperature 78 Remote space temperature 78 Subcooled condenser gas

temperature 78 Typical space temperature sensor

wiring 79 Time schedule 29 Transducers 79 Troubleshooting 62-93

Sensors 78 Service test 82 Thermistors 78

Transducers 79 Tube plugging 55 Variable speed fan motors Alarm details 66

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg CL-1 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RB LIQUID CHILLER

A. PROJECT INFORMATION Job Name _______________________________________ Address ________________________________________ City _________________ State________ Zip _________ Installing Contractor ______________________________ Sales Office _____________________________________ Start-Up Performed By ____________________________ UNIT Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________

B. PRELIMINARY EQUIPMENT CHECK (This section to be completed by installing contractor) 1. Is there any physical damage? Yes No a. If yes, was it noted on the freight bill and has a claim been filed with the shipper? Yes No b. Will this prevent start-up? Yes No Description ____________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ 2. Unit is installed level as per the installation instructions. Yes No 3. Power supply agrees with the unit nameplate. Yes No 4. Correct control voltage ________vac. Check transformer primary on 208/230 v. Yes No 5. Electrical power wiring is installed properly. Yes No 6. Unit is properly grounded. Yes No 7. Electrical circuit protection has been sized and installed properly. Yes No 8. Crankcase heaters energized for 24 hours before start-up. Yes No

9. Will this machine be controlled by a third party using BACnet/Lon/Modbus? Yes No If yes, will the controls contractor be present at start-up? Yes No

Chilled Water System Check (This section to be completed by installing contractor) 1. All chilled water valves are open. Yes No 2. All piping is connected properly. Yes No 3. All air has been purged from the system. Yes No 4. Chilled water pump is operating with the correct rotation. Yes No 5. Chilled water pump starter interlocked with chiller. Yes No

6. Units without hydronic package, and units with hydronic package installed on an open loop: inlet piping to cooler includes a 20 mesh strainer within 10 ft. of unit. Yes No

7. Water loop volume greater than 3 gal/ton for air conditioning Yes No or 6 gal/ton for process cooling and low ambient operation.

8. Has the water system been cleaned and flushed per the installation instructions?

NOTE: To avoid injury to personnel and damage to equipment or property when completing the procedures listed in this start-up checklist, use good judgment, follow safe practices, and adhere to the safety considerations/information as outlined in preceding sec- tions of this Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Trouble- shooting document.

CL-2

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

-- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E

9. Proper loop freeze protection provided to ____ F (C). Yes No Antifreeze type__________________ Concentration _____%. (If antifreeze solution is not utilized on 30RB machines and the minimum outdoor ambient is below 32F (0C) then items 10, 11, and 12 have to be completed to provide cooler freeze protection to 20F. Refer to Installation Instructions for proper cooler winterization procedure.) IMPORTANT: Adding antifreeze solution is the only certain means of protecting the unit from freeze-up if the heater fails or electrical power is interrupted or lost while temperatures are below 32F (0C).

10. Outdoor piping wrapped with electric heater tape. Yes No 11. Cooler heaters installed and operational. Yes No 12. Is the unit equipped with low ambient head pressure control? Yes No

If yes, are wind baffles installed? (Required if chiller will run below 32F Yes No and be exposed to the wind.)

13. Are there any VFDs on the chilled water pumps? Yes No a. Primary loop Yes No b. Secondary loop Yes No

14. Chiller controls the pump(s)? Yes No a. If yes, have the pump interlocks been wired? Yes No

Preliminary start-up complete.

Installing/Mechanical Contractor ___________________________________________ Date ________________________

CL-3

C. UNIT START-UP (Qualified individuals only. Factory start-up recommended!)

Cooler Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________

Compressors A1) Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ A2) Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ A3) Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ A4) Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ B1) Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ B2) Model ________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________

B3) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ B4) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ C1) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ C2) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ C3) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ C4) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ SPM Address ___________________________________ NOTE: SPM = Scroll Protection Module

Hydronic Package P1) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________ P2) Model _________________________________________ Serial _________________________________________

1. All liquid line service valves located near EXVs are open. Yes No 2. All discharge service valves are open. Yes No 3. All suction service valves are open. Yes No 4. All compressor rack holddown bolts and the RED compressor

shipping brackets removed. Yes No 5. Leak check unit. Locate, repair and report any refrigerant leaks. Yes No 6. All terminals are tight. Yes No 7. All plug assemblies are tight. Yes No 8. All cables, thermistors and transducers have been inspected for cross wires. Yes No

9. All thermistors are fully inserted into wells. Yes No 10. All armatures move freely on contactors. Yes No 11. Cooler heaters installed and operational if equipped. Yes No 12. Voltage at terminal block is within unit nameplate range. Yes No 13. Check voltage imbalance: A-B______ A-C______B-C______

Average voltage = __________ (A-B + A-C + B-C)/3 Maximum deviation from average voltage = _______ Voltage imbalance = ______% (max. deviation / average voltage) X 100 Is voltage imbalance less than 2%? Yes No (DO NOT start chiller if voltage imbalance is greater than 2%. Contact local utility for assistance.)

CL-4

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

-- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E

14. Verify cooler flow rate Yes No Pressure entering cooler _____ psig (kpa) Pressure leaving cooler _____ psig (kpa) Cooler pressure drop _____ psig (kpa) Psig x 2.31 ft/psi = _____ ft of water kPa x 0.334 m/psi = _____ m of water Cooler flow rate _____ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure Drop Curve provided in the 30RB Installation Instructions.)

15. Verify that isolation valves on factory-installed pump packages are properly Yes No positioned and locked prior to start-up (slot in-line with piping on both sides of pump).

16. Chilled water flow switch operational. Yes No

Start and operate machine. Complete the following: 1. Complete component test (make sure EXVs are checked after liquid line service valves are opened). 2. Check refrigerant and oil charge. Record charge information below. 3. Record compressor and condenser fan motor current. 4. Record operating data. 5. Provide operating instructions to owners personnel. Instruction time _______ hours

Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C Refrigerant Charge __________ ___________ ___________ Additional charge required __________ ___________ ___________

Oil Charge Indicate level in sight glass of compressors A1, B1 and C1. Level should be 3/4-7/8 of a full sight glass when off.

Additional oil charge required. Circuit A ______ Circuit B ______ Circuit C ______

Record Software Versions MODE RUN STATUS

(Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to obtain software versions)

A1 B1 C1

A2 B2 C2

A3 B3 C3

A4 B4 C4

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION

VERS

APPL CSA-SR- __ __ __ __ __ __ MARQ EXV1 EXV2 AUX1 AUX2 AUX3

CL-5

Component Test Complete the following tests to make sure all peripheral components are operational before the compressors are started.

MODE SERVICE TEST

*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.

Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position to perform Quick Test.

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY TEST* T.REQ OFF/ON Manual Sequence

CP.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Output CP.A2 OFF/ON Compressor A2 Output CP.A3 OFF/ON Compressor A3 Output CP.A4 OFF/ON Compressor A4 Output HGB.A OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass A Output CP.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Output CP.B2 OFF/ON Compressor B2 Output CP.B3 OFF/ON Compressor B3 Output CP.B4 OFF/ON Compressor B4 Output HGB.B OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass B Output CP.C1 OFF/ON Compressor C1 Output CP.C2 OFF/ON Compressor C2 Output CP.C3 OFF/ON Compressor C3 Output CP.C4 OFF/ON Compressor C4 Output HGB.C OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass C Output

QUIC Q.REQ OFF/ON Quick Test Mode EXV.A xxx% Circuit A EXV % Open EXV.B xxx% Circuit B EXV % Open EXV.C xxx% Circuit C EXV % Open FAN.A X Circuit A Fan Stages FAN.B X Circuit B Fan Stages FAN.C X Circuit C Fan Stages SPD.A xxx% Circ A Varifan Position SPD.B xxx% Circ B Varifan Position SPD.C xxx% Circ C Varifan Position FRV.A OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve A FRP.A OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out A FRV.B OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve B FRP.B OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out B FRV.C OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve C FRP.C OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out C RV.A OPEN/CLSE 4 Way Valve Circuit A RV.B OPEN/CLSE 4 Way Valve Circuit B BOIL OFF/ON Boiler Command HR1.A OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Enter Valve A HR2.A OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Leaving Valve A HR3.A OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Enter Valve A HR4.A OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Leaving Valve A HR1.B OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Enter Valve B HR2.B OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Leaving Valve B HR3.B OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Enter Valve B HR4.B OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Leaving Valve B PMP.1 OFF/ON Water Exchanger Pump 1 PMP.2 OFF/ON Water Exchanger Pump 2 CND.P OFF/ON Reclaim Condenser Pump CL.HT OFF/ON Cooler Heater Output CP.HT OFF/ON Condenser Heater Output

CL-6

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

-- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E

MODE SERVICE TEST (cont)

*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.

Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position to perform Quick Test.

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY QUIC(cont) CH.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Heater

CH.A2 OFF/ON Compressor A2 Heater CH.A3 OFF/ON Compressor A3 Heater CH.A4 OFF/ON Compressor A4 Heater CH.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Heater CH.B2 OFF/ON Compressor B2 Heater CH.B3 OFF/ON Compressor B3 Heater CH.B4 OFF/ON Compressor B4 Heater CH.C1 OFF/ON Compressor C1 Heater CH.C2 OFF/ON Compressor C2 Heater CH.C3 OFF/ON Compressor C3 Heater CH.C4 OFF/ON Compressor C4 Heater HGB.A OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass A Output HGB.B OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass B Output HGB.C OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass C Output Q.RDY OFF/ON Chiller Ready Status Q.RUN OFF/ON Chiller Running Status SHUT OFF/ON Customer Shut Down Stat CATO xx.x Chiller Capacity 0-10v ALRM OFF/ON Alarm Relay ALRT OFF/ON Alert Relay C.ALM OFF/ON Critical Alarm Relay

CL-7

Operating Data: Record the following information from the Run Status, Temperatures and Outputs Modes when machine is in a stable operating condition. If cooling load is insufficient, these readings must be obtained by putting the chiller in test mode (Service Test) and running each compressor. TEMPERATURES COOLER ENTERING FLUID EWT _______________ COOLER LEAVING FLUID LWT _______________ CONTROL POINT CTPT _______________ CAPACITY CAP _______________ OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE OAT _______________ LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID CHWS_______________ (Dual Chiller Control Only) OPTIONAL HEAT RECLAIM ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE HEWT _______________ LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE HLWT _______________

Install a manifold gage set to obtain readings and verify these against pressure transducers. CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C SCT.A __________ SCT.B __________ SCT.C___________ SST.A __________ SST.B __________ SST.C ___________ SGT.A __________ SGT.B __________ SGT.C ___________ SUP.A __________ SUP.B __________ SUP.C ___________ EXV.A__________ EXV.B __________ EXV.C ___________ NOTE: EXV A,B,C positions are found in the output mode.

COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT L1 L2 L3

COMPRESSOR A1 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR A2 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR A3 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR A4 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR B1 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR B2 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR B3 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR B4 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR C1 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR C2 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR C3 ______ ______ ______ COMPRESSOR C4 ______ ______ ______

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 FAN MOTOR 1 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 10 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 2 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 11 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 3 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 12 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 4 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 13 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 5 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 14 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 6 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 15 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 7 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 16 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 8 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 17 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 9 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 18 ______ ______ ______

CL-8

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

-- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E

Record Configuration Information MODE CONFIGURATION

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY DISP TEST OFF/ON Test Display LEDs

METR US-METR Metric Display LANG x Language

UNIT TYPE x Unit Type TONS xxx Unit Size VAR.A x NB Fan on Varifan CIR A VAR.B x NB Fan on Varifan CIR B VAR.C x NB Fan on Varifan CIR C HGBP x Hot Gas Bypass Control 60HZ NO/YES 60 Hz Frequency RECL NO/YES Heat Reclaim Select EHS x Electric Heater Stage EMM NO/YES EMM Module Installed PAS.E DSBL/ENBL Password Enable PASS xxxx Password Protection Must be Disabled FREE NO/YES Free Cooling Select PD4.D NO/YES Pro_Dialog Users Display BOIL OFF/ON Boiler Command Select VLT.S x VLT Fan Drive Select RPM.F xxxx VLT Fan Drive RPM MCHX NO/YES MCHX Exchanger Select FC x Factory Country Code VFDV xxx VFD Voltage for USA

SERV FLUD x Cooler Fluid Type MOP xx.x EXV MOP Setpoint HP.TH xxx.x High Pressure Threshold SHP.A xx.x Circuit A Superheat Setp SHP.B xx.x Circuit B Superheat Setp SHP.C xx.x Circuit C Superheat Setp HTR xx.x Cooler Heater DT Setp EWTO NO/YES Entering Water Control AU.SM NO/YES Auto Start When SM Lost BOTH NO/YES HSM Both Command Select LLWT xx Brine Min. Fluid Temp. LOSP xx.x Brine Freeze Setpoint HD.PG xx.x Varifan Proportion Gain HD.DG xx.x Varifan Derivative Gain HD.IG xx.x Varifan Integral Gain HR.MI xxx.x Reclaim Water Valve Min HR.MA xxx.x Reclaim Water Valve Max AVFA NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan A AVFB NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan B AVFC NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan C

OPTN CCNA xxx CCN Address CCNB xxx CCN Bus Number BAUD x CCN Baud Rate LOAD x Loading Sequence Select LLCS x Lead/Lag Circuit Select RL.S ENBL/DSBL Ramp Load Select DELY xx Minutes Time Off ICE.M ENBL/DSBL Ice Mode Enable PUMP x Cooler Pumps Sequence ROT.P xxxx Pump Rotation Delay PM.PS NO/YES Periodic Pump Start P.SBY NO/YES Stop Pump in Standby P.LOC NO/YES Flow Checked if Pump Off LS.ST xx.xx Night Low Noise Start LS.ND xx.xx Night Low Noise End LS.LT xxx Low Noise Capacity Lim OA.TH xx.x Heat Mode OAT Threshold FREE xx.x Free Cooling OAT Limit BO.TH xx.x Boiler OAT Threshold EHST xx.xx Elec Stag OAT Threshold EHSB NO/YES Last Heat Elec Backup E.DEF NO/YES Quick EHS in Defrost EHSP xx Elec Heat Pulldown AUTO NO/YES Auto Changeover Select

CL-9

MODE CONFIGURATION (cont)

MODE SETPOINT

MODE OPERATING MODE

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY RSET CRST x Cooling Reset Type

HRST x Heating Reset Type DMDC x Demand Limit Select DMMX xx.x mA for 100% Demand Lim DMZE xx.x mA for 0% Demand Limit MSSL x Master/Slave Select SLVA xxx Slave Address LLBL ENBL/DSBL Lead/Lag Balance Select LLBD xxx Lead/Lag Balance Delta LLDY xx Lag Start Delay LAGP x Lag Unit Pump Select LPUL xx Lead Pulldown Time

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY COOL CSP.1 xxx.x Cooling Setpoint 1

CSP.2 xxx.x Cooling Setpoint 2 CSP.3 xxx.x Ice Setpoint CRV1 xx.x Current No Reset Value CRV2 xx.x Current Full Reset Value CRT1 xxx.x Delta T No Reset Temp CRT2 xxx.x Delta T Full Reset Value CRO1 xxx.x OAT No Reset Temp CRO2 xxx.x OAT Full Reset Temp CRS1 xxx.x Space T No Reset Temp CRS2 xxx.x Space T Full Reset Temp DGRC xx.x Degrees Cool Reset CAUT xx.x Cool Changeover Setpt N/A CRMP x.x Cool Ramp Loading

HEAT HSP.1 xxx.x Heating Setpoint 1 N/A HSP.2 xxx.x Heating Setpoint 2 N/A HRV1 xx.x Current No Reset Val N/A HRV2 xx.x Current Full Reset Val N/A HRT1 xxx.x Delta T No Reset Temp N/A HRT2 xxx.x Delta T Full Reset Temp N/A HRO1 xxx.x OAT No Reset Temp N/A HRO2 xxx.x OAT Full Reset Temp N/A DGRH xx.x Degrees Heat Reset N/A HAUT xx.x Heat Changeover Setpt N/A HRMP x.x Heat Ramp Loading N/A

MISC DLS1 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 1 DLS2 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 2 DLS3 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 3 RSP xxx.x Heat Reclaim Setpoint RDB xx.x Reclaim Deadband

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY SLCT OPER x Operating Control Type

SP.SE x Setpoint Select HC.SE x Heat Cool Select RL.SE x Reclaim Select

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Catalog No. 04-53300209-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-8T Pg CL-10 2-21 Replaces: 30RB-7T

2021 Carrier

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

-- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

- -

C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E C

U T

A LO

N G

D O

T T

E D

L IN

E

COMMENTS:

SIGNATURES: Start-up Technician______________________________________________________ Date___________________________________

Customer Representative __________________________________________________ Date______________________________

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 30RB060-390 Carrier works, you can view and download the Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Installation Instructions for Carrier 30RB060-390 as well as other Carrier manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Installation Instructions should include all the details that are needed to use a Carrier 30RB060-390. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Carrier 30RB060-390 v7 Installation Instructions as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.